WO2013168773A1 - Laminate of conductive film, touch panel, wiring board, electronic appliance, transparent double-faced pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet - Google Patents

Laminate of conductive film, touch panel, wiring board, electronic appliance, transparent double-faced pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013168773A1
WO2013168773A1 PCT/JP2013/063064 JP2013063064W WO2013168773A1 WO 2013168773 A1 WO2013168773 A1 WO 2013168773A1 JP 2013063064 W JP2013063064 W JP 2013063064W WO 2013168773 A1 WO2013168773 A1 WO 2013168773A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
transparent
hydrocarbon group
compound
silver
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2013/063064
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
三田村 康弘
真也 荻窪
柴田 路宏
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2013168773A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013168773A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J133/04Homopolymers or copolymers of esters
    • C09J133/06Homopolymers or copolymers of esters of esters containing only carbon, hydrogen and oxygen, the oxygen atom being present only as part of the carboxyl radical
    • C09J133/08Homopolymers or copolymers of acrylic acid esters
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B15/00Layered products comprising a layer of metal
    • B32B15/04Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/29Laminated material
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/044Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means
    • G06F3/0445Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by capacitive means using two or more layers of sensing electrodes, e.g. using two layers of electrodes separated by a dielectric layer
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/22Secondary treatment of printed circuits
    • H05K3/28Applying non-metallic protective coatings
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2307/00Properties of the layers or laminate
    • B32B2307/40Properties of the layers or laminate having particular optical properties
    • B32B2307/412Transparent
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/08PCBs, i.e. printed circuit boards
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2203/00Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2203/326Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils for bonding electronic components such as wafers, chips or semiconductors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/314Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier the adhesive layer and/or the carrier being conductive
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2400/00Presence of inorganic and organic materials
    • C09J2400/10Presence of inorganic materials
    • C09J2400/16Metal
    • C09J2400/163Metal in the substrate
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K2201/00Indexing scheme relating to printed circuits covered by H05K1/00
    • H05K2201/01Dielectrics
    • H05K2201/0104Properties and characteristics in general
    • H05K2201/0108Transparent
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K2201/00Indexing scheme relating to printed circuits covered by H05K1/00
    • H05K2201/07Electric details
    • H05K2201/0753Insulation
    • H05K2201/0769Anti metal-migration, e.g. avoiding tin whisker growth
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K2203/00Indexing scheme relating to apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits covered by H05K3/00
    • H05K2203/12Using specific substances
    • H05K2203/122Organic non-polymeric compounds, e.g. oil, wax, thiol

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a conductive film laminate, a touch panel, a wiring board, an electronic device, a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet, and a transparent adhesive sheet.
  • Patent Document 1 a method of introducing a metal ion adsorbing compound into a polymer layer has been proposed.
  • a capacitive type touch panel has a structure in which many members are laminated, and an adhesive sheet is used for the purpose of bonding the members.
  • a capacitive touch panel having a laminated structure of cover glass / adhesive sheet / conductive film / glass substrate can be mentioned.
  • Patent Document 2 discloses a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a copolymer of a predetermined monomer component, and (meth) acrylic acid hydroxyalkyl ester ((E)) as a monomer component of the copolymer. It is described that whitening can be prevented when it contains (component) (paragraph 0040).
  • the present inventor provided a polymer layer in which a compound that forms an organic metal salt with a metal ion such as a thiol-containing compound disclosed in Patent Document 1 is provided on a silver-containing metal wiring, and examined its insulation reliability went.
  • the width and interval of the metal wiring in the wiring board are becoming narrower (specifically, the minimum value of the distance (interval) between the metal wirings is less than 50 ⁇ m). Is more likely to occur.
  • silver and copper having high conductivity are often used as the metal constituting the metal wiring, but these metals have a problem that ion migration is likely to occur, and this problem is particularly noticeable with silver. Under such circumstances, further improvement in insulation reliability between metal wirings containing silver in the wiring board is required.
  • the present inventor stuck a transparent adhesive sheet of a copolymer containing the component (E) disclosed in Patent Document 1 onto a substrate with metal wiring having a minimum distance between metal wirings of less than 50 ⁇ m, and the metal wiring
  • the insulation reliability was investigated.
  • a remarkable decrease in inter-wire resistance was confirmed between metal wirings, and the ion migration suppression effect did not satisfy the level required recently, and further improvement was necessary.
  • the copolymer contains a hydrophilic component such as the component (E). Therefore, when such a copolymer containing no component (E) is used, whitening proceeds and the transparency of the adhesive layer is lost. That is, in the prior art, the ion migration suppressing function and whitening prevention are often in a trade-off relationship.
  • the first aspect of the present invention is to provide a wiring board capable of suppressing the ion migration of silver from a metal wiring containing silver and improving the insulation reliability between the metal wirings.
  • a conductive film laminate including a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, in which ion migration of silver from a conductive film containing silver can be suppressed and insulation reliability between the conductive films can be improved. It is also intended to provide.
  • the second aspect of the present invention in view of the above circumstances, the ion migration of silver between metal wirings containing silver is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between the metal wirings is excellent, and the whitening resistance of the transparent adhesive layer
  • An object of the present invention is to provide an excellent wiring board.
  • the 2nd aspect of this invention also aims at providing the transparent adhesive sheet used for the said wiring board.
  • the present inventors have found that the dispersibility in the polymer layer of a metal ion-adsorbing compound such as a thiol-containing compound disclosed in Patent Document 1 has an influence. . More specifically, the metal ion adsorbing compound such as the thiol-containing compound disclosed in Patent Document 1 has low dispersibility due to its structure. Therefore, even if the metal ion adsorbing compound is introduced into the polymer layer (resin layer), it is difficult to uniformly disperse the compound in the polymer layer, and migration of metal ions (particularly silver ions) is suppressed. The effect is not obtained.
  • the metal ion adsorbing compound when a large amount of the metal ion adsorbing compound is introduced into the polymer layer, the metal ion adsorbing compound is precipitated in the polymer layer, causing deterioration of the polymer and deterioration of electrical reliability. Furthermore, there is a possibility that problems such as promoting the diffusion of metal ions and causing wiring breakdown may occur. Based on the above knowledge, the present inventors use a compound having a specific functional group and having a reducing ability for metal ions, and using a conductive film (or metal wiring) containing a predetermined amount of silver. Thus, it has been found that the problem of the first aspect can be solved. That is, the present inventors have found that the problem of the first aspect can be solved by the following configuration.
  • a conductive film laminate comprising a transparent substrate, a conductive film containing silver disposed on the transparent substrate, and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet bonded to the conductive film, The amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film is 50 ⁇ g / mm 2 or less, A conductive film laminate, wherein the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a transparent resin and compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3) described later.
  • the conductive film laminate according to (1), wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (4) to (6) described later.
  • a wiring board comprising an insulating substrate, a metal wiring containing silver disposed on the insulating substrate, and a silver ion diffusion suppressing layer disposed on the metal wiring, The amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring is 50 ⁇ g / mm 2 or less, A wiring board, wherein the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer contains an insulating resin and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3) described later. (9) The wiring board according to (8), wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (4) to (6) described later. (10) The wiring board according to (8) or (9), wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (5) to (6) described later.
  • the present inventors conducted extensive studies on the problems of the prior art. As a result, the transparent adhesive containing a compound exhibiting a predetermined oxidation-reduction potential and having a time-dependent change in haze in a predetermined environmental test. It has been found that the problem of the second aspect can be solved by using a sheet. That is, the present inventors have found that the problem of the second aspect can be solved by the following configuration.
  • the wiring board (14) an insulating substrate; A plurality of metal wirings including silver disposed on an insulating substrate; A wiring board comprising a transparent adhesive layer disposed on the metal wiring in direct contact with the metal wiring, The minimum distance between adjacent metal wires is less than 50 ⁇ m, The transparent adhesive layer contains a compound having a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V, and an adhesive, The wiring substrate, wherein the transparent adhesive layer is a transparent adhesive layer having a time X of 12 hours or less in an environmental test described later. (15) The wiring board according to (14), wherein the compound includes a phenol compound. (16) The wiring board according to (14) or (15), wherein the compound contains a phenol compound having an oxidation-reduction potential of 0.50 to 1.20 V.
  • the transparent adhesive sheet according to (20), wherein the compound comprises a phenol compound.
  • the transparent adhesive according to any one of (20) to (22), wherein the compound comprises at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3) to be described later Sheet.
  • the conductive film stack including the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can suppress the ion migration of silver from the conductive film containing silver and can improve the insulation reliability between the conductive films.
  • the body can be provided.
  • the silver ion migration between the metal wirings containing silver is suppressed, the wirings exhibit excellent insulation reliability between the metal wirings and are excellent in whitening resistance of the transparent adhesive layer.
  • a substrate can be provided.
  • the transparent adhesive sheet used for the said wiring board can also be provided.
  • the dispersibility of the reducing compound in the resin can be improved and deterioration of the resin can be suppressed, and the amount of silver in the conductive film (or metal wiring)
  • the reduction property of a predetermined reducing compound is further improved by setting the value to be a predetermined value or less.
  • the compound since the compound is well dispersed in the resin, the reduced silver is less likely to be localized, and as a result, it is difficult to have absorption in the visible region, and deterioration of coloring and haze can be suppressed.
  • the specific surface area of the silver component in the conductive film is increased by controlling the amount of silver, and the improvement effect by the reducing compound is increased. Improve more.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an embodiment of a wiring board.
  • the wiring board 10 includes an insulating substrate 12 and an insulating substrate 16 with a metal wiring provided on the insulating substrate 12, and a metal wiring. 14 and a silver ion diffusion suppression layer 18 covering 14. Below, each member (the insulating substrate 12, the metal wiring 14, and the silver ion diffusion suppression layer 18) is explained in full detail.
  • the type of the insulating substrate is not particularly limited as long as it is insulative and can support metal wiring.
  • an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, a glass substrate, or the like can be used.
  • the insulating substrate may have a structure in which at least two substrates selected from the group consisting of an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, and a glass substrate are stacked.
  • Resin is mentioned as a material of an organic substrate,
  • a thermosetting resin a thermoplastic resin, or resin which mixed them.
  • the thermosetting resin include phenol resin, urea resin, melamine resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, diallyl phthalate resin, epoxy resin, silicone resin, furan resin, ketone resin, xylene resin, benzocyclo Examples include butene resin.
  • the thermoplastic resin include polyimide resin, polyphenylene oxide resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, aramid resin, and liquid crystal polymer.
  • a glass woven fabric, a glass nonwoven fabric, an aramid woven fabric, an aramid nonwoven fabric, an aromatic polyamide woven fabric, a material impregnated with the above resin, or the like can be used as a material of the organic substrate.
  • the metal wiring mainly contains silver.
  • Silver may be contained in the form of a silver alloy.
  • examples of the metal contained other than silver include tin, palladium, gold, nickel, and chromium.
  • the metal wiring may contain a resin component such as a binder or a photosensitive compound as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and may further contain other components as necessary. .
  • a metal wiring contains the metal nanowire which consists of silver or a silver alloy. The metal nanowire will be described in detail later.
  • the amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring is 50 ⁇ g / mm 2 or less.
  • silver amount is preferably at 30 [mu] g / mm 2 or less, more preferably 15 [mu] g / mm 2 or less.
  • the conductive properties of the metal wire is more excellent, it is preferably 0.001 [mu] g / mm 2 or more, more preferably 0.005 / mm 2 or more.
  • the measuring method in particular of silver amount is not restrict
  • the amount of silver can be measured by observing a cross-sectional SEM photograph of a metal wiring and conducting elemental analysis.
  • the metal wiring is brought into contact with a strong acid such as nitric acid to dissolve silver in the metal wiring, and the amount of silver can be measured from the dissolved amount.
  • a strong acid such as nitric acid
  • the amount of silver in the metal wiring is obtained by calculation from the amount of the dispersion used to produce the metal wiring. You can also.
  • per unit area of the metal wiring means per unit area of the contact portion of the metal wiring with the insulating substrate.
  • the amount of silver is calculated based only on the area of the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate.
  • the area of the insulating substrate surface that is not in contact with the metal wiring (for example, the surface of the insulating substrate that is not in contact with the metal wiring that is located between the metal wirings) is considered in the calculation per unit area of the metal wiring.
  • I ca n’t enter. Therefore, the amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring means the amount of silver contained per unit area (mm 2 ) at the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate.
  • the width of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 10,000 ⁇ m, and preferably 0.1 to 300 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of ensuring electrical reliability in the highly integrated portion and the lead wiring portion (lead wiring portion) of the wiring board. More preferably, 0.1 to 100 ⁇ m is more preferable, and 0.2 to 50 ⁇ m is particularly preferable.
  • the distance between the metal wirings is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 1000 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 300 ⁇ m, still more preferably 0.1 to 100 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board. Particularly preferred is ⁇ 50 ⁇ m.
  • the shape of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and may be an arbitrary shape. For example, a linear shape, a curved shape, a rectangular shape, a circular shape, and the like can be given. Further, a plurality of metal wirings may be arranged in a desired pattern (for example, a stripe shape).
  • the thickness of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 to 30 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 0.01 to 20 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board.
  • the metal wiring 14 is provided on only one side of the insulating substrate 12, but may be provided on both sides. That is, the insulating substrate 16 with metal wiring may be a single-sided substrate or a double-sided substrate. When the metal wiring 14 is on both surfaces of the insulating substrate 12, the silver ion diffusion touching layer 18 may also be provided on both surfaces.
  • the metal wiring 14 has a single-layer wiring structure as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • an insulating substrate 16a multilayer wiring substrate
  • metal wiring in which a plurality of metal wirings 14a and 14b and insulating substrates 12a and 12b are alternately stacked wiring of a multilayer wiring structure
  • the substrate 100 may be used.
  • a through hole may be formed in the insulating substrate.
  • the metal wiring on both surfaces may be made conductive by filling the through hole with a metal (for example, silver or silver alloy).
  • the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is a layer that is disposed on the surface of the insulating substrate with metal wiring on the metal wiring side, covers the surface of the metal wiring, and suppresses silver ion migration between the metal wirings. In addition, it is preferable that a silver ion or metal silver is not substantially contained in a silver ion diffusion suppression layer. If the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer contains excessive silver ions or metallic silver, the silver ion migration suppressing effect may be lowered.
  • substantially free of silver ions or metallic silver means that the silver ion or metallic silver content in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is 1 ⁇ mol / l or less, and 0.1 ⁇ mol / l or less. More preferably, it is 0 mol / l.
  • the thickness of the silver ion diffusion suppression layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 1000 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 to 500 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint that the ion migration suppression ability of the silver ion diffusion suppression layer is more excellent.
  • the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer contains an insulating resin and at least one compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formula (1), formula (2), and formula (3).
  • the insulating resin and the compound will be described in detail.
  • the insulating resin By including an insulating resin in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, the insulating resin covers the metal wiring and is disposed between the metal wirings, thereby ensuring insulation between the metal wirings.
  • a known insulating resin can be used, and a curable insulating resin (for example, thermosetting insulating resin and It is preferable to use a resin obtained by curing a photocurable insulating resin.
  • thermosetting insulating resin examples include epoxy resin, bismaleimide triazine resin, polyimide resin, acrylic resin, phenol resin, melamine resin, silicon resin, unsaturated polyester resin, cyanate ester resin, isocyanate resin, and modified products thereof.
  • examples thereof include resins.
  • examples of the photocurable insulating resin include unsaturated polyester resins, polyester acrylate resins, urethane acrylate resins, silicone acrylate resins, epoxy acrylate resins, and modified resins thereof.
  • insulating resins include, for example, polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymer (EEA), polylactic acid, fluorine-containing resin, poly Thermoplastic resins such as ether sulfone resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, and polyether ether ketone resin are also included. Especially, an epoxy resin and an acrylic resin are preferable at the point which is more excellent in compatibility with the compound mentioned later.
  • an insulating resin may be impregnated into a core material such as a glass woven fabric, a glass nonwoven fabric, or an aramid nonwoven fabric.
  • a core material such as a glass woven fabric, a glass nonwoven fabric, or an aramid nonwoven fabric.
  • glass cloth epoxy resin, glass cloth bismaleimide triazine resin, glass cloth polyphenylene ether resin, aramid nonwoven fabric-epoxy resin, aramid nonwoven fabric-polyimide resin, or the like may be used.
  • the insulating resin is a curable resin, a curing agent, a curing accelerator, or the like may be used in combination as necessary. Note that two or more insulating resins may be mixed and used as the insulating resin.
  • the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer By containing at least one compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formula (1), formula (2) and formula (3) (hereinafter also simply referred to as a reducing compound) in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer Silver ion migration is further suppressed.
  • This reducing compound plays a role of reducing silver ions. That is, even if silver ions are eluted from the metal wiring, silver ions are reduced to silver by the reducing compound, and ion migration is suppressed.
  • this reducing compound is excellent in dispersibility in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, and the localization of the reduced silver is suppressed. As a result, the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is yellowed (in the visible light region). Absorption).
  • the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer may contain two or more compounds represented by the formulas (1) to (3).
  • R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group that may have a hetero atom.
  • a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a group obtained by combining these is preferable in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
  • the kind of the hetero atom contained in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom.
  • Y 1 to Y 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferred because they are easier to handle.
  • t represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom or an aromatic which may have an oxygen atom from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • a group hydrocarbon group or a combination thereof is preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40 and more preferably 4 to 20 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
  • the range of the number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, the aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom or a group in which these are combined is also in the above range. It is preferable that
  • Z represents a hydrogen atom, an acyl group, or an RzOC ( ⁇ O) group.
  • Rz represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • Z is preferably a hydrogen atom in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the acyl group or RzOC ( ⁇ O) group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 12 and more preferably 2 to 8 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
  • the total number of carbon atoms contained in each of R 1 to R 5 is 4 or more. That is, at least one of R 1 to R 5 is a group containing a carbon atom (such as the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, the aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a combination of these). When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
  • R 1 to R 5 when only one of R 1 to R 5 is a group containing a carbon atom (for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, etc.), the number of carbon atoms in the group is It may be 4 or more. In the compound, when a plurality of groups among R 1 to R 5 are groups containing carbon atoms (for example, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, etc.), the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group is 4 That is all you need.
  • R 1 and R 2 are alkyl groups and R 3 to R 5 are hydrogen atoms
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 1 and the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 2 As long as the total number of is 4 or more.
  • R 1 to R 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the type of ring formed is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a 5- to 6-membered ring structure.
  • R 1 to R 5 may further contain a known substituent, if necessary.
  • substituents include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group, and a carbamoyl group.
  • R 6 to R 8 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group obtained by combining these.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic hydrocarbon group or a combination thereof is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40 and more preferably 2 to 20 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppression ability. More preferred.
  • the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 6 to R 8 is 6 or more.
  • the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved.
  • 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
  • R 6 to R 8 are alkyl groups, the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 6 and the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 7
  • the total number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group represented by R 8 may be 6 or more.
  • R 6 to R 8 may further contain a known substituent, if necessary. Examples of the substituent are the same as the substituents substituted with R 1 to R 5 described above.
  • R 6 to R 8 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • R 9 to R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group that may contain a heteroatom, an aryl group that may contain a heteroatom, or a combination thereof.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group or aryl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40 and more preferably 2 to 20 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
  • the alkyl group or aryl group may contain a hetero atom.
  • the type of hetero atom contained is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom.
  • X 1 to X 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferred because they are easier to handle.
  • R a , R b and R c are each independently selected from a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 9 to R 12 is 6 or more.
  • the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved.
  • 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
  • R 9 to R 12 are all alkyl groups
  • the total number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 11 and the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 12 may be 6 or more.
  • R 9 to R 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the compound represented by the formula (4) is preferably mentioned in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
  • R 14 and R 15 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group optionally having a hetero atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, or a group obtained by combining these in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention.
  • a tertiary carbon atom or an alkyl group containing a quaternary carbon atom is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the requirements described later, but is preferably 1 to 40, and more preferably 2 to 20.
  • the range of the number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, the aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, or a combination of these is also in the above range. It is preferable that In particular, R 14 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and R 15 is an alkyl group having 10 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in at least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 is 1-40.
  • the solubility in the insulating resin is improved, the dispersibility of the compound in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is improved, and as a result, the silver ion migration suppressing ability is improved.
  • the number of carbon atoms is preferably 8 to 40, more preferably 10 to 30.
  • the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 is 4 or more. When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
  • the compound represented by the formula (5) or the formula (6) is preferable in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent. Most preferred is a compound.
  • R 31 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group include —O—R a .
  • R a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 12 and more preferably 1 to 10 in terms of excellent compatibility with the insulating resin. More specifically, examples of the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and a group obtained by combining these.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the total molecular weight of each group of R 31 to R 38 is 24 or more. Especially, 35 or more are preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • the sum of the molecular weights of the respective groups is intended to be a value obtained by calculating the molecular weights of the respective groups R 31 to R 38 and summing them. Further, any two of R 31 to R 38 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the definition of the hetero atom is the same as the definition of the hetero atom in the hydrocarbon group which may have the hetero atom represented by R 1 to R 5 described above.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a heteroatom represented by R 31 to R 36 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon which may have an oxygen atom in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Selected from the group consisting of a group (for example, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group), an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom (for example, a phenyl group), and a combination thereof. Groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms are preferred.
  • R 37 and R 38 each independently preferably represents a —CH 2 —R 40 group, a hydroxyl group, or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom is preferably a linear alkyl group from the viewpoint of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
  • R 40 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group obtained by combining these.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • R 39 represents a C 1-20 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may contain a hetero atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-10. Examples include a methylene group, an ethylidene group, an isopropylidene group, a butylidene group, an isononylidene group, and a cyclohexylidene group, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the definition of the hetero atom is the same as the definition of the hetero atom in the hydrocarbon group which may have the hetero atom represented by R 1 to R 5 described above.
  • R 41 to R 44 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
  • the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 41 to R 44 is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 31 to R 38 described above.
  • the total molecular weight of each group of R 41 to R 44 is 40 or more. Especially, 50 or more are preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. Further, any two of R 41 to R 44 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the definition of the hetero atom is the same as the definition of the hetero atom in the hydrocarbon group which may have the hetero atom represented by R 1 to R 5 described above.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a heteroatom represented by R 41 to R 44 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon which may have an oxygen atom from the viewpoint of more excellent effects of the present invention.
  • a group of 1 to 20 is preferable.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • L represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these.
  • the hydrocarbon group represented by L has a divalent or trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, or an oxygen atom, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Examples thereof may include a divalent or trivalent aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 40, more preferably 2 to 20, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is 6 to 40 are preferable, and 6 to 20 are more preferable.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic. n represents an integer of 2 or 3.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (1) include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (4) include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (5) include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (2) include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (3) include the following compounds.
  • the mass relationship between the insulating resin and the reducing compound in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is not particularly limited, but the total mass A of the reducing compound and the total mass B of the insulating resin are more excellent in terms of ion migration suppressing ability.
  • the mass ratio (A / B) is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.10 or less. Although a minimum in particular is not restrict
  • total mass A represents those total mass, when two or more types of reducing compounds are contained.
  • the total mass B represents the total mass when two or more kinds of insulating resins are included.
  • the insulating substrate, the metal wiring, and the wiring substrate having the silver ion diffusion suppression layer can be used for various applications and structures. Examples include a panel substrate for a plasma display panel, a substrate for a solar cell electrode, a membrane wiring board, a substrate for a touch panel electrode, and the like.
  • the wiring board according to the first aspect of the present invention is preferably included in an electronic device.
  • Electronic devices include touch panels or membrane switches, televisions equipped with them, mobile communication devices, personal computers, game devices, in-vehicle display devices, network communication devices, lighting / display LEDs, electronic wiring devices for solar cell control, RFID, etc.
  • the method for forming the metal wiring on the insulating substrate is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted.
  • a subtractive method using an etching process a semi-additive method using electrolytic plating, a method for producing metal wiring using a silver paste (for example, a silver nanoparticle or silver nanowire-containing paste)
  • a method for producing metal wiring using a silver paste for example, a silver nanoparticle or silver nanowire-containing paste
  • a method using a photosensitive material disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-188360, a vacuum deposition method, a sputter film formation method, an ion plating method, and the like.
  • the silver paste is a conductive paste-like substance (paste) obtained by dispersing silver particles having a predetermined particle size in an appropriate solvent such as a resin binder, and is used for attaching a sample or conducting a conductive treatment. Yes.
  • a conductive paste-like substance obtained by dispersing silver particles having a predetermined particle size in an appropriate solvent such as a resin binder, and is used for attaching a sample or conducting a conductive treatment.
  • an appropriate solvent such as a resin binder
  • the method for producing the wiring board is not particularly limited.
  • the composition for forming a silver ion diffusion suppressing layer containing the insulating resin, the reducing compound and the solvent is applied onto the insulating board with metal wiring, and the solvent is removed.
  • stacking the film for silver ion diffusion suppression layers containing the said insulating resin and the said compound directly on an insulated substrate with metal wiring is also mentioned. From the viewpoint of easy adjustment of the thickness of the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, the method by the above application is preferable.
  • the method for applying the silver ion diffusion suppression layer forming composition onto the insulating substrate with metal wiring is not particularly limited, and is a dispensing method, a screen printing method, a curtain coating method, a barcode method, a spin coater method, an inkjet method, A known method such as a dip dipping method can be employed.
  • the dispense method, the screen printing method, the spin coater method, and the ink jet method are preferable because the amount of adhesion of the silver ion diffusion suppression layer can be more easily controlled.
  • a heat treatment or an exposure treatment may be performed as necessary.
  • the optimum heating temperature is appropriately selected according to the thermosetting resin to be used, but it is usually preferably 100 to 300 ° C, more preferably 100 to 250 ° C.
  • the heating time is preferably 0.2 to 10 hours and more preferably 0.5 to 5 hours from the viewpoint of productivity.
  • the light used for exposure is appropriately selected according to the photocurable resin used. For example, ultraviolet rays and visible light can be used.
  • the exposure time is preferably 0.2 to 10 hours and more preferably 0.5 to 5 hours from the viewpoint of productivity.
  • the insulating layer 20 is disposed on the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer 18 as shown in FIG. Below, the material (insulating layer) used is demonstrated, and the procedure of a manufacturing method is demonstrated after that.
  • Insulating layer As a material for the insulating layer, a known insulating material can be used. For example, epoxy resin, aramid resin, crystalline polyolefin resin, amorphous polyolefin resin, fluorine-containing resin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluorinated polyimide, perfluorinated amorphous resin, etc.), polyimide resin, polyether sulfone resin, polyphenylene Examples thereof include sulfide resin, polyether ether ketone resin, and acrylate resin. Moreover, you may use what is called a transparent adhesive sheet (OCA) for optics as an insulating layer.
  • OCA transparent adhesive sheet
  • OCA a commercially available product may be used, and examples thereof include 8171CL series and 8146 series manufactured by 3M Corporation. Moreover, you may use what is called a soldering resist layer as an insulating layer.
  • a commercially available solder resist may be used, for example, PFR800 manufactured by Taiyo Ink Manufacturing Co., Ltd., PSR4000 (trade name), SR7200G manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., and the like.
  • an insulating layer contains resin which has an epoxy group or a (meth) acrylate group.
  • the resin is easily bonded to the above-described silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, and as a result, the adhesion of the insulating layer is improved, and as a result, the silver ion magnation suppressing effect is further improved.
  • the resin is preferably the main component of the insulating layer.
  • the main component means that the total amount of the resin is 50% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the insulating layer, and is preferably 60% by mass or more. In addition, as an upper limit, it is 100 mass%.
  • a known epoxy resin can be used.
  • a glycidyl ether type epoxy resin, a glycidyl ester type epoxy resin, a glycidyl amine type epoxy resin, or the like can be used.
  • the resin having a (meth) acrylate group a known resin can be used.
  • an acrylate resin or a methacrylate resin can be used.
  • the method for forming the insulating layer on the wiring board is not particularly limited, and a known method can be employed. For example, a method of laminating a film of an insulating layer directly on a wiring substrate, a method of applying a composition for forming an insulating layer containing a component constituting the insulating layer on the wiring substrate, a composition of the wiring substrate for forming the insulating layer The method of immersing in a thing is mentioned.
  • the said composition for insulating layer formation may contain the solvent as needed.
  • positioning this composition on a wiring board you may heat-process in order to remove a solvent as needed.
  • the thickness of the insulating layer to be formed is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 50 ⁇ m and more preferably 10 to 40 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of the insulation reliability between the metal wirings.
  • the insulating layer in the obtained wiring board with an insulating layer may be partially removed by drilling or laser processing, and a semiconductor chip may be mounted and used as a circuit board.
  • a semiconductor chip may be mounted and used as a circuit board.
  • place a mask with a predetermined pattern on the insulating layer apply energy to cure, remove the insulating layer in the non-energy-applied region, and expose the metal wiring
  • the semiconductor chip is mounted on the surface of the metal wiring.
  • metal wiring may be further provided on the obtained insulating layer.
  • the method for forming the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and a known method (plating treatment, sputtering treatment, etc.) can be used.
  • a substrate in which metal wiring is further provided on the insulating layer arranged in the outermost layer in the obtained wiring substrate with insulating layer is used as a new insulating substrate with metal wiring (inner layer substrate).
  • a number of new insulating layers and metal wirings can be stacked.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic cross-sectional view of one embodiment of the conductive film stack
  • the conductive film stack 300 includes a transparent substrate 302 and a conductive film 304 containing silver or a silver alloy disposed on the transparent substrate 302. And a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 bonded onto the conductive film 304.
  • each member (The transparent substrate 302, the electrically conductive film 304, the transparent double-sided adhesive sheet 306) is explained in full detail.
  • the type of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited as long as it supports a conductive film and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet described later and is a substrate transparent to visible light.
  • a polymer resin is used in addition to glass.
  • the polymer resin include polyolefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, polyether sulfone, polysulfone, polyarylate, cyclic polyolefin, polyimide, and the like.
  • the shape of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a plate shape and a film shape.
  • the thickness of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, and when the conductive film laminate is applied to a touch panel, the thickness is preferably 0.01 to 3.0 mm, and more preferably 0.05 to 1.5 mm.
  • the transparent substrate preferably has high transparency in the visible light region, and preferably has a total light transmittance of 80% or more.
  • the transparent substrate may have other functional layers such as an undercoat layer.
  • Other functional layers include, for example, matting agent layers, protective layers, solvent resistant layers, antistatic layers, smoothing layers, adhesion improving layers, light shielding layers, antireflection layers, hard coat layers, stress relaxation layers, antifogging layers. , Antifouling layers, printed layers, and easy-adhesion layers. These may be a single layer or a plurality of layers.
  • the conductive film is disposed on the transparent substrate and mainly contains silver.
  • the conductive film can be used as a transparent electrode or peripheral wiring (lead wiring) of a touch panel when applied to a touch panel.
  • the conductive film may contain a resin component such as a binder or a photosensitive compound as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and may further contain other components as necessary.
  • Silver may be contained in the form of a silver alloy, and when the conductive film contains a silver alloy, examples of the metal contained other than silver include tin, palladium, gold, nickel, and chromium.
  • the pattern shape of the conductive film is not particularly limited, and as shown in FIG.
  • a wiring shape (patterned conductive film) (in other words, provided as a conductive thin wire). Or may be provided over the entire surface.
  • the pattern shape may be an arbitrary pattern such as a stripe shape.
  • the amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film is 50 ⁇ g / mm 2 or less.
  • amount of silver is preferably at 30 [mu] g / mm 2 or less, more preferably 15 [mu] g / mm 2 or less.
  • 0.001 microgram / mm ⁇ 2 > or more is preferable and 0.005 microgram / mm ⁇ 2 > or more is more preferable at the point which the electroconductivity of a electrically conductive film is more excellent.
  • 0.001 microgram / mm ⁇ 2 > or more is preferable and 0.005 microgram / mm ⁇ 2 > or more is more preferable at the point which the electroconductivity of a electrically conductive film is more excellent.
  • the measuring method in particular of silver amount is not restrict
  • the amount of silver can be measured by observing a cross-sectional SEM photograph of the conductive film and conducting elemental analysis.
  • the amount of silver can be measured from the dissolved amount by bringing the conductive film into contact with a strong acid such as nitric acid to dissolve the silver in the conductive film.
  • the amount of silver in the conductive film is obtained by calculation from the amount of the dispersion used to produce the conductive film. You can also.
  • per unit area of the conductive film means per unit area of the contact portion of the conductive film with the transparent substrate. That is, the amount of silver is calculated based only on the area of the contact portion between the conductive film and the transparent substrate.
  • the area of the transparent substrate surface that is not in contact with the conductive film is the area of the conductive film. It is not taken into consideration in the calculation per unit area. Therefore, the amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film means the amount of silver contained per unit area (mm 2 ) at the contact portion between the conductive film and the transparent substrate.
  • the thickness of the conductive film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.05 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 20 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to a touch panel.
  • the conductive film is applied as a transparent electrode of a touch panel, it is preferable to have high transparency in the visible light region, and it is preferable that the total light transmittance is 80% or more.
  • the width of the conductive film is not particularly limited. However, from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to the touch panel, 0.1 to 100,000 ⁇ m is preferable, and 1 to 20000 ⁇ m is more preferable. It is preferably 1 to 10,000 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 to 300 ⁇ m.
  • the distance between the conductive films is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to the touch panel, 0.1 to 500 ⁇ m is preferable in the narrowest part. .1 to 100 ⁇ m is more preferable, and 0.1 to 20 ⁇ m is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • the method for forming the conductive film is not particularly limited, and a physical film formation method such as a vapor deposition method or a sputtering method, or a chemical vapor phase method such as a CVD method, or a silver paste containing silver nanoparticles or silver nanowires is applied. And a method using a silver salt disclosed in JP2009-188360A.
  • the conductive film When the conductive film is applied as a transparent electrode such as a touch panel, the conductive film preferably contains a metal nanowire made of silver or a silver alloy (hereinafter also simply referred to as a metal nanowire). By using this metal nanowire, a conductive film can be formed at a low temperature, and a transparent electrode having high transmittance and low resistance can be provided.
  • a metal nanowire made of silver or a silver alloy
  • the metal nanowire is composed of silver or a silver alloy.
  • the kind of silver alloy is as above-mentioned.
  • the metal nanowire has conductivity and has a shape in which the length in the major axis direction is sufficiently longer than the diameter (length in the minor axis direction). It may be a solid fiber or a hollow fiber.
  • the material of the metal nanowire is particularly preferably silver or an alloy of silver and another metal in terms of excellent conductivity.
  • Other metals used in the alloy with silver include platinum, osmium, palladium, iridium, tin, bismuth, nickel and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the average minor axis length (sometimes referred to as “average minor axis diameter” or “average diameter”) of the metal nanowire is preferably 5 to 50 nm, more preferably 5 to 25 nm, and particularly preferably 5 to 20 nm.
  • the average minor axis length is less than 5 nm, the oxidation resistance may deteriorate and the durability may deteriorate.
  • the average minor axis length exceeds 50 nm, the scattering of the metal nanowires increases, and the haze value of the conductive film may increase.
  • the average minor axis length by setting the average minor axis length to 25 nm or less, the scattering of the metal nanowires can be reduced, and the haze value of the conductive film is greatly improved (reduced).
  • a touch panel using a conductive film having a small haze can eliminate the pattern appearance (bone appearance) of the conductive film and improve the visibility of the touch panel.
  • the average minor axis length of the metal nanowires was determined by observing 300 metal nanowires using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX) and calculating the average minor axis length of the metal nanowires from the average value. I ask for it.
  • the short axis length when the short axis of the metal nanowire is not circular is the shortest axis.
  • the average major axis length of the metal nanowire (sometimes referred to as “average length”) is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 5 ⁇ m to 40 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 5 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m. If the average major axis length is less than 5 ⁇ m, it is difficult to form a dense network, and sufficient conductivity may not be obtained. If it exceeds 40 ⁇ m, metal nanowires are too long and become entangled during production. In the manufacturing process, agglomerates may occur.
  • the average major axis length of the metal nanowire is, for example, observed with 300 transmission nanoscopes using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX), and the average length of the metal nanowires from the average value. Find the shaft length.
  • TEM transmission electron microscope
  • JEM-2000FX transmission electron microscope
  • the method for producing the metal nanowire is not particularly limited and may be produced by any method, but it is preferably produced by reducing metal ions in a solvent in which a halogen compound and a dispersant are dissolved.
  • a method for producing metal nanowires JP2009-215594A, JP2009-242880A, JP2009-299162A, JP2010-84173A, JP2010-86714A, The method described in JP-T-2009-505358 can be used.
  • the aspect ratio of the metal nanowire can be appropriately selected according to the purpose, but is not particularly limited as long as it is 10 or more, more preferably 50 or more, further preferably 100 or more, further preferably 5000 or more, and from 10,000 100,000 is particularly preferred.
  • the aspect ratio generally means the ratio between the long side and the short side of the fibrous material (ratio of average major axis length / average minor axis length).
  • a measuring method of an aspect ratio According to the objective, it can select suitably, For example, the method etc. which measure with an electron microscope etc. are mentioned.
  • the aspect ratio of the whole metal nanowire can be estimated by separately measuring the average major axis length and the average minor axis length of the metal nanowire.
  • the outer diameter of the tube is used as the diameter for calculating the aspect ratio.
  • a method for forming a conductive film containing metal nanowires made of silver or a silver alloy is not particularly limited, and together with the metal nanowires, as a matrix component, (1) a photosensitive composition containing at least a binder and a photopolymerizable composition, It is preferable to use a composition containing at least (2) a sol-gel cured product or (3) a composition containing at least a polymer.
  • the mass ratio of the mass of the matrix component (all components excluding the metal nanowire and the solvent contained in the conductive film) to the mass of the metal nanowire is 0.5 to 15 (more preferably 1.0 to 12, Particularly preferred is 2.0 to 10).
  • the mass ratio is less than 0.5, the binder component is small, the adhesion of the metal nanowires to the substrate surface is weak, and the film strength may be weak.
  • the mass ratio exceeds 15, the surface resistance value of the conductive film May rise.
  • the binder is a linear organic high molecular polymer, and at least one group that promotes alkali solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain) (for example, it can be appropriately selected from alkali-soluble resins having a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and the like. Among these, those that are soluble in an organic solvent and soluble in an aqueous alkali solution are preferable, and those that have an acid-dissociable group and become alkali-soluble when the acid-dissociable group is dissociated by the action of an acid are particularly preferable. preferable.
  • the acid dissociable group represents a functional group that can dissociate in the presence of an acid.
  • a known radical polymerization method can be applied for the production of the binder.
  • Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent and the like when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and experimental conditions are determined. be able to.
  • a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable.
  • the polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain include, for example, As described in JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partial ester Maleic acid copolymers, acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, polymers obtained by adding an acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group, and a polymer having a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain Are also preferred.
  • benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymers and multi-component copolymers composed of benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers are particularly preferable.
  • a high molecular polymer having a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain and a multi-component copolymer composed of (meth) acrylic acid / glycidyl (meth) acrylate / other monomers are also useful.
  • the polymer can be used by mixing in an arbitrary amount.
  • linear organic polymer 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer described in JP-A-7-140654, 2- Hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl acrylate / polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macro And monomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer.
  • (meth) acrylic acid and other monomers copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic acid are suitable.
  • Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, vinyl compounds, and the like. In these, the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group and aryl group may be substituted with a substituent.
  • Examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate or aryl (meth) acrylate include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, and pentyl (meth).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the binder is preferably from 1,000 to 500,000, more preferably from 3,000 to 300,000, and even more preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, from the viewpoints of alkali dissolution rate, film physical properties and the like.
  • the weight average molecular weight is measured by gel permeation chromatography and can be determined using a standard polystyrene calibration curve.
  • the content of the binder is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, more preferably 10 to 85% by mass, and 20 to 80% by mass based on the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowires. Further preferred. Within the above range, both developability and conductivity of the metal nanowire can be achieved.
  • the photopolymerizable composition means a composition that imparts a function of forming an image by exposure to the conductive film or gives the trigger for the function.
  • the basic component includes (a) an addition-polymerizable unsaturated compound and (b) a photopolymerization initiator that generates radicals when irradiated with light.
  • the addition polymerizable unsaturated compound of component (a) (hereinafter also referred to as “polymerizable compound”) is polymerized by causing an addition polymerization reaction in the presence of a radical.
  • a compound having at least one, more preferably two or more, more preferably four or more, and still more preferably six or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds at the molecular terminals is used.
  • the These have chemical forms such as monomers, prepolymers, ie dimers, trimers or oligomers, or mixtures thereof.
  • Various kinds of such polymerizable compounds are known, and they can be used as the component (a).
  • particularly preferred polymerizable compounds are trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) from the viewpoint of film strength.
  • Acrylate is particularly preferred.
  • the content of the component (a) is preferably 2.6 to 37.5% by mass based on the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowire, and is preferably 5.0 to 20%. More preferably, it is 0.0 mass%.
  • the photopolymerization initiator of component (b) is a compound that generates radicals when irradiated with light.
  • the photopolymerization initiator include a compound that generates an acid radical that finally becomes an acid upon irradiation with light, or a compound that generates another radical.
  • the former is referred to as “photoacid generator”, and the latter is referred to as “photoradical generator”.
  • Photoacid generators include photoinitiators for photocationic polymerization, photoinitiators for photoradical polymerization, photodecolorants for dyes, photochromic agents, irradiation with actinic rays or radiation used in microresists, etc.
  • photoinitiators for photocationic polymerization photoinitiators for photoradical polymerization
  • photodecolorants for dyes photochromic agents, irradiation with actinic rays or radiation used in microresists, etc.
  • known compounds that generate acid radicals and mixtures thereof can be appropriately selected and used.
  • Such a photoacid generator is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the intended purpose.
  • a triazine having at least one di- or tri-halomethyl group 1,3,4-oxadiazole Naphthoquinone-1,2-diazido-4-sulfonyl halide, diazonium salt, phosphonium salt, sulfonium salt, iodonium salt, imide sulfonate, oxime sulfonate, diazodisulfone, disulfone, o-nitrobenzyl sulfonate, and the like.
  • imide sulfonate, oxime sulfonate, and o-nitrobenzyl sulfonate which are compounds that generate sulfonic acid
  • imide sulfonate, oxime sulfonate, and o-nitrobenzyl sulfonate which are compounds that generate sulfonic acid
  • a compound in which a group or a compound that generates an acid radical upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation is introduced into the main chain or side chain of the resin for example, US Pat. No. 3,849,137, German Patent No. 3914407.
  • JP-A-63-26653, JP-A-55-164824, JP-A-62-69263, JP-A-63-146038, JP-A-63-163452, JP-A-62-153853 The compounds described in JP-A-63-146029, etc. can be used. Furthermore, compounds described in each specification such as US Pat. No. 3,779,778 and European Patent 126,712 can also be used as an acid radical generator.
  • triazine compound for example, compounds described in JP2011-018636A and JP2011-254046A can be used.
  • the photoacid generators compounds that generate sulfonic acid are preferable, and the following oxime sulfonate compounds are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of high sensitivity.
  • the photoacid generator When a compound having a 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide group is used as the photoacid generator, high sensitivity and good developability are obtained.
  • the photoacid generators the following compounds in which D is independently a hydrogen atom or a 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide group are preferred from the viewpoint of high sensitivity.
  • the photoradical generator is a compound having a function of generating radicals by directly absorbing or photosensitizing light to cause a decomposition reaction or a hydrogen abstraction reaction.
  • the photo radical generator is preferably one having absorption in a wavelength region of 300 nm to 500 nm.
  • a large number of compounds are known as such photo radical generators. For example, triazine compounds, carbonyl compounds, ketal compounds, benzoin compounds, acridine compounds as described in JP-A-2008-268884 are known.
  • Organic peroxide compounds, azo compounds, coumarin compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, organic boric acid compounds, disulfonic acid compounds, oxime ester compounds, and acylphosphine (oxide) compounds can be appropriately selected according to the purpose.
  • a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a hexaarylbiimidazole compound, an oxime ester compound, or an acylphosphine (oxide) compound is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
  • photoradical generator for example, photoradical generators described in JP2011-018636A and JP2011-254046A can be used.
  • a photoinitiator may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together,
  • the content is 0 on the basis of the total mass of solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing metal nanowire. 1 to 50% by mass is preferable, 0.5 to 30% by mass is more preferable, and 1 to 20% by mass is still more preferable. In such a numerical range, when a pattern including a conductive region and a non-conductive region described later is formed on the conductive film, good sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
  • additives other than the above components include, for example, chain transfer agents, crosslinking agents, dispersants, solvents, surfactants, antioxidants, sulfurization inhibitors, metal corrosion inhibitors, viscosity modifiers, preservatives, and the like. Various additives are mentioned.
  • Chain transfer agent The chain transfer agent is used for improving the exposure sensitivity of the photopolymerizable composition.
  • chain transfer agents include N, N-dialkylaminobenzoic acid alkyl esters such as N, N-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-mercaptobenzoxazole, and 2-mercaptobenzoic acid.
  • the content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 15% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowires described above. More preferably, it is 0.5 to 5% by mass.
  • the crosslinking agent is a compound that forms a chemical bond by free radical, acid, or heat, and cures the conductive film, and is substituted with at least one group selected from, for example, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group.
  • an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, and a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group are particularly preferable in terms of film properties, heat resistance, and solvent resistance.
  • oxetane resin can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture with an epoxy resin.
  • the crosslinking agent when used in combination with an epoxy resin, the reactivity is high, which is preferable from the viewpoint of improving film properties.
  • the crosslinking agent is also included in the polymerizable compound, and the content thereof is included in the content of the polymerizable compound in the present invention. Should be considered.
  • the content of the cross-linking agent is preferably 1 to 250 parts by mass, and more preferably 3 to 200 parts by mass when the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowire is 100 parts by mass.
  • Dispersing agent is used in order to disperse
  • the dispersant is not particularly limited as long as the metal nanowires can be dispersed, and can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose.
  • a commercially available dispersant can be used as a pigment dispersant, and a polymer dispersant having a property of adsorbing to metal nanowires is particularly preferable.
  • polymer dispersant examples include polyvinyl pyrrolidone, BYK series (manufactured by Big Chemie), Solsperse series (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), and Ajisper series (manufactured by Ajinomoto Co., Inc.).
  • the polymer dispersant is also included in the binder, and the content thereof is It should be considered that it is included in the content.
  • the content of the dispersant is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 40 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the binder.
  • the solvent is a component used to form a coating liquid for forming a composition containing the metal nanowire and the photopolymerizable composition on the surface of the substrate in the form of a film, and is appropriately selected depending on the purpose. can do.
  • the solvent is a component used to form a coating liquid for forming a composition containing the metal nanowire and the photopolymerizable composition on the surface of the substrate in the form of a film, and is appropriately selected depending on the purpose. can do.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, 3-methoxybutanol
  • water 1-methoxy-2-propanol
  • isopropyl acetate methyl lactate N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP), ⁇ -butyrolactone (GBL), propylene carbonate, and the like.
  • This solvent may also serve as at least a part of the solvent of the metal nanowire dispersion described above. These may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the solid content concentration of the coating solution containing such a solvent is preferably contained in the range of 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • Metal corrosion inhibitor It is preferable to contain a metal corrosion inhibitor for metal nanowires.
  • a metal corrosion inhibitor for metal nanowires There is no restriction
  • the metal corrosion inhibitor should be added to the composition for forming the photosensitive layer by dissolving it in a suitable solvent, or by adding powder, or by immersing it in a metal corrosion inhibitor bath after preparing the conductive film. Can do.
  • a metal corrosion inhibitor is added, it is preferably contained in an amount of 0.5 to 10% by mass with respect to the metal nanowires.
  • the other matrix it is possible to use, as at least a part of the components constituting the matrix, a polymer compound as a dispersant used in the production of the metal nanowire described above.
  • a composition containing at least a sol-gel cured product as a matrix component can be used together with the metal nanowires.
  • cured material is explained in full detail.
  • sol-gel cured product (Sol-gel cured product)
  • the sol-gel cured product is obtained by hydrolyzing and polycondensing an alkoxide compound of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti, Zr and Al (hereinafter also referred to as “specific alkoxide compound”), and further heating and drying as desired. Is obtained.
  • the specific alkoxide compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (X) because it is easily available.
  • M 1 (OR 20 ) a R 21 4-a (X)
  • M 1 represents an element selected from Si, Ti and Zr
  • R 20 and R 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, and a represents an integer of 2 to 4) Show.
  • Each hydrocarbon group of R 20 and R 21 in the general formula (X) is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the carbon number in the case of showing an alkyl group is preferably 1 to 18, more preferably 1 to 8, and still more preferably 1 to 4.
  • a phenyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group or aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced include a halogen atom, an amino group, an alkylamino group, and a mercapto group.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (X) is a low molecular compound, and preferably has a molecular weight of 1000 or less.
  • the ratio of the specific alkoxide compound to the metal nanowire is in the range of 0.25 / 1 to 30/1. It is preferably used.
  • the mass ratio is smaller than 0.25 / 1, the transparency is inferior, and at the same time, at least one of the wear resistance, heat resistance, moist heat resistance and flex resistance becomes a conductive film,
  • the mass ratio is larger than 30/1, a conductive film having poor conductivity and bending resistance is obtained.
  • the mass ratio is more preferably in the range of 0.5 / 1 to 20/1, more preferably in the range of 1/1 to 15/1, and most preferably in the range of 2/1 to 8/1.
  • High conductivity and high transparency It is preferable because it can stably obtain a conductive material having high properties (total light transmittance and haze), excellent wear resistance, heat resistance and moist heat resistance, and excellent flex resistance.
  • the conductive film can be formed using a composition containing at least a polymer as a matrix component together with the metal nanowires.
  • a composition containing at least a polymer as a matrix component together with the metal nanowires will be described in detail.
  • Synthetic polymers and natural polymers are included as polymers, and synthetic polymers include polyester, polyimide, polyacryl, polyvinylon, polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, methacrylic acid resin, fluorine resin, and phenol resin. , Melamine resin, silicone resin, synthetic rubber, and latex of these.
  • natural polymers include cellulosic resins and natural rubber.
  • a protective layer made of a protective coating material may be provided on the conductive film.
  • a protective coating material for forming the protective layer for example, those described in JP2011-167848A can be applied.
  • Protective coating materials include crosslinkers, polymerization initiators, stabilizers (eg, antioxidants and UV stabilizers for prolonging product life, and polymerization inhibitors for improving shelf life), surfactants, and the like You may include what has a special effect.
  • the protective coating material may further include a corrosion inhibitor that prevents corrosion of the metal nanowires.
  • the method for forming the protective layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a known wet coating method. Specifically, spray coating, bar coating, roll coating, die coating, ink jet coating, screen coating, dip coating and the like can be mentioned.
  • the protective layer When forming the protective layer while impregnating the transparent conductive film with the protective layer coating, if the film thickness of the protective layer after application and drying is too thin relative to the conductive film before application, scratch resistance, abrasion resistance, The function as a protective layer such as weather resistance is reduced, and if it is too thick, the contact resistance as a conductor increases.
  • the film thickness after coating and drying is preferably 30 to 150 nm.
  • the surface resistivity, haze, and the like can be adjusted to achieve predetermined values.
  • 40 to 175 nm is more preferable, and 50 to 150 nm is particularly preferable.
  • the film thickness after drying of the coating material for the protective layer depends on the film thickness of the transparent conductive film, the protective function by the protective layer tends to work better when the film thickness is 30 nm or more, and the film thickness is 150 nm or less. When it is, it exists in the tendency which can ensure more favorable electroconductive performance.
  • the conductive film may be patterned into a desired shape depending on the application.
  • the method for patterning the conductive film is not particularly limited.
  • the conductive film is exposed and developed. More specifically, it includes a pattern exposure step and a development step, and further includes other steps as necessary.
  • the matrix of the conductive film is non-photosensitive, it is preferably patterned by the following methods (1) to (2).
  • a photoresist layer is provided on the conductive film, and a desired pattern exposure and development are performed on the photoresist layer to form the patterned resist (etching mask material), and then the conductive film can be etched.
  • a patterning method in which a conductive film in a region not protected by a resist is etched to be disconnected or lost by a wet process in which an etching solution is used or a dry process such as reactive ion etching. This method is described, for example, in JP-T-2010-507199 (particularly, paragraphs 0212 to 0217).
  • a photo-curing resin is provided on a pattern in a desired region on the conductive film by an ink jet method or a screen printing method, and the photo-curing resin layer is subjected to a desired exposure to form a resist (etching)
  • etching A patterning method in which, after forming a mask material, the conductive film is immersed in an etchant that can be etched or the etchant is showered to disconnect or disappear the conductive film in a region that is not protected by the resist.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include roll coating, bar coating, dip coating, spin coating, casting, die coating, blade coating, bar coating, gravure coating, curtain coating, and spray. Examples thereof include a coating method and a doctor coating method. Examples of printing methods include letterpress (letterpress) printing, stencil (screen) printing, lithographic (offset) printing, and intaglio (gravure) printing.
  • the resist layer formed in this step may be a positive resist layer or a negative resist layer.
  • the pattern-shaped exposed region is solubilized, and a patterned resist layer is formed in the unexposed region (unsolubilized region).
  • the exposed region is A cured resist layer is formed, and by application of the solution, the unexposed portion, that is, the uncured portion of the resist layer is removed, and a patterned resist layer is formed.
  • the type of the resist layer forming material used in the method (1) is not particularly limited, and any of a negative type, a positive type and a dry film type can be used.
  • a commercially available alkali-soluble photoresist can be appropriately selected and used.
  • Fujifilm Color Mosaic Series, FILS Series, FIOS Series, FMES Series, FTENS Series, FIES Series, Positive Type for Semiconductor Processes, Negative Photoresist Series, Fuji Chemical Fujiresist Series, Above all, FR Series, FPPR Series, FMR series, FDER series, etc. can be used preferably.
  • AZ Electronic Materials photoresist series among them, RFP series, TFP series, SZP series, HKT series, SFP, series, SR series, SOP series, SZC series, CTP series, ANR series, P4000 series, TPM606, 40XT, nXT series, etc. are preferably mentioned.
  • As dry film resists Hitachi Chemical, photosensitive film for printed wiring boards, Asahi Kasei E-materials photosensitive dry film SUNFORT series, DuPont MRC dry film FXG series, FXR series, FX900 series, JSF100 series, SA100 series , LDI series, FRA series, CM series, FUJIFILM Transer series, etc., which can be used as appropriate.
  • These resist layer forming materials may be appropriately selected according to the resolution of the pattern formed in the conductive film.
  • a photosensitive resist layer of a dry film resist prepared in advance may be transferred to the surface of the formed conductive film.
  • exposure is performed at an oxygen concentration of 5% or less using an etching mask material containing a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the conductive film may be patterned on the target substrate by transfer using a transfer material. Further, as described in JP 2011-167848 A, [0147] to [0148], a conductive film can be patterned by applying a remover (etching solution) on the conductive film by screen printing. Is possible.
  • the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is a sheet that is transparent and has adhesiveness on the front and back surfaces.
  • the sheet is laminated on the conductive film so that one of the adhesive surfaces is attached to the conductive film.
  • the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is attached to the conductive film side of a transparent substrate with a conductive film having a transparent substrate and a conductive film disposed thereon.
  • the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 is placed on the conductive film 304 so that the front surface 306 c and the back surface 306 d of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 exhibit adhesiveness, Be placed.
  • the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet only needs to have at least a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and may be a type having a base material in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is disposed on both sides of the base material (transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material) It may be of a type consisting only of an adhesive layer and having no substrate (baseless transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet). Of these, a substrate-less transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is preferable from the viewpoint of thinning a product using the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet.
  • the transparent double-sided PSA sheet contains the reducing compound described above.
  • the preferred embodiment of the reducing compound contained is as described above.
  • the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate
  • the reducing compound may be contained in either the substrate or the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. It may be included.
  • the conductive film laminate was left in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment because the dispersibility of the reducing compound in the adhesive is more excellent. Even if it is a case, the fall of the adhesive force of an adhesive layer is not seen.
  • the content of the reducing compound in the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, but the mass ratio (A / C) of the total mass A of the reducing compound and the total mass C of the transparent resin is the inside of the transparent resin of the reducing compound.
  • the precipitation of the sheet is further suppressed and the transparency of the sheet is more excellent, the precipitation of the reducing compound in the vicinity of the sheet surface is further suppressed, the adhesion between the sheet and the adherend is further improved, and the electrical reliability is further improved. From the point of improvement, 0.20 or less is preferable, and 0.10 or less is more preferable.
  • total mass A represents those total mass, when two or more types of reducing compounds are contained.
  • the total mass C represents the total mass thereof.
  • the thickness of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 150 ⁇ m and more preferably 20 to 100 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to a touch panel.
  • the thickness of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 20 ⁇ m or more it is possible to cover the steps and irregularities of the substrate to be attached, and by making the thickness 100 ⁇ m or less, it is possible to sufficiently secure the transmittance of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet. can get.
  • the adhesive layer is provided on both sides of the substrate.
  • the type of substrate used is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to use a transparent substrate.
  • the transparent substrate for example, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polyethylene film, polypropylene film, cellophane, diacetyl cellulose film, triacetyl cellulose film, acetyl cellulose butyrate film, polyvinyl chloride film, Polyvinylidene chloride film, polyvinyl alcohol film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polymethylpentene film, polysulfone film, polyetheretherketone film, polyethersulfone film, polyetherimide film, polyimide film , Fluorine resin film, nylon film, acrylic It can be exemplified a resin
  • the material of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, and known materials can be used.
  • various transparent resin pressure sensitive adhesives such as rubber pressure sensitive adhesive, acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive, silicone pressure sensitive adhesive, urethane pressure sensitive adhesive, etc. can be used, but the transparency is more excellent and the compatibility with the reducing compound is more.
  • An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive is preferred from the viewpoint of superiority.
  • the acrylic adhesive is based on an acrylic polymer having a main skeleton of an alkyl (meth) acrylate monomer unit.
  • (Meth) acrylate refers to acrylate and / or methacrylate.
  • the average carbon number of the alkyl group of the alkyl (meth) acrylate constituting the main skeleton of the acrylic polymer is preferably about 1 to 12, and specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) ) Acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • the transparent double-sided PSA sheet has a total light transmittance of 80% or more (more preferably 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more) immediately after standing at 60 ° C. and 90% RH for 100 hours, and a haze of 1 It is preferably 0.0% or less (more preferably 0.7% or less).
  • the water absorption of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is 2.0% or less (more preferably 1.25% or less, more preferably 1.0% or less) after 100 hours of static value at 60 ° C. and 90% RH. ) Is preferable.
  • the method for measuring the water absorption rate is in accordance with the method described in JP2012-11637A.
  • the said transparent double-sided adhesive sheet can be manufactured by a well-known method.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a reducing compound on a separator (release liner) is applied so that the thickness after drying becomes a predetermined thickness.
  • the coating layer is dried and cured as necessary to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, whereby a transparent double-sided PSA sheet can be produced.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a reducing compound may be directly applied to the substrate surface and dried to provide a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (direct copying method).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided on the substrate by transferring (bonding) to the substrate (transfer method).
  • the method of apply coating an adhesive composition to the base-material surface containing a reducing compound, providing an adhesive layer, and manufacturing a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet with a base material is also mentioned, for example.
  • the conductive film 304 and the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 are provided on one surface of the transparent substrate 302, but the embodiment is not limited thereto.
  • conductive films 304a and 304b and transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets 306a and 306b may be provided on both surfaces of the transparent substrate 302 as in a conductive film laminate 400 shown in FIG.
  • the pattern shapes of both may be different.
  • the conductive films 304a and 304b are both thin lines, and are disposed so as to be orthogonal to each other.
  • the conductive film laminate according to the first aspect of the present invention includes a transparent substrate, a conductive film containing silver disposed on the transparent substrate, and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet bonded to the conductive film. . If necessary, another member (for example, a protective substrate described later) may be bonded to the exposed surface of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet.
  • a conductive film laminated body is a touch panel, a display electrode, an electromagnetic wave shield, an organic or inorganic EL display electrode, an electronic paper, a flexible display electrode, an integrated solar cell, for example. It is widely applied to display devices and other various devices. Among these, the lead wiring part of the touch panel is particularly preferable. Below, the aspect of the lead wiring part of a touchscreen is explained in full detail.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic plan view of a part of the touch panel member
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line AA.
  • a touch panel member 500 illustrated in FIG. 6A includes a touch panel conductive film stack 600 and a flexible circuit 30 that is bonded to a predetermined position of the touch panel conductive film stack 600.
  • the conductive film laminate 600 for a touch panel is provided with a transparent electrode layer 34 (for example, an ITO layer or a silver-containing layer) and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 42 on one surface side of the transparent substrate 32.
  • the transparent electrode layer 34 is formed in a pattern in which a plurality of diamond shapes aligned on the transparent substrate 32 are linearly connected in one direction.
  • the transparent electrode layer 34 is provided with a plurality of lead wires 36 that are electrically connected.
  • a conductor (not shown) is provided at the end of the lead wiring 36 and is electrically connected to a terminal (not shown) in the flexible circuit 30.
  • the transparent substrate 32 includes an active area 38 that functions as a sensing unit (sensor unit) that can be visually recognized by a touch panel user and can detect a touch position in an area where the transparent electrode layer 34 is provided.
  • the outside is an inactive area 40.
  • the frame portion of the touch panel corresponds to the inactive area 40.
  • the lead wiring 36 and the flexible circuit 30 exist in the inactive area 40 as described above.
  • the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 42 By disposing the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 42 on the lead wiring 36 so as to cover the lead wiring 36, disconnection of the lead wiring 36 and short-circuiting between the lead wirings 36 can be further suppressed.
  • one of the preferred embodiments of the conductive film laminate is a transparent substrate, an electrode pattern portion that is disposed on the transparent substrate and functions as a sensor, the electrode of the electrode pattern portion is connected to one end on the transparent substrate, and the other
  • a conductive film laminate for a touch panel having a terminal wiring portion made of a lead wiring containing silver and having an end connected to a terminal connected to an external control circuit, and at least the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disposed on the lead wiring Is mentioned.
  • the amount of silver contained per unit area of the lead wiring is 50 ⁇ g / mm 2 or less, and the transparent double-sided PSA sheet contains the above-described transparent resin and reducing compound.
  • the transparent adhesive layer which shows a predetermined characteristic by the environmental test mentioned later is easy to interact with a water
  • ion migration suppression ability and whitening resistance which have conventionally been in a trade-off relationship, at a higher level.
  • the compound is a phenol compound
  • the hydroxyl group in the compound easily interacts with the material (adhesive) constituting the transparent adhesive layer, and the dispersibility in the transparent adhesive layer is more excellent.
  • ion migration suppression ability and whitening resistance can be achieved at a higher level.
  • the transparent adhesive sheet includes at least a compound having an oxidation-reduction potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V and a transparent adhesive layer containing the adhesive.
  • a transparent adhesion layer containing the adhesive.
  • the transparent adhesive layer of the transparent adhesive sheet contains a compound having a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V (hereinafter also referred to as a reducing compound as appropriate).
  • This reducing compound is a so-called migration inhibitor (migration inhibitor), and when this reducing compound is contained in the transparent adhesive layer, the silver ions in the transparent adhesive layer are reduced to metallic silver, thereby causing ion migration. Suppress.
  • the redox potential of the reducing compound is 0.40 to 1.30 V, and in particular, 0.50 to 1.20 V is preferable, and 0.55 to 1.1 V is more preferable in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent. 0.55 to 1.0 V is more preferable.
  • the measuring method of the oxidation-reduction potential of the reducing compound used in the second aspect of the present invention can be measured by methods described in many literatures, in the present invention, the value measured by the following method Is defined as a redox potential.
  • a redox potential After bubbling Ar for 5 minutes in a DMF solution containing 1 mM of reducing compound and tetrabutylammonium perchlorate as a supporting electrolyte, cyclic voltammetry was performed with a potentiostat (ALS-604A). Measure.
  • Working electrode Glassy Carbon
  • counter electrode Pt
  • reference electrode redox potential when using saturated calomel electrode is measured.
  • the type of the reducing compound is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the oxidation-reduction potential, and examples thereof include phenol compounds, amine compounds, sulfur compounds, and phosphorus compounds. Since the reducing compound in the second aspect of the present invention is oxidized instead of being oxidized if the oxidation-reduction potential is within a specified range, the intended effect can be obtained. Especially, a phenol compound is preferable at the point which is excellent in the dispersibility in a transparent adhesion layer, and is more excellent in ion migration suppression ability. More specifically, since the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exhibits a relatively hydrophilic property, the hydroxyl group in the phenol compound tends to form an interaction with the pressure-sensitive adhesive constituting the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Dispersibility is excellent, and as a result, ion migration suppression ability is improved.
  • the type of phenol compound is not particularly limited as long as the above redox potential is satisfied, and examples thereof include DL- ⁇ -tocopherol.
  • Preferable embodiments of the phenol compound include compounds represented by the following formulas (1A) to (3A). If it is this compound, it is excellent in compatibility with an adhesive and it is excellent in ion migration suppression ability.
  • R 11a to R 15a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group include —O—R 31a .
  • R 31a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. When there are a plurality of —O—R 31a , they may be the same or different.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 12 and more preferably 1 to 10 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive. More specifically, examples of the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and a group obtained by combining these.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the total molecular weight of each group of R 11a to R 15a is 21 or more. Especially, 35 or more are preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • the sum of the molecular weights of the above groups is intended to be a value obtained by calculating the molecular weights of the respective groups of R 11a to R 15a and summing them. Further, any two of R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • two adjacent groups such as R 11a and R 12a , R 12a and R 13a , R 13a and R 14a , or R 14a and R 15a may be bonded to form a ring.
  • the type of ring formed is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a 5- to 6-membered ring structure.
  • the kind of the hetero atom contained in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom.
  • a halogen atom an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom.
  • Y 1 to Y 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferred because they are easier to handle.
  • t represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • R 11a and R 15a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 8 and more preferably 1 to 4 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • the hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, or these The group which combined these is mentioned.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the hydrocarbon group may contain an oxygen atom.
  • R 12a and R 14a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 2 to 9 and more preferably 3 to 8 in view of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • R 13a preferably represents a hydroxyl group or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom (for example, —O—R a ).
  • R a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 13a and R a is preferably 1 to 18 and more preferably 1 to 15 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. That is, any two of R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • two adjacent groups such as R 11a and R 12a , R 12a and R 13a , R 13a and R 14a , or R 14a and R 15a may be bonded to form a ring.
  • the type of ring formed is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a 5- to 6-membered ring structure.
  • R 16a to R 23a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
  • the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 16a to R 23a is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 11a to R 15a described above.
  • the total molecular weight of each group of R 16a to R 23a is 24 or more. Especially, 35 or more are preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • any two of R 16a to R 23a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • R 24a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
  • R 16a , R 23a and R 24a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom.
  • the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 16a , R 23a and R 24a is the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 11a and R 15a described above. It is synonymous with the suitable range of.
  • R 17a , R 19a, R 20a and R 22a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom.
  • the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing the oxygen atom represented by R 17a , R 19a, R 20a and R 22a may contain the oxygen atom represented by R 12a and R 14a described above. It is synonymous with the suitable range of a hydrocarbon group.
  • R 18a and R 21a each independently represent a hydroxyl group or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom (for example, —O—R a ).
  • R a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 18a and R 21a is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 13a and R a described above.
  • R 25a to R 28a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may contain a hetero atom.
  • the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 25a to R 28a is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 11a to R 15a described above.
  • the total molecular weight of each group of R 25a to R 28a is 40 or more. Especially, 50 or more are preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
  • any two of R 25a to R 28a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • L represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the divalent hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 12 and more preferably 1 to 10 in terms of excellent compatibility with the insulating resin.
  • m represents an integer of 2 or 3.
  • R 25a to R 28a each independently preferably represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom.
  • the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 25a to R 28a is the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 11a and R 15a described above. It is synonymous with.
  • L preferably represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group optionally having an oxygen atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40, and more preferably 2 to 20.
  • the hydrocarbon group may be any of linear, branched, cyclic, or aromatic forms, and examples thereof include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the oxygen atom may be contained in the hydrocarbon group in the form of a linking group such as —O— or —COO—.
  • R 13a in formula (1A) and R 18a and R 21a in formula (2A) includes a group represented by formula (4)
  • R 32a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 19 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 32a is preferably 1 to 15 and more preferably 1 to 12 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  • * represents a bonding position.
  • the compound represented by the formula (5) is preferably mentioned in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
  • R 40a and R 41a each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom.
  • a tertiary carbon atom or an alkyl group containing a quaternary carbon atom is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but 2 to 20 is more preferable.
  • R 40a is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms
  • R 41a is preferably an alkyl group having 10 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms contained in at least one of R 11a , R 15a , R 40a and R 41a is preferably 1-20.
  • the solubility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive is improved, the dispersibility of the compound is improved, and as a result, the ability to suppress ion migration of silver is improved.
  • the number of carbon atoms is preferably 8-20, and more preferably 10-18.
  • the total number of carbon atoms contained in each of R 11a , R 15a , R 40a and R 41a is preferably 4 or more. When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility in the adhesive is more excellent.
  • Adhesive It does not specifically limit as an adhesive, If a material (for example, adhesive resin) which shows adhesiveness, a well-known material can be used. For example, various adhesives such as rubber adhesives, acrylic adhesives, silicone adhesives, urethane adhesives can be used, but in terms of better transparency and compatibility with reducing compounds. An acrylic adhesive is preferred.
  • the acrylic adhesive is based on an acrylic polymer having a main skeleton of an alkyl (meth) acrylate monomer unit.
  • (Meth) acrylate refers to acrylate and / or methacrylate.
  • the average carbon number of the alkyl group of the alkyl (meth) acrylate constituting the main skeleton of the acrylic polymer is preferably about 1 to 12, and specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) ) Acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet has a base material in which the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is disposed on at least one main surface of the base material, even if the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is composed of only the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and does not have a base material Even if it is a type (transparent adhesive sheet with a substrate.
  • a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet with a substrate having an adhesive layer on both sides of the substrate a transparent single-sided adhesive sheet with a substrate having an adhesive layer only on one side of the substrate
  • a substrate-less transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is preferable from the viewpoint of thinning a product using the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet.
  • the type of substrate used is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to use a transparent substrate.
  • the transparent substrate for example, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polyethylene film, polypropylene film, cellophane, diacetyl cellulose film, triacetyl cellulose film, acetyl cellulose butyrate film, polyvinyl chloride film, Polyvinylidene chloride film, polyvinyl alcohol film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polymethylpentene film, polysulfone film, polyetheretherketone film, polyethersulfone film, polyetherimide film, polyimide film , Fluorine resin film, nylon film, acrylic It can be exemplified a resin film or the like.
  • the transparent adhesive layer contained in the transparent adhesive sheet is a transparent adhesive layer in which time X indicates 12 hours or less in the following environmental test. Especially, it is preferable that the said time X is less than 6 hours at the point which the ion migration suppression capability of a transparent adhesion layer is more excellent. When the said time X is over 12 hours, it is inferior to ion migration suppression ability.
  • a transparent adhesive layer (length 5 cm ⁇ width 4 cm ⁇ thickness 50 ⁇ m) containing the reducing compound and a predetermined adhesive is provided on a glass substrate, and a PET substrate (50 ⁇ m) is formed on the transparent adhesive layer. To prepare an evaluation sample. Thereafter, the evaluation sample is allowed to stand for 72 hours at 65 ° C.
  • the evaluation sample is taken out and left in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH.
  • the haze of the transparent adhesive layer in the evaluation sample is measured using “HR-100 type” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory, and the time X until the haze reaches 3% or less is measured.
  • the mass ratio (A / B) of the mass (A) of the reducing compound and the mass (B) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive in the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited. In terms of superiority, 0.0001 to 0.20 is preferable, and 0.0005 to 0.10 is more preferable.
  • the total light transmittance of the transparent adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80% or more (more preferably 85% or more, still more preferably 90% or more).
  • the total light transmittance is measured using “HR-100 type” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory.
  • the thickness of the transparent adhesive layer in the transparent adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 250 ⁇ m and more preferably 20 to 200 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of application of the adhesive sheet to a touch panel.
  • the thickness of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 250 ⁇ m and more preferably 20 to 200 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of application of the adhesive sheet to a touch panel.
  • the said transparent adhesive sheet can be manufactured by a well-known method.
  • a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the reducing compound and the pressure-sensitive adhesive is applied on a separator (release liner) so that the thickness after drying becomes a predetermined thickness.
  • the coating layer is dried and cured as necessary to form a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, whereby a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be produced.
  • a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided by directly applying and drying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the reducing compound and the pressure-sensitive adhesive on the surface of the substrate ( (Direct copying method), after forming a transparent adhesive layer containing the above-mentioned compound on the separator in the same manner as described above, a transparent adhesive layer may be provided on the substrate by transferring (bonding) to the substrate (transfer method) . Furthermore, after apply
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the wiring board.
  • the wiring board 10 includes an insulating substrate 12, a metal wiring 14 disposed on the insulating substrate 12, and a transparent adhesive layer 19 that covers the metal wiring 14. With.
  • the insulating substrate 12 and the metal wiring 14 constitute an insulating substrate 16 with metal wiring.
  • each member (the insulated substrate 12, the metal wiring 14, and the transparent adhesion layer 19) is explained in full detail.
  • the type of the insulating substrate is not particularly limited as long as it is insulative and can support metal wiring.
  • an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, a glass substrate, or the like can be used.
  • the insulating substrate may have a structure in which at least two substrates selected from the group consisting of an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, and a glass substrate are stacked.
  • Resin is mentioned as a material of an organic substrate,
  • a thermosetting resin a thermoplastic resin, or resin which mixed them.
  • the thermosetting resin include phenol resin, urea resin, melamine resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, diallyl phthalate resin, epoxy resin, silicone resin, furan resin, ketone resin, xylene resin, benzocyclo Examples include butene resin.
  • the thermoplastic resin include polyimide resin, polyphenylene oxide resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, aramid resin, and liquid crystal polymer.
  • a glass woven fabric, a glass nonwoven fabric, an aramid woven fabric, an aramid nonwoven fabric, an aromatic polyamide woven fabric, a material impregnated with the above resin, or the like can be used as a material of the organic substrate.
  • the metal wiring mainly contains silver.
  • Silver may be contained in the form of a silver alloy.
  • examples of the metal contained other than silver include tin, palladium, gold, nickel, and chromium.
  • the metal wiring may contain a resin component such as a binder or a photosensitive compound as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and may further contain other components as necessary. .
  • a metal wiring contains the metal nanowire which consists of silver or a silver alloy. The metal nanowire will be described in detail later.
  • the method of forming the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and a physical film formation method such as a vapor deposition method or a sputtering method, or a chemical vapor phase method such as a CVD method, or a silver paste containing silver nanoparticles or silver nanowires is applied. And a method using a silver salt disclosed in JP2009-188360A.
  • a plurality of metal wirings are arranged on the insulating substrate, and the minimum distance (interval) between adjacent metal wirings is less than 50 ⁇ m. In other words, at least one portion (region) where the distance between adjacent metal wirings is less than 50 ⁇ m is included.
  • the minimum value of the distance (interval) between adjacent metal wirings is preferably less than 40 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of integration of the metal wirings. Further, the distance between the metal wirings only needs to satisfy the above range in the minimum value, and there may be a distance (interval) of 50 ⁇ m or more.
  • the average distance between the metal wirings is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 60 ⁇ m and particularly preferably 0.2 to 50 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board.
  • interval here is the value which measured the space
  • the amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring is preferably 50 ⁇ g / mm 2 or less.
  • silver amount is preferably at 30 [mu] g / mm 2 or less, more preferably 15 [mu] g / mm 2 or less.
  • limit in particular regarding a minimum 0.001 microgram / mm ⁇ 2 > or more is preferable and 0.005 microgram / mm ⁇ 2 > or more is more preferable at the point which the electroconductivity of a metal wiring is more excellent.
  • the metal wiring when ion migration occurs when the amount of silver contained in the metal wiring is small, disconnection of the metal wiring is likely to occur due to elution of silver forming the metal wiring.
  • a transparent resin layer containing a predetermined reducing compound by covering the metal wiring with a transparent resin layer containing a predetermined reducing compound, silver ion migration can be suppressed and disconnection of the metal wiring can be suppressed.
  • the measuring method in particular of silver amount is not restrict
  • the amount of silver can be measured by observing a cross-sectional SEM photograph of a metal wiring and conducting elemental analysis.
  • the metal wiring is brought into contact with a strong acid such as nitric acid to dissolve silver in the metal wiring, and the amount of silver can be measured from the dissolved amount.
  • the amount of silver in the metal wiring is obtained by calculation from the amount of the dispersion used to produce the metal wiring. You can also.
  • per unit area of the metal wiring means in other words per unit area of the contact portion of the metal wiring with the insulating substrate.
  • the amount of silver is calculated based only on the area of the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate.
  • the area of the insulating substrate surface that is not in contact with the metal wiring (for example, the surface of the insulating substrate that is not in contact with the metal wiring that is located between the metal wirings) is considered in the calculation per unit area of the metal wiring.
  • I ca n’t enter. Therefore, the amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring means the amount of silver contained per unit area (mm 2 ) at the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate.
  • the width of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 10,000 ⁇ m, and preferably 0.1 to 300 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of ensuring electrical reliability in the highly integrated portion and the lead wiring portion (lead wiring portion) of the wiring board. More preferably, 0.1 to 100 ⁇ m is more preferable, and 0.2 to 50 ⁇ m is particularly preferable.
  • the shape of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and may be an arbitrary shape. For example, a linear shape, a curved shape, a rectangular shape, a circular shape, and the like can be given.
  • the arrangement (pattern) of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a stripe shape.
  • two metal wirings 14 are provided in FIG. 1, the number is not particularly limited. Usually, a plurality of metal wirings are provided.
  • the thickness of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 to 30 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 0.01 to 20 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board.
  • the metal wiring 14 is provided only on one side of the insulating substrate 12, but may be provided on both sides. That is, the insulating substrate 16 with metal wiring may be a single-sided substrate or a double-sided substrate. When the metal wiring 14 is on both sides of the insulating substrate 12, the transparent adhesive layer 19 may also be provided on both sides.
  • the metal wiring 14 has a single-layer wiring structure as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • an insulating substrate with a metal wiring (multilayer wiring substrate) in which a plurality of metal wirings and insulating substrates are alternately laminated may be used to provide a wiring substrate having a multilayer wiring structure.
  • a through hole may be formed in the insulating substrate.
  • the metal wiring on both surfaces may be made conductive by filling the through hole with a metal (for example, silver or silver alloy).
  • the metal nanowire is composed of silver or a silver alloy.
  • the kind of silver alloy is as above-mentioned.
  • the metal nanowire has conductivity and has a shape in which the length in the major axis direction is sufficiently longer than the diameter (length in the minor axis direction). It may be a solid fiber or a hollow fiber.
  • the material of the metal nanowire is particularly preferably silver or an alloy of silver and another metal in terms of excellent conductivity.
  • Other metals used in the alloy with silver include platinum, osmium, palladium, iridium, tin, bismuth, nickel and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the average minor axis length of the metal nanowire (sometimes referred to as “average minor axis diameter”) is 5 to 50 nm, more preferably 5 to 25 nm, and even more preferably 5 to 20 nm.
  • An average minor axis diameter of 5 nm or more is preferable because oxidation resistance can be improved, and an average minor axis diameter of 50 nm or less is preferable because scattering of metal nanowires can be reduced.
  • the scattering of metal nanowires can be greatly reduced, which is more preferable.
  • the average minor axis diameter of the metal nanowires was determined by observing the minor axis diameters of 300 metal nanowires using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX). Find the minor axis diameter.
  • shaft diameter be the short axis diameter when the cross section of metal nanowire is not circular.
  • the average major axis length of the metal nanowire (sometimes referred to as “average major axis diameter”) is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 5 ⁇ m to 40 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 5 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m.
  • An average major axis diameter of 5 ⁇ m or more is preferable because the metal nanowires come into contact with each other to easily form a conductive network, and an average major axis diameter of 40 ⁇ m or less is preferable because the possibility of the metal nanowires becoming entangled during manufacturing is reduced.
  • the average major axis diameter of the metal nanowires is determined by, for example, observing the major axis diameters of 300 metal nanowires using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX). The average major axis diameter is obtained.
  • TEM transmission electron microscope
  • JEM-2000FX transmission electron microscope
  • the method for producing the metal nanowire is not particularly limited and may be produced by any method, but it is preferably produced by reducing metal ions in a solvent in which a halogen compound and a dispersant are dissolved.
  • a method for producing metal nanowires JP2009-215594A, JP2009-242880A, JP2009-299162A, JP2010-84173A, JP2010-86714A, The method described in JP-T-2009-505358 can be used.
  • the aspect ratio of the metal nanowire can be appropriately selected according to the purpose, but is not particularly limited as long as it is 10 or more, more preferably 50 or more, further preferably 100 or more, further preferably 5000 or more, and from 10,000 100,000 is particularly preferred.
  • the aspect ratio generally means the ratio between the long side and the short side of the fibrous material (ratio of average major axis diameter / average minor axis diameter).
  • a measuring method of an aspect ratio According to the objective, it can select suitably, For example, the method etc. which measure with an electron microscope etc. are mentioned.
  • the aspect ratio of the whole metal nanowire can be estimated by measuring the average major axis diameter and the average minor axis diameter of the metal nanowire separately.
  • the outer diameter of the tube is used as the diameter for calculating the aspect ratio.
  • the transparent adhesive layer is a layer that is disposed on the surface on the metal wiring side of the insulating substrate with metal wiring, covers the metal wiring surface, and suppresses silver ion migration between the metal wirings.
  • the transparent adhesive layer corresponds to a silver ion diffusion suppression layer.
  • it is preferable that a silver ion or metallic silver is not substantially contained in the transparent adhesion layer. If the transparent adhesive layer contains excessive silver ions or metallic silver, the ion migration suppressing effect may be reduced.
  • the phrase “substantially free of silver ions or metallic silver” means that the content of silver ions or metallic silver in the transparent adhesive layer is 1 ⁇ mol / l or less, and is 0.1 ⁇ mol / l or less. Is more preferable, and most preferably 0 mol / l.
  • the transparent adhesive layer contains the reducing compound and the adhesive described above.
  • the definition of each component is as described above.
  • mass ratio of the reducing compound and adhesive in a transparent adhesive layer is synonymous with mass ratio of the reducing compound and adhesive in the transparent adhesive sheet mentioned above, and a suitable aspect is also synonymous.
  • the thickness of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 1000 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 to 500 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of better ion migration suppression ability.
  • the total light transmittance of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80% or more (more preferably 85% or more, still more preferably 90% or more).
  • the total light transmittance is measured using “HR-100 type” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory.
  • the production method of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, for example, an adhesive layer forming composition containing a reducing compound and an adhesive is applied on an insulating substrate with metal wiring, and the solvent is removed as necessary. There is a method of forming a transparent adhesive layer. Moreover, the method of laminating
  • an insulating layer may be further provided on the surface of the transparent adhesive layer of the wiring board obtained above.
  • a metal wiring can be further provided on the insulating layer to obtain a multilayer wiring board.
  • the touch panel for example, the touch panel, display electrode, electromagnetic wave shield, organic or inorganic EL display electrode, electronic paper, flexible display electrode, integrated solar cell, display It is widely applied to devices and other various devices.
  • a touch panel is particularly preferable. That is, the wiring board is preferably used for a touch panel. More specifically, an embodiment in which the metal wiring in the wiring board becomes a lead wiring connected to the touch panel electrode part is preferable.
  • the touch panel electrode unit means, for example, a sensing electrode unit that senses a change in capacitance in a capacitive touch panel.
  • An acrylic copolymer (1) having a molecular weight of 800,000 was obtained.
  • the acrylic copolymer (1) (98 parts by mass) and the tocopherol (2 parts by mass) were diluted with ethyl acetate to obtain an adhesive composition having a resin solid content of 30%.
  • the film was coated on a 50 ⁇ m thick PET film so that the thickness after drying was 25 ⁇ m, and dried at 75 ° C.
  • the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was bonded to a PET film having a thickness of 38 ⁇ m, one side of which was peeled off with a silicone compound. Thereafter, it was aged at 23 ° C. for 5 days to obtain a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (baseless pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet) S-1 having a thickness of 25 ⁇ m.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet had a total light transmittance of 90.8%, a haze of 0.6%, and a water absorption of 1.24%.
  • the method for measuring the total light transmittance, haze, and water absorption is in accordance with the method described in JP 2012-11637 A. More specifically, the measurement was performed by the method described later.
  • content of the tocopherol in a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet was 2 mass% with respect to the transparent double-sided adhesive sheet total mass.
  • Total light transmittance and haze measurement of transparent double-sided PSA sheet The obtained transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-1 was allowed to stand for 100 hours at 60 ° C. and 90% RH, and then a test sample was prepared by laminating PET film and glass in this order. Using the “HR-100 Model” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory Co., Ltd., the total light transmittance and haze (%) of the adjusted sample were measured.
  • the insulating substrate A with metal wiring was produced by the following method. After the copper foil of the copper clad laminate was peeled off by etching, conductive silver paste (Fujikura Kasei FA-451) was patterned on the substrate through a metal mask using a screen printing apparatus. Thereafter, heat treatment was performed for 30 minutes at 150 ° C.
  • the cross section of the silver wiring formed using screen printing had a trapezoidal shape in which the lower side (corresponding to the side where the wiring and the substrate contact) was slightly longer than the upper side.
  • the average thickness in the vicinity of the center of the wiring portion is 16 ⁇ m, and the amount of silver component in the conductive silver paste used is 70 wt%, which is included per unit area of the silver wiring itself at the contact portion between the silver wiring and the insulating substrate.
  • the amount of silver was calculated to be about 24.2 ⁇ g / mm 2 with a specific gravity of silver of 10.5 g / cm 3 .
  • calculation is based on the area of the portion where the silver wiring and the insulating substrate are in contact, and the surface of the insulating substrate not in contact with the silver wiring (for example, The area of the insulating substrate surface between the silver wires not in contact with the silver wires is not considered.
  • the amount of silver was also calculated from the result of elemental analysis of a cross-sectional SEM photograph of the metal wiring.
  • the amount of silver calculated from the total equivalent circle-shaped area of all silver particles and the cross-sectional area ratio of the wiring observed by SEM observation is the value of the amount of silver calculated from the amount of conductive silver paste used. It was roughly the same.
  • the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 corresponding to the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is peeled off, and one surface showing adhesiveness is used as the laminated surface. Further, the release film on the other side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 ⁇ m) was pasted on the other surface showing adhesiveness to obtain a wiring board. . Thereafter, the obtained wiring board was autoclaved for 20 minutes at 45 ° C. and 0.5 MPa. As a result, a wiring board T-1 was obtained. The following lifetime measurement was performed on the obtained wiring board T-1.
  • the release film on the other side of the film was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 ⁇ m) was bonded onto the other surface exhibiting adhesiveness to obtain a comparative wiring board.
  • a PET film film thickness: 50 ⁇ m
  • the lifetime was measured under the above conditions, and the time X until the resistance value between the silver wirings fell below 1 ⁇ 10 5 ⁇ was measured.
  • the lifetime measurement was performed on the wiring board T-1 under the above conditions, and the time Y until the resistance value between the silver wirings fell below 1 ⁇ 10 5 ⁇ was measured.
  • the life improvement effect (Y / X) was calculated using the obtained time X and time Y. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • the amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring was 8.7 ⁇ g / mm 2 .
  • a wiring board T-2 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the insulating board B with metal wiring was used instead of the insulating board A with metal wiring, and evaluation of the evaluation method 1 was performed. .
  • the results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 4> Manufacture of transparent substrate with conductive film
  • a transparent substrate made of a PET substrate (thickness 125 ⁇ m) corresponding to the transparent substrate was prepared, and a conductive film containing silver having a comb-shaped electrode pattern (L / S 200 ⁇ m / 200 ⁇ m) was produced on the transparent substrate according to the following procedure.
  • the amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film can be calculated by measuring the concentration of the aqueous silver nitrate solution obtained by immersing the wiring board in nitric acid and measuring the concentration using ICP-MS. 0.014 ⁇ g / mm 2 .
  • the PET substrate also corresponds to an insulating substrate.
  • a silver nitrate solution 101 was prepared by dissolving 60 g of silver nitrate powder in 370 g of propylene glycol. 72.0 g of polyvinylpyrrolidone (molecular weight 55,000) was added to 4.45 kg of propylene glycol, and the temperature was raised to 90 ° C. while venting nitrogen gas through the gas phase portion of the container. This solution was designated as reaction solution 101. 2.50 g of the silver nitrate solution 101 was added to the vigorously stirred reaction solution 101 while maintaining the nitrogen gas flow, and the mixture was heated and stirred for 1 minute.
  • reaction solution 102 a solution in which 11.8 g of tetrabutylammonium chloride was dissolved in 100 g of propylene glycol was added to this solution to obtain a reaction solution 102.
  • 200 g of the silver nitrate solution 101 was added to the reaction solution 102 which was kept at 90 ° C. and stirred at a stirring speed of 500 rpm at an addition speed of 50 cc / min. The stirring speed was reduced to 100 rpm, the aeration of nitrogen gas was stopped, and heating and stirring were performed for 15 hours.
  • 220 g of the silver nitrate solution 101 was added at an addition speed of 0.5 cc / min to this liquid kept at 90 ° C.
  • silver nanowire dispersion (1) indicates the silver nanowire dispersion obtained by the above method.
  • PET substrate thickness 125 [mu] m
  • amount of silver 0.015 g / m 2 by a bar coating method on, after the total solid content in the coating solution was coated silver nanowire coating solution (1) so that 0.120 g / m 2, It dried at 120 degreeC for 1 minute, and the electrically conductive film 1 containing a silver nanowire was formed.
  • a photoresist (TMSMR-8900LB: manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.) was applied to the conductive film 1 by spin coating and baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds. Next, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask (exposure amount: 12 mW / cm 2 , 20 seconds), developed with a developer (NMD-W: Tokyo Sensitivity), washed with water and dried, then at 120 ° C. A patterned photoresist was formed on the conductive film 1 by baking for 60 seconds.
  • TMSMR-8900LB manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 was bonded to the obtained transparent substrate with a conductive film in the same manner as in Example 2 to obtain a conductive film laminate (also applicable to a wiring board) T-3. It was.
  • the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 is peeled off on a transparent substrate with a conductive film, and one surface showing adhesiveness is bonded as a laminated surface, and further the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
  • the release film on the other side was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 ⁇ m) was bonded onto the other surface showing tackiness to obtain a comparative conductive film laminate.
  • the lifetime was measured under the above conditions, and the time X until the resistance value between the conductive films increased by 10% was measured.
  • Example 5 A wiring substrate T-4 was prepared in accordance with the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-1 was used instead of tocopherol, and evaluation of the evaluation method 1 was performed. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 6 A wiring substrate T-5 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-2 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 7 A wiring board T-6 was produced in accordance with the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-3 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 8 A wiring board T-7 was produced in accordance with the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-4 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 9 A wiring board T-8 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 5 except that the amount of silver was changed from 24.2 ⁇ g / mm 2 to 0.011 ⁇ g / mm 2 , and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. did. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 10 A wiring board T-9 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-5 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 11 A wiring board T-9 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-6 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 12 A wiring substrate T-10 was produced according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-7 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • a transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-0 was produced according to the same procedure as in Example 1 except that no tocopherol was used.
  • a wiring board R-1 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 was used instead of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. Carried out. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • a wiring board R-3 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that ascorbic acid was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 4 is a result evaluated by the said evaluation method 2
  • Example and a comparative example are the results evaluated by the said evaluation method 1.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition was coated on a 50 ⁇ m-thick PET film having one surface peel-treated with a silicone compound so that the thickness after drying was 50 ⁇ m, and dried at 75 ° C. for 5 minutes.
  • the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was bonded to a PET film having a thickness of 38 ⁇ m, one side of which was peeled off with a silicone compound. Thereafter, it was aged at 23 ° C. for 5 days to obtain a transparent double-sided PSA sheet (base material-less PSA sheet) S-1 having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m.
  • Synthesis Example 12 Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-12
  • a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-12 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 10 except that DL- ⁇ -tocopherol was changed to Compound C (redox potential: 1.17 V).
  • the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and a 38 ⁇ m-thick PET film peeled from one side with a silicone compound were bonded together, and irradiated with a low-pressure mercury lamp from both sides for 5 minutes to obtain a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-18.
  • Synthesis Example 19 Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-19
  • a transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-19 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 18 except that DL- ⁇ -tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition was applied onto a 50 ⁇ m thick PET film so that the thickness after drying was 50 ⁇ m, and the solvent was dried.
  • the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and a 38 ⁇ m-thick PET film peeled from one side with a silicone compound were bonded together, and irradiated with a low-pressure mercury lamp from both sides for 5 minutes to obtain a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-21.
  • Synthesis Example 30 Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-30
  • a transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-30 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 5 except that DL- ⁇ -tocopherol was not used.
  • Synthesis Example 35 Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-35
  • a transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-35 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 16 except that DL- ⁇ -tocopherol was not used.
  • LS-450-7HL manufactured by Asahi Chemical Research Laboratory
  • the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 is peeled off, and one surface showing adhesiveness is bonded as a laminated surface, and further a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
  • the release film on the other side of the film was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 ⁇ m) was bonded onto the other surface exhibiting adhesiveness to obtain a wiring board.
  • the obtained wiring board was subjected to autoclave treatment at 45 ° C. and 0.5 MPa for 20 minutes. As a result, a wiring board T-1 was obtained. The following lifetime measurement was performed on the obtained wiring board T-1.
  • the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets S-1 to S-38 are cut into a predetermined size (length 5 cm ⁇ width 4 cm ⁇ thickness 50 ⁇ m), the release film on one side is peeled off, and one surface showing adhesiveness is removed.
  • a laminated surface was attached to a glass substrate, the release film on the other side of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet was peeled off, and a PET substrate (thickness: 50 ⁇ m) was attached to prepare a sample for evaluation.
  • the sample for evaluation was left for 72 hours at 65 ° C. and 95% RH. Then, when the sample for evaluation was allowed to stand at 23 ° C.
  • Examples 2A to 25A and Comparative Examples 1A to 15A> As shown in Table 2, using the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets S-2 to S-38 described above in place of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1, a wiring board was manufactured in the same procedure as in Example 1A, and the life was extended. Effectiveness measurements and environmental tests were performed. The results are summarized in Table 2.
  • Example 26A> A wiring board was produced in the same manner as in Example 6A, except that L / S was changed to 30 ⁇ m / 30 ⁇ m, and the same life measurement as in Example 1A was performed.

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a wiring board in which silver ion migration from silver-containing metal wiring is inhibited and the reliability of insulation between the metal wiring lines can be improved. [Solution] A conductive-film laminate which comprises a transparent substrate, a conductive film that comprises silver and has been disposed on the transparent substrate, and a transparent double-faced pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet laminated to the conductive film, wherein the amount of silver contained in unit area of the conductive film is 50 µg/mm2 or less and the transparent double-faced pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet comprises a transparent resin and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulae (1) to (3).

Description

導電膜積層体、タッチパネル、配線基板、電子機器、透明両面粘着シート、透明粘着シートConductive film laminate, touch panel, wiring board, electronic device, transparent double-sided adhesive sheet, transparent adhesive sheet
 本発明は、導電膜積層体、タッチパネル、配線基板、電子機器、透明両面粘着シート、透明粘着シートに関する。 The present invention relates to a conductive film laminate, a touch panel, a wiring board, an electronic device, a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet, and a transparent adhesive sheet.
 従来より、絶縁基板表面上に金属配線が配置された配線基板が電子部材、半導体素子に広く用いられている。金属配線を構成する金属としては導電性が高い銀、銅がよく用いられるが、これら金属はイオンマイグレーションが発生しやすいという問題があり、とりわけ銀はこの問題が顕著に表れる。 Conventionally, wiring boards in which metal wiring is arranged on the surface of an insulating substrate have been widely used for electronic members and semiconductor elements. As the metal constituting the metal wiring, silver and copper having high conductivity are often used. However, these metals have a problem that ion migration is likely to occur, and silver is particularly prominent.
 このような金属のイオンマイグレーションを防止する方法として、ポリマー層に金属イオン吸着化合物を導入する方法が提案されている(特許文献1)。 As a method for preventing such metal ion migration, a method of introducing a metal ion adsorbing compound into a polymer layer has been proposed (Patent Document 1).
 ところで、近年、様々な分野で、液晶ディスプレイ(LCD)などの表示装置や、タッチパネルなどの表示装置と組み合わせて用いられる入力装置が広く用いられるようになってきている。これらの表示装置や入力装置の製造等においては、光学部材を貼り合わせる用途に粘着シートが用いられている。
 画像表示方式のトレンドとしてタッチパネル式のものが注目されており、特に静電容量方式のタッチパネルが普及している。静電容量方式のタッチパネルは、多くの部材を積層させた構成を有しており、部材を貼り合わせる目的で粘着シートが使用されている。例えば、カバーガラス/粘着シート/導電膜/ガラス基板の積層構成を有する静電容量方式のタッチパネルが挙げられる。
Recently, in various fields, display devices such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) and input devices used in combination with a display device such as a touch panel have been widely used. In the manufacture of these display devices and input devices, an adhesive sheet is used for the purpose of bonding optical members.
As a trend of the image display system, a touch panel type is attracting attention, and a capacitive type touch panel is particularly popular. The capacitive touch panel has a structure in which many members are laminated, and an adhesive sheet is used for the purpose of bonding the members. For example, a capacitive touch panel having a laminated structure of cover glass / adhesive sheet / conductive film / glass substrate can be mentioned.
 粘着シートとしては、例えば、特許文献2では、所定のモノマー成分の共重合体を含む透明粘着シートが開示されており、共重合体のモノマー成分として(メタ)アクリル酸ヒドロキシアルキルエステル((E)成分)を含むと白化を防止できる旨が記されている(段落0040)。 As the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, for example, Patent Document 2 discloses a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a copolymer of a predetermined monomer component, and (meth) acrylic acid hydroxyalkyl ester ((E)) as a monomer component of the copolymer. It is described that whitening can be prevented when it contains (component) (paragraph 0040).
特開2008-192850号公報JP 2008-192850 A 特開2011-074308号公報JP 2011-074308 A
 一方、近年、半導体集積回路やチップ部品等の小型化により、金属配線の微細化が進んでいる。そのため、配線基板中の金属配線の幅および間隔はより狭小化しており、イオンマイグレーションによる回路の断線がさらに生じやすくなっている。このような状況の下、配線基板中の銀を含む金属配線間の絶縁信頼性のより一層の向上が要求されている。
 本発明者は、特許文献1で開示される含チオール化合物などの金属イオンと有機金属塩を形成する化合物が導入されたポリマー層を、銀含有金属配線上に設け、その絶縁信頼性について検討を行った。その結果、金属配線間においては配線間抵抗の顕著な低下が確認され、そのイオンマイグレーション抑制効果は昨今要求されるレベルを満たしておらず、さらなる改良が必要であった。
 特に、近年では、電子部品の小型化に伴い、金属配線の集積度をより高め、金属配線がある配線領域の面積を狭めようとする要望が強い。このような状況下では、スクリーン印刷のようなプロセスによる配線設計ではこの集積化に追随することが困難となり、ナノ粒子インクのような印刷工程、または、スパッタ、イオンプレーティング、真空蒸着のような成膜工程が選択されざるを得ない。ところが、このような高い集積度を得る工程では均質な厚い膜を得ることが困難、または、産業上到底許容ではない時間を要するため、配線厚みが薄くなってしまう。その結果、イオンマイグレーションが発生するような環境においては、配線間の短絡による電気信頼性欠落よりも配線内の抵抗上昇や断線状態が生じやすくなり、問題となっていた。
On the other hand, in recent years, miniaturization of metal wiring has been advanced due to miniaturization of semiconductor integrated circuits and chip parts. For this reason, the width and interval of the metal wiring in the wiring board are narrowed, and the circuit breakage due to ion migration is more likely to occur. Under such circumstances, further improvement in insulation reliability between metal wirings containing silver in the wiring board is required.
The present inventor provided a polymer layer in which a compound that forms an organic metal salt with a metal ion such as a thiol-containing compound disclosed in Patent Document 1 is provided on a silver-containing metal wiring, and examined its insulation reliability went. As a result, a remarkable decrease in inter-wire resistance was confirmed between metal wirings, and the ion migration suppression effect did not satisfy the level required recently, and further improvement was necessary.
In particular, in recent years, with the miniaturization of electronic components, there is a strong demand for increasing the degree of integration of metal wiring and narrowing the area of the wiring area where the metal wiring is present. Under such circumstances, it is difficult to follow this integration in wiring design by processes such as screen printing, and printing processes such as nanoparticle ink, or sputtering, ion plating, vacuum deposition, etc. A film forming process must be selected. However, in the process of obtaining such a high degree of integration, it is difficult to obtain a uniform thick film, or it takes a time that is not completely acceptable in the industry, so that the wiring thickness is reduced. As a result, in an environment where ion migration occurs, the resistance in the wiring is increased and the disconnection state is more likely to occur than the lack of electrical reliability due to a short circuit between the wirings.
 また、近年、半導体集積回路やチップ部品等の小型化により、金属配線の微細化が進んでいる。そのため、配線基板中の金属配線の幅および間隔はより狭小化しており(具体的には、金属配線間の距離(間隔)の最小値が50μm未満)、イオンマイグレーションによる回路の断線や、回路間の導通がさらに生じやすくなっている。特に、金属配線を構成する金属としては導電性が高い銀、銅がよく用いられているが、これら金属はイオンマイグレーションが発生しやすいという問題があり、とりわけ銀はこの問題が顕著に表れる。このような状況の下、配線基板中の銀を含む金属配線間の絶縁信頼性のより一層の向上が要求されている。
 本発明者は、特許文献1で開示される(E)成分を含む共重合体の透明粘着シートを、金属配線間距離の最小値が50μm未満である金属配線付き基板上に張り付けて、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性について検討を行った。その結果、金属配線間においては配線間抵抗の顕著な低下が確認され、そのイオンマイグレーション抑制効果は昨今要求されるレベルを満たしておらず、さらなる改良が必要であった。
 この原因としては、共重合体に(E)成分のような親水性成分が含まれているためと推測される。そこで、このような(E)成分を含まない共重合体を使用すると、白化が進行してしまい、粘着層の透明性が失われてしまう。
 つまり、従来技術においては、イオンマイグレーション抑制機能と白化防止とはトレード・オフの関係にあることが多かった。
In recent years, miniaturization of metal wiring has been advanced due to miniaturization of semiconductor integrated circuits and chip parts. For this reason, the width and interval of the metal wiring in the wiring board are becoming narrower (specifically, the minimum value of the distance (interval) between the metal wirings is less than 50 μm). Is more likely to occur. In particular, silver and copper having high conductivity are often used as the metal constituting the metal wiring, but these metals have a problem that ion migration is likely to occur, and this problem is particularly noticeable with silver. Under such circumstances, further improvement in insulation reliability between metal wirings containing silver in the wiring board is required.
The present inventor stuck a transparent adhesive sheet of a copolymer containing the component (E) disclosed in Patent Document 1 onto a substrate with metal wiring having a minimum distance between metal wirings of less than 50 μm, and the metal wiring The insulation reliability was investigated. As a result, a remarkable decrease in inter-wire resistance was confirmed between metal wirings, and the ion migration suppression effect did not satisfy the level required recently, and further improvement was necessary.
This is presumably because the copolymer contains a hydrophilic component such as the component (E). Therefore, when such a copolymer containing no component (E) is used, whitening proceeds and the transparency of the adhesive layer is lost.
That is, in the prior art, the ion migration suppressing function and whitening prevention are often in a trade-off relationship.
 本発明の第1態様は、上記実情に鑑みて、銀を含む金属配線からの銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性を向上させることができる配線基板を提供することを目的とする。
 さらに、本発明の第1態様は、銀を含む導電膜からの銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、導電膜間の絶縁信頼性を向上させることができ、透明両面粘着シートを含む導電膜積層体を提供することも目的とする。
In view of the above circumstances, the first aspect of the present invention is to provide a wiring board capable of suppressing the ion migration of silver from a metal wiring containing silver and improving the insulation reliability between the metal wirings. And
Further, according to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a conductive film laminate including a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, in which ion migration of silver from a conductive film containing silver can be suppressed and insulation reliability between the conductive films can be improved. It is also intended to provide.
 また、本発明の第2態様は、上記実情に鑑みて、銀を含む金属配線間の銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、優れた金属配線間の絶縁信頼性を示すと共に、透明粘着層の白化耐性に優れた配線基板を提供することを目的とする。
 また、本発明の第2態様は、上記配線基板に使用される透明粘着シートを提供することも目的とする。
Further, in the second aspect of the present invention, in view of the above circumstances, the ion migration of silver between metal wirings containing silver is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between the metal wirings is excellent, and the whitening resistance of the transparent adhesive layer An object of the present invention is to provide an excellent wiring board.
Moreover, the 2nd aspect of this invention also aims at providing the transparent adhesive sheet used for the said wiring board.
 本発明者らは、従来技術の問題点について鋭意検討を行ったところ、特許文献1で開示される含チオール化合物などの金属イオン吸着化合物のポリマー層における分散性が影響していることを見出した。より具体的には、特許文献1で開示される含チオール化合物などの金属イオン吸着化合物は、その構造に起因して分散性が低い。そのため、該金属イオン吸着化合物をポリマー層(樹脂層)中に導入しようとしても、ポリマー層中で該化合物を均一に分散させることが困難であり、金属イオン(特に銀イオン)のマイグレーションを抑制する効果が得られない。また、多量の該金属イオン吸着化合物をポリマー層中に導入しようとすると、金属イオン吸着化合物がポリマー層中で析出し、ポリマーの劣化を引き起こし、電気信頼性の劣化を引き起こす。さらには、金属イオンの拡散の助長を促し、配線破壊を引き起こすなどの問題が生じる虞がある。
 本発明者らは、上記知見に基づき、特定の官能基を有し、金属イオンに対する還元能を有する化合物を使用すると共に、所定量の銀量を含む導電膜(または金属配線)を使用することにより、上記第1態様の課題を解決できることを見出した。
 つまり、本発明者らは、以下の構成により上記第1態様の課題が解決できることを見出した。
As a result of diligent examination of the problems of the prior art, the present inventors have found that the dispersibility in the polymer layer of a metal ion-adsorbing compound such as a thiol-containing compound disclosed in Patent Document 1 has an influence. . More specifically, the metal ion adsorbing compound such as the thiol-containing compound disclosed in Patent Document 1 has low dispersibility due to its structure. Therefore, even if the metal ion adsorbing compound is introduced into the polymer layer (resin layer), it is difficult to uniformly disperse the compound in the polymer layer, and migration of metal ions (particularly silver ions) is suppressed. The effect is not obtained. In addition, when a large amount of the metal ion adsorbing compound is introduced into the polymer layer, the metal ion adsorbing compound is precipitated in the polymer layer, causing deterioration of the polymer and deterioration of electrical reliability. Furthermore, there is a possibility that problems such as promoting the diffusion of metal ions and causing wiring breakdown may occur.
Based on the above knowledge, the present inventors use a compound having a specific functional group and having a reducing ability for metal ions, and using a conductive film (or metal wiring) containing a predetermined amount of silver. Thus, it has been found that the problem of the first aspect can be solved.
That is, the present inventors have found that the problem of the first aspect can be solved by the following configuration.
(1) 透明基板と、透明基板上に配置された銀を含む導電膜と、導電膜上に貼り合わされた透明両面粘着シートとを備える導電膜積層体であって、
 導電膜の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量が50μg/mm2以下であり、
 透明両面粘着シートが、透明樹脂、並びに、後述する式(1)~式(3)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物を含有する、導電膜積層体。
(2) 化合物が、後述する式(4)~(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、(1)に記載の導電膜積層体。
(3) 化合物が、後述する式(5)~(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、(1)または(2)に記載の導電膜積層体。
(4) 化合物の総質量Aと透明樹脂の総質量Cとの質量比(A/C)が、0.0001~0.1である、(1)~(3)のいずれかに記載の導電膜積層体。
(5) 導電膜が、銀または銀合金からなる金属ナノワイヤを含有する、(1)~(4)のいずれかに記載の導電膜積層体。
(6) 透明樹脂が、アクリル系粘着剤を含む、(1)~(5)のいずれかに記載の導電膜積層体。
(7) (1)~(6)のいずれかに記載の導電膜積層体を含むタッチパネル。
(8) 絶縁基板と、絶縁基板上に配置された銀を含む金属配線と、金属配線上に配置された銀イオン拡散抑制層とを備える配線基板であって、
 金属配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量が50μg/mm2以下であり、
 銀イオン拡散抑制層が、絶縁樹脂、並びに、後述する式(1)~式(3)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物を含有する、配線基板。
(9) 化合物が、後述する式(4)~(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、(8)に記載の配線基板。
(10) 化合物が、後述する式(5)~(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、(8)または(9)に記載の配線基板。
(11) 化合物の総質量Aと絶縁樹脂の総質量Bとの質量比(A/B)が、0.0001~0.1である、(8)~(11)のいずれかに記載の配線基板。
(12) (8)~(11)のいずれかに記載の配線基板を備える電子機器。
(13) 透明樹脂、並びに、後述する式(1)、式(2)および式(3)で表される化合物群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物を含有する透明両面粘着シート。
(1) A conductive film laminate comprising a transparent substrate, a conductive film containing silver disposed on the transparent substrate, and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet bonded to the conductive film,
The amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film is 50 μg / mm 2 or less,
A conductive film laminate, wherein the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a transparent resin and compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3) described later.
(2) The conductive film laminate according to (1), wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (4) to (6) described later.
(3) The conductive film laminate according to (1) or (2), wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (5) to (6) described later.
(4) The conductivity according to any one of (1) to (3), wherein the mass ratio (A / C) of the total mass A of the compound to the total mass C of the transparent resin is 0.0001 to 0.1. Membrane laminate.
(5) The conductive film laminate according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein the conductive film contains metal nanowires made of silver or a silver alloy.
(6) The conductive film laminate according to any one of (1) to (5), wherein the transparent resin contains an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.
(7) A touch panel comprising the conductive film laminate according to any one of (1) to (6).
(8) A wiring board comprising an insulating substrate, a metal wiring containing silver disposed on the insulating substrate, and a silver ion diffusion suppressing layer disposed on the metal wiring,
The amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring is 50 μg / mm 2 or less,
A wiring board, wherein the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer contains an insulating resin and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3) described later.
(9) The wiring board according to (8), wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (4) to (6) described later.
(10) The wiring board according to (8) or (9), wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (5) to (6) described later.
(11) The wiring according to any one of (8) to (11), wherein the mass ratio (A / B) of the total mass A of the compound to the total mass B of the insulating resin is 0.0001 to 0.1 substrate.
(12) An electronic device comprising the wiring board according to any one of (8) to (11).
(13) A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a transparent resin and at least one compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formula (1), formula (2) and formula (3) described later.
 また、本発明者らは、従来技術の問題点について鋭意検討を行ったところ、所定の酸化還元電位を示す化合物を含み、所定の環境試験でのヘイズの経時変化が一定範囲内である透明粘着シートを使用することにより、上記第2態様の課題を解決できることを見出した。
 つまり、本発明者らは、以下の構成により上記第2態様の課題が解決できることを見出した。
Further, the present inventors conducted extensive studies on the problems of the prior art. As a result, the transparent adhesive containing a compound exhibiting a predetermined oxidation-reduction potential and having a time-dependent change in haze in a predetermined environmental test. It has been found that the problem of the second aspect can be solved by using a sheet.
That is, the present inventors have found that the problem of the second aspect can be solved by the following configuration.
(14) 絶縁基板と、
 絶縁基板上に配置された、銀を含む複数の金属配線と、
 金属配線と直接接触して金属配線上に配置された透明粘着層とを備える配線基板であって、
 隣り合う金属配線間の距離の最小値が50μm未満であり、
 透明粘着層には、酸化還元電位が0.40~1.30Vの化合物、および、粘着剤が含有され、
 透明粘着層が、後述する環境試験において時間Xが12時間以下を示す透明粘着層である、配線基板。
(15) 化合物が、フェノール化合物を含む、(14)に記載の配線基板。
(16) 化合物が、酸化還元電位が0.50~1.20Vのフェノール化合物を含む、(14)または(15)に記載の配線基板。
(17) 化合物が、後述する式(1)~式(3)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを含む、(14)~(16)のいずれかに記載の配線基板。
(18) 時間Xが6時間未満である、(14)~(17)のいずれかに記載の配線基板。
(19) 隣り合う金属配線間の距離の最小値が40μm未満である、(14)~(18)のいずれかに記載の配線基板。
(20) 酸化還元電位が0.40~1.30Vの化合物と粘着剤とを含む透明粘着層を少なくとも有する透明粘着シートであって、
 透明粘着層が、後述する環境試験において時間Xが12時間以下を示す透明粘着層である、透明粘着シート。
(21) 化合物が、フェノール化合物を含む、(20)に記載の透明粘着シート。
(22) 化合物が、酸化還元電位が0.50~1.20Vのフェノール化合物を含む、(20)または(21)に記載の透明粘着シート。
(23) 化合物が、後述する式(1)~式(3)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを含む、(20)~(22)のいずれかに記載の透明粘着シート。
(24) 時間Xが6時間未満である、(20)~(23)のいずれかに記載の透明粘着シート。
(25) (14)~(19)のいずれかに記載の配線基板を含む、タッチパネル。
(14) an insulating substrate;
A plurality of metal wirings including silver disposed on an insulating substrate;
A wiring board comprising a transparent adhesive layer disposed on the metal wiring in direct contact with the metal wiring,
The minimum distance between adjacent metal wires is less than 50 μm,
The transparent adhesive layer contains a compound having a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V, and an adhesive,
The wiring substrate, wherein the transparent adhesive layer is a transparent adhesive layer having a time X of 12 hours or less in an environmental test described later.
(15) The wiring board according to (14), wherein the compound includes a phenol compound.
(16) The wiring board according to (14) or (15), wherein the compound contains a phenol compound having an oxidation-reduction potential of 0.50 to 1.20 V.
(17) The wiring board according to any one of (14) to (16), wherein the compound includes at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3) to be described later .
(18) The wiring board according to any one of (14) to (17), wherein the time X is less than 6 hours.
(19) The wiring board according to any one of (14) to (18), wherein a minimum value of a distance between adjacent metal wirings is less than 40 μm.
(20) A transparent adhesive sheet having at least a transparent adhesive layer containing a compound having a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V and an adhesive,
A transparent adhesive sheet, wherein the transparent adhesive layer is a transparent adhesive layer having a time X of 12 hours or less in an environmental test described later.
(21) The transparent adhesive sheet according to (20), wherein the compound comprises a phenol compound.
(22) The transparent adhesive sheet according to (20) or (21), wherein the compound comprises a phenol compound having an oxidation-reduction potential of 0.50 to 1.20 V.
(23) The transparent adhesive according to any one of (20) to (22), wherein the compound comprises at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3) to be described later Sheet.
(24) The transparent adhesive sheet according to any one of (20) to (23), wherein time X is less than 6 hours.
(25) A touch panel including the wiring board according to any one of (14) to (19).
 本発明の第1態様によれば、銀を含む金属配線からの銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性を向上させることができる配線基板を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の第1態様によれば、銀を含む導電膜からの銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、導電膜間の絶縁信頼性を向上させることができる、透明両面粘着シートを含む導電膜積層体を提供することができる。
According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a wiring board capable of suppressing the ion migration of silver from a metal wiring containing silver and improving the insulation reliability between the metal wirings.
In addition, according to the first aspect of the present invention, the conductive film stack including the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can suppress the ion migration of silver from the conductive film containing silver and can improve the insulation reliability between the conductive films. The body can be provided.
 さらに、本発明の第2態様によれば、銀を含む金属配線間の銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、優れた金属配線間の絶縁信頼性を示すと共に、透明粘着層の白化耐性に優れた配線基板を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の第2態様によれば、上記配線基板に使用される透明粘着シートを提供することもできる。
Furthermore, according to the second aspect of the present invention, the silver ion migration between the metal wirings containing silver is suppressed, the wirings exhibit excellent insulation reliability between the metal wirings and are excellent in whitening resistance of the transparent adhesive layer. A substrate can be provided.
Moreover, according to the 2nd aspect of this invention, the transparent adhesive sheet used for the said wiring board can also be provided.
本発明の第1態様の配線基板の好適実施態様の模式的断面図である。It is a typical sectional view of a suitable embodiment of a wiring board of the 1st mode of the present invention. 本発明の第1態様の配線基板の他の好適実施態様の模式的断面図である。It is typical sectional drawing of the other suitable embodiment of the wiring board of the 1st aspect of this invention. 本発明の第1態様の絶縁層付き配線基板の好適実施態様の模式的断面図である。It is a typical sectional view of a suitable embodiment of a wiring board with an insulating layer of the 1st mode of the present invention. 本発明の第1態様の導電膜積層体の一実施態様の模式的断面図である。It is typical sectional drawing of one embodiment of the electrically conductive film laminated body of the 1st aspect of this invention. 本発明の第1態様の導電膜積層体の他の実施態様の模式的断面図である。It is typical sectional drawing of the other embodiment of the electrically conductive film laminated body of the 1st aspect of this invention. (A)はタッチパネル部材の一端側の一部平面図であり、(B)は(A)のA-A線に沿った模式的断面図である。(A) is a partial plan view of one end side of the touch panel member, and (B) is a schematic cross-sectional view along the AA line of (A). 本発明の第2態様の配線基板の好適実施態様の模式的断面図である。It is a typical sectional view of a suitable embodiment of a wiring board of the 2nd mode of the present invention.
 以下に、本発明の第1態様および第2態様について、順に説明する。 Hereinafter, the first aspect and the second aspect of the present invention will be described in order.
<<第1態様>>
 以下に、本発明の第1態様の配線基板および導電膜積層体の好適態様について説明する。
 まず、本発明の第1態様の従来技術と比較した特徴点について詳述する。
 上述したように、本発明の第1態様においては、金属イオンに対する還元能を有する化合物(以後、還元性化合物とも称する)と、還元性化合物が分散する樹脂との相溶性を制御すると共に、導電膜(または金属配線)中の銀量を制御することにより、所望の効果が得られることを見出している。より具体的には、所定の還元性化合物を使用することにより、樹脂中での還元性化合物の分散性を向上させ樹脂の劣化を抑制できること、および、導電膜(または金属配線)中の銀量を所定値以下にすることにより所定の還元性化合物の還元特性がより向上することを見出している。特に、化合物が樹脂中で良好に分散しているため、還元銀が局在化しにくく、結果として可視域に吸収を持ち難く、着色やヘイズの悪化も抑制することができる。
 また、導電膜(または金属配線)に銀ナノ粒子または銀ナノワイヤが含まれる場合、銀量を制御することにより、導電膜中での銀成分の比表面積が大きくなり、還元性化合物による改善効果がより向上する。
<< First Aspect >>
Below, the suitable aspect of the wiring board of 1st aspect of this invention and an electrically conductive film laminated body is demonstrated.
First, the feature point compared with the prior art of the 1st aspect of this invention is explained in full detail.
As described above, in the first aspect of the present invention, the compatibility between a compound having a reducing ability for metal ions (hereinafter also referred to as a reducing compound) and a resin in which the reducing compound is dispersed is controlled, and the conductive property is reduced. It has been found that a desired effect can be obtained by controlling the amount of silver in the film (or metal wiring). More specifically, by using a predetermined reducing compound, the dispersibility of the reducing compound in the resin can be improved and deterioration of the resin can be suppressed, and the amount of silver in the conductive film (or metal wiring) It has been found that the reduction property of a predetermined reducing compound is further improved by setting the value to be a predetermined value or less. In particular, since the compound is well dispersed in the resin, the reduced silver is less likely to be localized, and as a result, it is difficult to have absorption in the visible region, and deterioration of coloring and haze can be suppressed.
Moreover, when silver nanoparticles or silver nanowires are contained in the conductive film (or metal wiring), the specific surface area of the silver component in the conductive film is increased by controlling the amount of silver, and the improvement effect by the reducing compound is increased. Improve more.
 以下では、まず、配線基板について詳述する。導電膜積層体に関しては、後段で詳述する。 In the following, first, the wiring board will be described in detail. The conductive film laminate will be described in detail later.
<配線基板>
 次に、本発明の第1態様の配線基板の好適態様について、図面を参照して詳述する。
 図1は、配線基板の一実施態様の模式的断面図を示し、配線基板10は、絶縁基板12および絶縁基板12上に配置された金属配線14を備える金属配線付き絶縁基板16と、金属配線14を覆う銀イオン拡散抑制層18とを備える。
 以下に、各部材(絶縁基板12、金属配線14、銀イオン拡散抑制層18)について詳述する。
<Wiring board>
Next, the suitable aspect of the wiring board of the 1st aspect of this invention is explained in full detail with reference to drawings.
FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an embodiment of a wiring board. The wiring board 10 includes an insulating substrate 12 and an insulating substrate 16 with a metal wiring provided on the insulating substrate 12, and a metal wiring. 14 and a silver ion diffusion suppression layer 18 covering 14.
Below, each member (the insulating substrate 12, the metal wiring 14, and the silver ion diffusion suppression layer 18) is explained in full detail.
[絶縁基板]
 絶縁基板は、絶縁性であり、金属配線を支持できるものであれば、その種類は特に制限されない。例えば、有機基板、セラミック基板、ガラス基板などを使用することができる。
 また、絶縁基板は、有機基板、セラミック基板、およびガラス基板からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも2つの基板が積層した構造であってもよい。
[Insulated substrate]
The type of the insulating substrate is not particularly limited as long as it is insulative and can support metal wiring. For example, an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, a glass substrate, or the like can be used.
The insulating substrate may have a structure in which at least two substrates selected from the group consisting of an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, and a glass substrate are stacked.
 有機基板の材料としては樹脂が挙げられ、例えば、熱硬化性樹脂、熱可塑性樹脂、またはそれらを混合した樹脂を使用することが好ましい。熱硬化性樹脂としては、例えば、フェノール樹脂、尿素樹脂、メラミン樹脂、アルキッド樹脂、アクリル樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、ジアリルフタレート樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、フラン樹脂、ケトン樹脂、キシレン樹脂、ベンゾシクロブテン樹脂等が挙げられる。熱可塑性樹脂としては、例えば、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド樹脂、アラミド樹脂、液晶ポリマー等が挙げられる。
 なお、有機基板の材料としては、ガラス織布、ガラス不織布、アラミド織布、アラミド不織布、芳香族ポリアミド織布や、これらに上記樹脂を含浸させた材料なども使用できる。
Resin is mentioned as a material of an organic substrate, For example, it is preferable to use a thermosetting resin, a thermoplastic resin, or resin which mixed them. Examples of the thermosetting resin include phenol resin, urea resin, melamine resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, diallyl phthalate resin, epoxy resin, silicone resin, furan resin, ketone resin, xylene resin, benzocyclo Examples include butene resin. Examples of the thermoplastic resin include polyimide resin, polyphenylene oxide resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, aramid resin, and liquid crystal polymer.
In addition, as a material of the organic substrate, a glass woven fabric, a glass nonwoven fabric, an aramid woven fabric, an aramid nonwoven fabric, an aromatic polyamide woven fabric, a material impregnated with the above resin, or the like can be used.
[金属配線]
 金属配線は、主に銀を含む。銀は銀合金の形態で含まれていてもよく、金属配線が銀合金を含む場合、銀以外の含有される金属としては、例えば、錫、パラジウム、金、ニッケル、クロムなどが挙げられる。なお、金属配線中に、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、バインダーなどの樹脂成分や感光性化合物などが含まれていてもよく、更に必要に応じてその他の成分が含まれていてもよい。
 また、金属配線は、銀または銀合金からなる金属ナノワイヤを含有することが好ましい。なお、金属ナノワイヤについては、後段で詳述する。
[Metal wiring]
The metal wiring mainly contains silver. Silver may be contained in the form of a silver alloy. When the metal wiring contains a silver alloy, examples of the metal contained other than silver include tin, palladium, gold, nickel, and chromium. The metal wiring may contain a resin component such as a binder or a photosensitive compound as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and may further contain other components as necessary. .
Moreover, it is preferable that a metal wiring contains the metal nanowire which consists of silver or a silver alloy. The metal nanowire will be described in detail later.
 金属配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量は、50μg/mm2以下である。銀量を上記範囲にすることにより、金属配線の膜厚および幅を小さくすることが可能となり、高密度集積化の要望に対応することができる。銀量が多すぎると、金属配線間で短絡が生じやすくなる。なかでも、銀量は30μg/mm2以下であることが好ましく、15μg/mm2以下であることがより好ましい。下限に関しては特に制限されないが、金属配線の導電特性がより優れる点で、0.001μg/mm2以上であることが好ましく、0.005μg/mm2以上であることがより好ましい。
 なお、金属配線中に含まれる銀量が少ない場合にイオンマイグレーションが起こると、金属配線を形成していた銀が溶出することによって、金属配線の断線が生じやすくなる。しかし、本発明においては、所定の化合物を含む銀イオン拡散抑制層で金属配線を覆うことにより、銀のイオンマイグレーションを抑制し、金属配線の断線を抑制することができる。
The amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring is 50 μg / mm 2 or less. By setting the amount of silver in the above range, the film thickness and width of the metal wiring can be reduced, and the demand for high density integration can be met. When there is too much silver amount, it will become easy to produce a short circuit between metal wiring. Among them, silver amount is preferably at 30 [mu] g / mm 2 or less, more preferably 15 [mu] g / mm 2 or less. There is no particular restriction on the lower limit, in that the conductive properties of the metal wire is more excellent, it is preferably 0.001 [mu] g / mm 2 or more, more preferably 0.005 / mm 2 or more.
In addition, when ion migration occurs when the amount of silver contained in the metal wiring is small, disconnection of the metal wiring is likely to occur due to elution of silver forming the metal wiring. However, in the present invention, by covering the metal wiring with a silver ion diffusion suppressing layer containing a predetermined compound, silver ion migration can be suppressed and disconnection of the metal wiring can be suppressed.
 銀量の測定方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用できる。例えば、金属配線の断面SEM写真を観察して元素分析することにより銀量を測定することができる。また、金属配線を硝酸などの強酸と接触させて、金属配線中の銀を溶解させ、溶解した量から銀量を測定することもできる。また、銀ナノワイヤや銀ナノ粒子を含む分散液を使用して金属配線を作製する場合は、金属配線を作製する際に使用した分散液の量から、金属配線中における銀量を計算により求めることもできる。
 また、金属配線の単位面積当たりとは、金属配線の絶縁基板との接触部分の単位面積当たりを意味する。つまり、金属配線と絶縁基板との接触部分の面積のみを基準に銀量の計算を行う。言い換えると、金属配線と接触していない絶縁基板表面(例えば、金属配線間に位置する、金属配線と接触していない絶縁基板表面)の面積は、上記金属配線の単位面積当たりの計算には考慮にいれない。従って、金属配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量とは、金属配線と絶縁基板との接触部分における単位面積あたり(mm2)に含まれる銀量を意味する。
The measuring method in particular of silver amount is not restrict | limited, A well-known method is employable. For example, the amount of silver can be measured by observing a cross-sectional SEM photograph of a metal wiring and conducting elemental analysis. Alternatively, the metal wiring is brought into contact with a strong acid such as nitric acid to dissolve silver in the metal wiring, and the amount of silver can be measured from the dissolved amount. In addition, when metal wiring is produced using a dispersion containing silver nanowires or silver nanoparticles, the amount of silver in the metal wiring is obtained by calculation from the amount of the dispersion used to produce the metal wiring. You can also.
In addition, per unit area of the metal wiring means per unit area of the contact portion of the metal wiring with the insulating substrate. That is, the amount of silver is calculated based only on the area of the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate. In other words, the area of the insulating substrate surface that is not in contact with the metal wiring (for example, the surface of the insulating substrate that is not in contact with the metal wiring that is located between the metal wirings) is considered in the calculation per unit area of the metal wiring. I ca n’t enter. Therefore, the amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring means the amount of silver contained per unit area (mm 2 ) at the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate.
 金属配線の幅は特に制限されないが、配線基板の高集積化部および引き出し配線部(リード配線部)における電気信頼性を確保する点から、0.1~10000μmが好ましく、0.1~300μmがより好ましく、0.1~100μmがさらに好ましく、0.2~50μmが特に好ましい。
 金属配線間の間隔は特に制限されないが、配線基板の高集積化の点から、0.1~1000μmが好ましく、0.1~300μmがより好ましく、0.1~100μmがさらに好ましく、0.2~50μmが特に好ましい。
 また、金属配線の形状は特に制限されず、任意の形状であってもよい。例えば、直線状、曲線状、矩形状、円状などが挙げられる。また、複数の金属配線が所望のパターン(例えば、ストライプ状)に配置されていてもよい。
The width of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 10,000 μm, and preferably 0.1 to 300 μm, from the viewpoint of ensuring electrical reliability in the highly integrated portion and the lead wiring portion (lead wiring portion) of the wiring board. More preferably, 0.1 to 100 μm is more preferable, and 0.2 to 50 μm is particularly preferable.
The distance between the metal wirings is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 1000 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 300 μm, still more preferably 0.1 to 100 μm, from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board. Particularly preferred is ˜50 μm.
Further, the shape of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and may be an arbitrary shape. For example, a linear shape, a curved shape, a rectangular shape, a circular shape, and the like can be given. Further, a plurality of metal wirings may be arranged in a desired pattern (for example, a stripe shape).
 金属配線の厚みは特に制限されないが、配線基板の高集積化の点から、0.001~100μmが好ましく、0.01~30μmがより好ましく、0.01~20μmがさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 to 100 μm, more preferably 0.01 to 30 μm, and still more preferably 0.01 to 20 μm from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board.
 図1においては、金属配線14は、絶縁基板12の片面だけに設けられているが、両面に設けられていてもよい。つまり、金属配線付き絶縁基板16は、片面基板であっても、両面基板であってもよい。金属配線14が絶縁基板12の両面にある場合、銀イオン拡散触性層18も両面に設けてもよい。
 また、図1では、金属配線14が一層の配線構造を例にあげたが、もちろんこれに限定されない。例えば、図2に示すように、複数の金属配線14a、14bと絶縁基板12a、12bとを交互に積層した金属配線付き絶縁基板16a(多層配線基板)を使用することにより、多層配線構造の配線基板100としてもよい。
In FIG. 1, the metal wiring 14 is provided on only one side of the insulating substrate 12, but may be provided on both sides. That is, the insulating substrate 16 with metal wiring may be a single-sided substrate or a double-sided substrate. When the metal wiring 14 is on both surfaces of the insulating substrate 12, the silver ion diffusion touching layer 18 may also be provided on both surfaces.
In FIG. 1, the metal wiring 14 has a single-layer wiring structure as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, by using an insulating substrate 16a (multilayer wiring substrate) with metal wiring in which a plurality of metal wirings 14a and 14b and insulating substrates 12a and 12b are alternately stacked, wiring of a multilayer wiring structure The substrate 100 may be used.
 また、絶縁基板中にスルーホールが形成されていてもよい。絶縁基板の両面に金属配線が設けられる場合は、該スルーホール内に金属(例えば、銀または銀合金)が充填されることにより、両面の金属配線が導通されていてもよい。 Further, a through hole may be formed in the insulating substrate. When metal wiring is provided on both surfaces of the insulating substrate, the metal wiring on both surfaces may be made conductive by filling the through hole with a metal (for example, silver or silver alloy).
[銀イオン拡散抑制層]
 銀イオン拡散抑制層は、金属配線付き絶縁基板の金属配線側の表面に配置され、金属配線表面を覆い、金属配線間の銀のイオンマイグレーションを抑制するための層である。
 なお、銀イオン拡散抑制層中には、銀イオンまたは金属銀が実質的に含まれていないことが好ましい。銀イオン拡散抑制層に過剰の銀イオンまたは金属銀が含まれていると、銀イオンマイグレーション抑制効果が低下する場合がある。
 なお、銀イオンまたは金属銀が実質的に含まれないとは、銀イオン拡散抑制層中における銀イオンまたは金属銀の含有量が、1μmol/l以下であることを指し、0.1μmol/l以下であることがより好ましく、最も好ましくは0mol/lである。
[Silver ion diffusion suppression layer]
The silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is a layer that is disposed on the surface of the insulating substrate with metal wiring on the metal wiring side, covers the surface of the metal wiring, and suppresses silver ion migration between the metal wirings.
In addition, it is preferable that a silver ion or metal silver is not substantially contained in a silver ion diffusion suppression layer. If the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer contains excessive silver ions or metallic silver, the silver ion migration suppressing effect may be lowered.
The phrase “substantially free of silver ions or metallic silver” means that the silver ion or metallic silver content in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is 1 μmol / l or less, and 0.1 μmol / l or less. More preferably, it is 0 mol / l.
 銀イオン拡散抑制層の厚みは特に制限されないが、銀イオン拡散抑制層のイオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、5~1000μmが好ましく、10~500μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the silver ion diffusion suppression layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 1000 μm, more preferably 10 to 500 μm, from the viewpoint that the ion migration suppression ability of the silver ion diffusion suppression layer is more excellent.
 銀イオン拡散抑制層には、絶縁樹脂、並びに、式(1)、式(2)および式(3)で表される化合物群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物が含有される。
 以下、絶縁樹脂、および、化合物に関して詳述する。
The silver ion diffusion suppressing layer contains an insulating resin and at least one compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formula (1), formula (2), and formula (3).
Hereinafter, the insulating resin and the compound will be described in detail.
(絶縁樹脂)
 銀イオン拡散抑制層に絶縁樹脂が含まれることにより、絶縁樹脂が金属配線を覆い、金属配線間に配置されることにより、金属配線間の絶縁性が担保される。
 使用される絶縁樹脂としては、公知の絶縁性の樹脂を使用することができ、銀イオン拡散抑制層の層形成がより容易である点より、硬化性絶縁樹脂(例えば、熱硬化性絶縁樹脂および光硬化性絶縁樹脂)を硬化させた樹脂を使用することが好ましい。
(Insulating resin)
By including an insulating resin in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, the insulating resin covers the metal wiring and is disposed between the metal wirings, thereby ensuring insulation between the metal wirings.
As the insulating resin to be used, a known insulating resin can be used, and a curable insulating resin (for example, thermosetting insulating resin and It is preferable to use a resin obtained by curing a photocurable insulating resin.
 熱硬化性絶縁樹脂としては、例えば、エポキシ樹脂、ビスマレイミドトリアジン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、アクリル樹脂、フェノール樹脂、メラミン樹脂、珪素樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、シアン酸エステル樹脂、イソシアネート樹脂、またこれらの変性樹脂などが挙げられる。
 光硬化性絶縁樹脂としては、例えば、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエステルアクリレート樹脂、ウレタンアクリレート樹脂、シリコーンアクリレート樹脂、エポキシアクリレート樹脂、またはこれらの変性樹脂などが挙げられる。
 その他の絶縁樹脂としては、例えば、ポリエチレン(PE)、ポリプロピレン(PP)、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体(EVA)、エチレン-アクリル酸エチル共重合体(EEA)、ポリ乳酸、フッ素含有樹脂、ポリエーテルスルフォン樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド樹脂、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン樹脂などの熱可塑性樹脂も挙げられる。
 なかでも、後述する化合物との相溶性がより優れる点で、エポキシ樹脂、アクリル樹脂が好ましい。
Examples of the thermosetting insulating resin include epoxy resin, bismaleimide triazine resin, polyimide resin, acrylic resin, phenol resin, melamine resin, silicon resin, unsaturated polyester resin, cyanate ester resin, isocyanate resin, and modified products thereof. Examples thereof include resins.
Examples of the photocurable insulating resin include unsaturated polyester resins, polyester acrylate resins, urethane acrylate resins, silicone acrylate resins, epoxy acrylate resins, and modified resins thereof.
Other insulating resins include, for example, polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymer (EEA), polylactic acid, fluorine-containing resin, poly Thermoplastic resins such as ether sulfone resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, and polyether ether ketone resin are also included.
Especially, an epoxy resin and an acrylic resin are preferable at the point which is more excellent in compatibility with the compound mentioned later.
 また、必要に応じて、絶縁樹脂をガラス織布、ガラス不織布、アラミド不織布などの心材に含浸させて使用してもよい。具体的には、ガラス布エポキシ樹脂、ガラス布ビスマレイミドトリアジン樹脂、ガラス布ポリフェニレンエーテル樹脂、アラミド不織布-エポキシ樹脂、アラミド不織布-ポリイミド樹脂などを使用してもよい。
 さらに、絶縁樹脂が硬化性樹脂の場合、必要に応じて、硬化剤、硬化促進剤などを併用してもよい。
 なお、絶縁樹脂として、2種以上の絶縁樹脂を混合して使用してもよい。
If necessary, an insulating resin may be impregnated into a core material such as a glass woven fabric, a glass nonwoven fabric, or an aramid nonwoven fabric. Specifically, glass cloth epoxy resin, glass cloth bismaleimide triazine resin, glass cloth polyphenylene ether resin, aramid nonwoven fabric-epoxy resin, aramid nonwoven fabric-polyimide resin, or the like may be used.
Furthermore, when the insulating resin is a curable resin, a curing agent, a curing accelerator, or the like may be used in combination as necessary.
Note that two or more insulating resins may be mixed and used as the insulating resin.
(化合物)
 銀イオン拡散抑制層に、式(1)、式(2)および式(3)で表される化合物群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物(以後、単に還元性化合物とも称する)が含まれることにより、銀のイオンマイグレーションがより抑制される。
 この還元性化合物は、銀イオンを還元する役割を果たす。つまり、金属配線から銀イオンが溶出しても、還元性化合物により銀イオンは銀に還元されて、イオンマイグレーションが抑制される。また、この還元性化合物であれば、銀イオン拡散抑制層中での分散性に優れており、還元銀の局在化が抑制され、結果として銀イオン拡散抑制層の黄色化(可視光領域での吸収)を抑制することができる。
 なお、銀イオン拡散抑制層中には、式(1)~式(3)で表される化合物が2種以上含まれていてもよい。
(Compound)
By containing at least one compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formula (1), formula (2) and formula (3) (hereinafter also simply referred to as a reducing compound) in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer Silver ion migration is further suppressed.
This reducing compound plays a role of reducing silver ions. That is, even if silver ions are eluted from the metal wiring, silver ions are reduced to silver by the reducing compound, and ion migration is suppressed. In addition, this reducing compound is excellent in dispersibility in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, and the localization of the reduced silver is suppressed. As a result, the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is yellowed (in the visible light region). Absorption).
The silver ion diffusion suppressing layer may contain two or more compounds represented by the formulas (1) to (3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式(1)中、R1~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。なかでも、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、水素原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基が好ましい。
 炭化水素基中に含まれるヘテロ原子の種類は特に制限されないが、ハロゲン原子、酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子、セレン原子、テルル原子などが挙げられる。なかでも、銀のイオンマイグレーション抑制能が優れる点で、-Y1-、-N(Ra)-、-C(=Y2)-、-CON(Rb)-、-C(=Y3)Y4-、-SOt-、-SO2N(Rc)-、ハロゲン原子、またはこれらを組み合わせた基の態様で含まれることが好ましい。
 Y1~Y4は、各々独立に、酸素原子、硫黄原子、セレン原子、およびテルル原子からなる群から選択される。なかでも、取り扱いがより簡便である点から、酸素原子、硫黄原子が好ましい。tは、1~3の整数を表す。
 ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基としては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、酸素原子を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、酸素原子を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基が好ましい。
 炭化水素基中の炭素原子の数は特に制限されないが、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、1~40が好ましく、4~20がより好ましい。なお、酸素原子を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、酸素原子を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基またはこれらを組み合わせた基に含まれる炭素原子の数の範囲も、上記範囲であることが好ましい。
In formula (1), R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group that may have a hetero atom. Among these, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a group obtained by combining these is preferable in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
The kind of the hetero atom contained in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, —Y 1 —, —N (R a ) —, —C (═Y 2 ) —, —CON (R b ) —, —C (= Y 3) ) Y 4 —, —SO t —, —SO 2 N (R c ) —, a halogen atom, or a combination of these is preferable.
Y 1 to Y 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferred because they are easier to handle. t represents an integer of 1 to 3.
As the hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom or an aromatic which may have an oxygen atom from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. A group hydrocarbon group or a combination thereof is preferred.
The number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40 and more preferably 4 to 20 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability. In addition, the range of the number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, the aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom or a group in which these are combined is also in the above range. It is preferable that
 式(1)中、Zは、水素原子、アシル基、またはRzOC(=O)基を表す。Rzは、脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基を表す。なかでも、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、Zは水素原子が好ましい。
 アシル基またはRzOC(=O)基に含まれる炭素原子の数は特に制限されないが、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、2~12が好ましく、2~8がより好ましい。
In formula (1), Z represents a hydrogen atom, an acyl group, or an RzOC (═O) group. Rz represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. Among these, Z is preferably a hydrogen atom in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
The number of carbon atoms contained in the acyl group or RzOC (═O) group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 12 and more preferably 2 to 8 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
 なお、式(1)中、R1~R5の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上である。つまり、R1~R5の少なくとも一つは、炭素原子を含む基(上記脂肪族炭化水素基、上記芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基など)である。
 炭素原子の合計数が該範囲であれば、銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性が向上する。なお、該効果がより優れる点で、合計数は8以上が好ましく、10以上がより好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、合成がより容易であり、絶縁樹脂への分散性がより優れる点から、合計数は50以下が好ましく、40以下がより好ましい。
 なお、化合物中において、R1~R5の一つのみが炭素原子を含む基(例えば、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基など)の場合は、該基中の炭素原子の数が4以上であればよい。
 また、化合物中において、R1~R5のうち複数の基が炭素原子を含む基(例えば、アルキル基、アルコキシ基など)の場合は、各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計が4以上であればよい。例えば、R1およびR2がアルキル基で、R3~R5が水素原子の場合、R1のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数とR2のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数との合計数が4以上であればよい。
In the formula (1), the total number of carbon atoms contained in each of R 1 to R 5 is 4 or more. That is, at least one of R 1 to R 5 is a group containing a carbon atom (such as the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, the aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a combination of these).
When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
In the compound, when only one of R 1 to R 5 is a group containing a carbon atom (for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, etc.), the number of carbon atoms in the group is It may be 4 or more.
In the compound, when a plurality of groups among R 1 to R 5 are groups containing carbon atoms (for example, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, etc.), the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group is 4 That is all you need. For example, when R 1 and R 2 are alkyl groups and R 3 to R 5 are hydrogen atoms, the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 1 and the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 2 As long as the total number of is 4 or more.
 また、R1~R5は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。形成される環の種類は特に制限されないが、例えば、5~6員環構造を挙げることができる。 R 1 to R 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The type of ring formed is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a 5- to 6-membered ring structure.
 R1~R5には、必要に応じて、公知の置換基がさらに含まれていてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、シアノ基、ヒドロキシル基、ニトロ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、シリルオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基、アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基、アミノ基、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、アルキル又はアリールスルフィニル基、アルキル又はアリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基が挙げられる。 R 1 to R 5 may further contain a known substituent, if necessary. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group, and a carbamoyl group. Oxy group, alkoxycarbonyloxy group, aryloxycarbonyloxy group, amino group, acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto Group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkyl or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl or arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycal Group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aryl or heterocyclic azo group, an imido group, a phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, and a silyl group.
 式(2)中、R6~R8は、それぞれ独立に、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。
 脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基またはこれらを組み合わせた基に含まれる炭素原子の数は特に制限されないが、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、1~40が好ましく、2~20がより好ましい。
In the formula (2), R 6 to R 8 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group obtained by combining these.
The number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic hydrocarbon group or a combination thereof is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40 and more preferably 2 to 20 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppression ability. More preferred.
 式(2)中、R6~R8の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。炭素原子の合計数が該範囲であれば、銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性が向上する。なお、該効果がより優れる点で、合計数は8以上が好ましく、10以上がより好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、合成がより容易であり、絶縁樹脂への分散性がより優れる点から、合計数は50以下が好ましく、40以下がより好ましい。
 なお、上記合計とは、例えば、R6~R8がすべてアルキル基の場合、R6のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数と、R7のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数と、R8のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数との合計数が6以上であればよい。
 なお、R6~R8には、必要に応じて、公知の置換基がさらに含まれていてもよい。置換基の例としては、上述したR1~R5に置換される置換基と同義である。
 なお、R6~R8は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
In the formula (2), the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 6 to R 8 is 6 or more. When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
The above total is, for example, when all of R 6 to R 8 are alkyl groups, the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 6 and the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 7 The total number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group represented by R 8 may be 6 or more.
R 6 to R 8 may further contain a known substituent, if necessary. Examples of the substituent are the same as the substituents substituted with R 1 to R 5 described above.
R 6 to R 8 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 式(3)中、R9~R12は、それぞれ独立に、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアリール基、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。
 アルキル基またはアリール基に含まれる炭素原子の数は特に制限されないが、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、1~40が好ましく、2~20がより好ましい。
 なお、アルキル基またはアリール基には、ヘテロ原子が含まれていてもよい。含有されるヘテロ原子の種類は特に制限されないが、ハロゲン原子、酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子、セレン原子、テルル原子などが挙げられる。なかでも、銀のイオンマイグレーション抑制能が優れる点で、-X1-、-N(Ra)-、-C(=X2)-、-CON(Rb)-、-C(=X3)X4-、-SOn-、-SO2N(Rc)-、ハロゲン原子、またはこれらを組み合わせた基の態様で含まれることが好ましい。
 X1~X4は、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子、硫黄原子、セレン原子、およびテルル原子からなる群から選択される。なかでも、取り扱いがより簡便である点から、酸素原子、硫黄原子が好ましい。
 上記Ra、Rb、Rcは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~20の炭化水素基から選択される。
 nは1~3の整数を表す。
In formula (3), R 9 to R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group that may contain a heteroatom, an aryl group that may contain a heteroatom, or a combination thereof.
The number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group or aryl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40 and more preferably 2 to 20 in terms of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
The alkyl group or aryl group may contain a hetero atom. The type of hetero atom contained is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, -X 1- , -N (R a )-, -C (= X 2 )-, -CON (R b )-, -C (= X 3 ) X 4 —, —SO n —, —SO 2 N (R c ) —, a halogen atom, or a combination of these is preferable.
X 1 to X 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferred because they are easier to handle.
R a , R b and R c are each independently selected from a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
n represents an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(3)中、R9~R12の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。炭素原子の合計数が該範囲であれば、銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性が向上する。なお、該効果がより優れる点で、合計数は8以上が好ましく、10以上がより好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、合成がより容易であり、絶縁樹脂への分散性がより優れる点から、合計数は50以下が好ましく、40以下がより好ましい。
 なお、上記合計とは、例えば、R9~R12がすべてアルキル基の場合、R9のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数と、R10のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数と、R11のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数と、R12のアルキル基中に含まれる炭素原子の数との合計数が6以上であればよい。
 なお、R9~R12は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
In the formula (3), the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 9 to R 12 is 6 or more. When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
The above total is, for example, when R 9 to R 12 are all alkyl groups, the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 9 and the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 10 The total number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 11 and the number of carbon atoms contained in the alkyl group of R 12 may be 6 or more.
R 9 to R 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
(好適態様)
 上述した式(1)~(3)で表される化合物のなかでも、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、式(4)で表される化合物が好適に挙げられる。
(Preferred embodiment)
Among the compounds represented by the above formulas (1) to (3), the compound represented by the formula (4) is preferably mentioned in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 式(4)中、Z、R1、R2、R3の定義は、式(1)中の各基の定義と同義である。
 式(4)中、R14およびR15は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基が挙げられる。
 上記炭化水素基としては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、酸素原子を含んでもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、酸素原子を含んでもよい芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基が好ましい。なかでも、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、3級炭素原子あるいは4級炭素原子を含むアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 なお、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基中の炭素原子の数は後述する要件を満たしていれば特に制限されないが、1~40が好ましく、2~20がより好ましい。また、酸素原子を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、酸素原子を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基またはこれらを組み合わせた基に含まれる炭素原子の数の範囲も、上記範囲であることが好ましい。
 特に、R14が炭素原子数1~5個のアルキル基で、R15が炭素原子数10~20個のアルキル基であることが好ましい。
In formula (4), the definitions of Z, R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are the same as the definitions of each group in formula (1).
In formula (4), R 14 and R 15 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group optionally having a hetero atom.
The hydrocarbon group is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, or a group obtained by combining these in terms of more excellent effects of the present invention. Among these, a tertiary carbon atom or an alkyl group containing a quaternary carbon atom is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
The number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the requirements described later, but is preferably 1 to 40, and more preferably 2 to 20. In addition, the range of the number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, the aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, or a combination of these is also in the above range. It is preferable that
In particular, R 14 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and R 15 is an alkyl group having 10 to 20 carbon atoms.
 R1、R2、R14およびR15のうち少なくとも一つに含まれる炭素原子の数が1~40である。炭素原子の数が上記範囲内であれば、絶縁樹脂への溶解性が向上して、銀イオン拡散抑制層中における化合物の分散性が向上し、結果として銀のイオンマイグレーション抑制能が向上する。なかでも、炭素原子の数は8~40が好ましく、10~30がより好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms contained in at least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 is 1-40. When the number of carbon atoms is within the above range, the solubility in the insulating resin is improved, the dispersibility of the compound in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is improved, and as a result, the silver ion migration suppressing ability is improved. Of these, the number of carbon atoms is preferably 8 to 40, more preferably 10 to 30.
 また、R1、R2、R14およびR15の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上である。炭素原子の合計数が該範囲であれば、銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性が向上する。なお、該効果がより優れる点で、合計数は8以上が好ましく、10以上がより好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、合成がより容易であり、絶縁樹脂への分散性がより優れる点から、合計数は50以下が好ましく、40以下がより好ましい。 The total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 is 4 or more. When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility into the insulating resin is more excellent.
 また、上述した式(1)~(3)で表される化合物のなかでも、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、式(5)で表される化合物、または、式(6)で表される化合物が最も好ましい。 Further, among the compounds represented by the above formulas (1) to (3), the compound represented by the formula (5) or the formula (6) is preferable in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent. Most preferred is a compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式(5)中、R31~R38は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。 
 炭化水素基の好適例としては、例えば、-O-Raが挙げられる。Raは、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。-O-Raが複数ある場合は、それらは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 炭化水素基の炭素数としては、絶縁樹脂との相溶性により優れる点で、1~12が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。
 炭化水素基としては、より具体的には、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 また、R31~R38の各基の分子量の合計は24以上である。なかでも、35以上が好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、1000以下が好ましく、500以下がより好ましく、300以下がさらに好ましい。上記各基の分子量の合計とは、R31~R38それぞれの基の分子量を計算し、それらを合計した値を意図する。
 また、R31~R38は、任意の2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 なお、ヘテロ原子の定義は、上記で説明した、R1~R5で表されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基中のヘテロ原子の定義と同義である。
In formula (5), R 31 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
Preferable examples of the hydrocarbon group include —O—R a . R a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. When there are a plurality of —O—R a , they may be the same or different.
The number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 12 and more preferably 1 to 10 in terms of excellent compatibility with the insulating resin.
More specifically, examples of the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and a group obtained by combining these. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The total molecular weight of each group of R 31 to R 38 is 24 or more. Especially, 35 or more are preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. The sum of the molecular weights of the respective groups is intended to be a value obtained by calculating the molecular weights of the respective groups R 31 to R 38 and summing them.
Further, any two of R 31 to R 38 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
The definition of the hetero atom is the same as the definition of the hetero atom in the hydrocarbon group which may have the hetero atom represented by R 1 to R 5 described above.
 R31~R36で表されるヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基としては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、酸素原子を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基(例えば、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基)、酸素原子を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基(例えば、フェニル基)、および、これらを組み合わせた基からなる群から選択される、炭素数1~20の基が好ましい。
 なお、R37およびR38は、それぞれ独立に、-CH2-R40基、水酸基、または酸素原子を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基を表すことが好ましい。イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、酸素原子を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖状のアルキル基であることが好ましい。R40は、水素原子、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。
 また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖状、分岐状、または、環状のいずれであってもよい。
The hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a heteroatom represented by R 31 to R 36 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon which may have an oxygen atom in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Selected from the group consisting of a group (for example, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group), an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom (for example, a phenyl group), and a combination thereof. Groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms are preferred.
R 37 and R 38 each independently preferably represents a —CH 2 —R 40 group, a hydroxyl group, or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom is preferably a linear alkyl group from the viewpoint of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability. R 40 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group obtained by combining these.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
 R39は、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の2価の脂肪族炭化水素基を表す。2価の脂肪族炭化水素基に含まれる炭素原子の数は、1~10が好ましい。例えば、メチレン基、エチリデン基、イソプロピリデン基、ブチリデン基、イソノニリデン基、またはシクロヘキシリデン基などが挙げられるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
 なお、ヘテロ原子の定義は、上記で説明した、R1~R5で表されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基中のヘテロ原子の定義と同義である。
R 39 represents a C 1-20 divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may contain a hetero atom. The number of carbon atoms contained in the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-10. Examples include a methylene group, an ethylidene group, an isopropylidene group, a butylidene group, an isononylidene group, and a cyclohexylidene group, but the present invention is not limited to these.
The definition of the hetero atom is the same as the definition of the hetero atom in the hydrocarbon group which may have the hetero atom represented by R 1 to R 5 described above.
 式(6)中、R41~R44は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 R41~R44で表される炭化水素基の好適範囲は、上述したR31~R38で表される炭化水素基の好適範囲と同義である。
 また、R41~R44の各基の分子量の合計は40以上である。なかでも、50以上が好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、1000以下が好ましく、500以下がより好ましく、300以下がさらに好ましい。
 また、R41~R44は、任意の2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 なお、ヘテロ原子の定義は、上記で説明した、R1~R5で表されるヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基中のヘテロ原子の定義と同義である。
In the formula (6), R 41 to R 44 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
The preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 41 to R 44 is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 31 to R 38 described above.
The total molecular weight of each group of R 41 to R 44 is 40 or more. Especially, 50 or more are preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
Further, any two of R 41 to R 44 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
The definition of the hetero atom is the same as the definition of the hetero atom in the hydrocarbon group which may have the hetero atom represented by R 1 to R 5 described above.
 R41~R44で表されるヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基としては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、酸素原子を有していてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基(例えば、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基)、酸素原子を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素基(例えば、フェニル基)、およびこれらを組み合わせた基からなる群から選択される、炭素数1~20の基が好ましい。
 また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖状、分岐状、または、環状のいずれであってもよい。
The hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a heteroatom represented by R 41 to R 44 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon which may have an oxygen atom from the viewpoint of more excellent effects of the present invention. A carbon selected from the group consisting of a group (eg, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group), an aromatic hydrocarbon group (eg, a phenyl group) optionally having an oxygen atom, and a combination thereof. A group of 1 to 20 is preferable.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
 Lは、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい2価若しくは3価の炭化水素基、-S-、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。
 Lで表される炭化水素基としては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、酸素原子を有していてもよい2価若しくは3価の脂肪族炭化水素基、または、酸素原子を有していてもよい2価若しくは3価の芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。
 脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる炭素原子の数は特に制限されないが、脂肪族炭化水素基は1~40が好ましく、2~20がより好ましい、また芳香族炭化水素基は6~40が好ましく、6~20がより好ましい。
 また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖状、分岐状、または、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 nは、2または3の整数を表す。
L represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these.
The hydrocarbon group represented by L has a divalent or trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have an oxygen atom, or an oxygen atom, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Examples thereof may include a divalent or trivalent aromatic hydrocarbon group.
The number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 40, more preferably 2 to 20, and the aromatic hydrocarbon group is 6 to 40 are preferable, and 6 to 20 are more preferable.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
n represents an integer of 2 or 3.
 式(1)で表される化合物としては、例えば、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (1) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式(4)で表される化合物としては、例えば、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (4) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(5)で表される化合物としては、例えば、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (5) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(6)で表される化合物としては、例えば、以下の化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
As a compound represented by Formula (6), the following compounds are mentioned, for example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(2)で表される化合物としては、例えば、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (2) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 式(3)で表される化合物としては、例えば、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (3) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 銀イオン拡散抑制層中における上記絶縁樹脂と上記還元性化合物との質量関係は特に制限されないが、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、還元性化合物の総質量Aと絶縁樹脂の総質量Bとの質量比(A/B)は、0.20以下が好ましく、0.10以下がより好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、薄い銀イオン拡散抑制層でも所定も効果が得られる点で、0.0001以上が好ましく、0.0005以上が好ましい。
 なお、総質量Aは2種以上の還元性化合物が含まれる場合、それらの合計質量を表す。総質量Bは、2種以上の絶縁樹脂が含まれる場合、それらの合計質量を表す。
The mass relationship between the insulating resin and the reducing compound in the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is not particularly limited, but the total mass A of the reducing compound and the total mass B of the insulating resin are more excellent in terms of ion migration suppressing ability. The mass ratio (A / B) is preferably 0.20 or less, and more preferably 0.10 or less. Although a minimum in particular is not restrict | limited, 0.0001 or more are preferable and 0.0005 or more are preferable at the point from which the predetermined effect is acquired even with a thin silver ion diffusion suppression layer.
In addition, total mass A represents those total mass, when two or more types of reducing compounds are contained. The total mass B represents the total mass when two or more kinds of insulating resins are included.
[配線基板]
 上記絶縁基板、金属配線、および、銀イオン拡散抑制層を有する配線基板は、種々の用途および構造に対して使用することができる。例えば、プラズマディスプレイパネル用パネル基板、太陽電池電極用基板、メンブレン配線板、タッチパネル電極用基板などが挙げられる。
[Wiring board]
The insulating substrate, the metal wiring, and the wiring substrate having the silver ion diffusion suppression layer can be used for various applications and structures. Examples include a panel substrate for a plasma display panel, a substrate for a solar cell electrode, a membrane wiring board, a substrate for a touch panel electrode, and the like.
 また、本発明の第1態様の配線基板は、電子機器に含まれることが好ましい。電子機器とは、タッチパネルもしくはメンブレンスイッチやそれらを搭載したテレビ・モバイル通信機器・パーソナルコンピューター・ゲーム機器・車載表示機器・ネット通信機器、照明・表示用LED、太陽電池制御に関する電子配線機器、RFIDなどの無線通信デバイス、あるいは半導体配線基板や有機TFT配線基板で駆動制御された機器類を指す。 The wiring board according to the first aspect of the present invention is preferably included in an electronic device. Electronic devices include touch panels or membrane switches, televisions equipped with them, mobile communication devices, personal computers, game devices, in-vehicle display devices, network communication devices, lighting / display LEDs, electronic wiring devices for solar cell control, RFID, etc. Wireless communication devices, or devices that are driven and controlled by a semiconductor wiring substrate or an organic TFT wiring substrate.
(配線基板の製造方法)
 まず、絶縁基板上への金属配線の形成方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法が採用できる。代表的には、エッチング処理を利用したサブトラクティブ法や、電解めっきを利用したセミアディティブ法や、銀ペースト(例えば、銀ナノ粒子または銀ナノワイヤ含有ペースト)を用いて金属配線を作製する方法、特開2009-188360号に開示される感光材料を用いる方法、真空蒸着法、スパッタ成膜法、イオンプレーティング法などが挙げられる。
 なお、銀ペーストは、所定の粒子径の銀粒子を樹脂バインダーなどの適当な溶媒に分散させて得られる導電性の糊状物質(ペースト)であり、試料の取り付けや導電処理などに用いられている。市販品としては、例えば、ペルトロンK-3424LB(商品名、ペルノックス株式会社製)などが挙げられる。
(Method for manufacturing a wiring board)
First, the method for forming the metal wiring on the insulating substrate is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted. Typically, a subtractive method using an etching process, a semi-additive method using electrolytic plating, a method for producing metal wiring using a silver paste (for example, a silver nanoparticle or silver nanowire-containing paste), Examples thereof include a method using a photosensitive material disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-188360, a vacuum deposition method, a sputter film formation method, an ion plating method, and the like.
The silver paste is a conductive paste-like substance (paste) obtained by dispersing silver particles having a predetermined particle size in an appropriate solvent such as a resin binder, and is used for attaching a sample or conducting a conductive treatment. Yes. Examples of commercially available products include Pertron K-3424LB (trade name, manufactured by Pernox Corporation).
 配線基板の製造方法は特に制限されず、例えば、上記絶縁樹脂、上記還元性化合物および溶媒を含む銀イオン拡散抑制層形成用組成物を金属配線付き絶縁基板上に塗布して、溶媒を除去して、銀イオン拡散抑制層を形成する方法がある。また、上記絶縁樹脂および上記化合物を含む銀イオン拡散抑制層用フィルムを直接金属配線付き絶縁基板上に積層する方法も挙げられる。
 銀イオン拡散抑制層の厚みの調整が容易である点より、上記塗布による方法が好ましい。
The method for producing the wiring board is not particularly limited. For example, the composition for forming a silver ion diffusion suppressing layer containing the insulating resin, the reducing compound and the solvent is applied onto the insulating board with metal wiring, and the solvent is removed. There is a method of forming a silver ion diffusion suppression layer. Moreover, the method of laminating | stacking the film for silver ion diffusion suppression layers containing the said insulating resin and the said compound directly on an insulated substrate with metal wiring is also mentioned.
From the viewpoint of easy adjustment of the thickness of the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, the method by the above application is preferable.
 なお、銀イオン拡散抑制層形成用組成物を金属配線付き絶縁基板上へ塗布する方法は特に制限されず、ディスペンス法、スクリーン印刷法、カーテンコート法、バーコード法、スピンコーター法、インクジェット法、ディップ浸漬法など、公知の方法を採用することができる。銀イオン拡散抑制層の付着量の制御がよりしやすい点で、ディスペンス法、スクリーン印刷法、スピンコーター法、インクジェット法が好ましい。
 また、組成物中に含まれる絶縁樹脂が硬化性樹脂の場合は、組成物を塗布した後、必要に応じて、加熱処理または露光処理を施してもよい。
 加熱処理を実施する場合は、その加熱温度は使用される熱硬化性樹脂に応じて適宜最適な温度が選択されるが、通常、100~300℃が好ましく、100~250℃がより好ましい。また、加熱時間は、生産性の点から、0.2~10時間が好ましく、0.5~5時間がより好ましい。
 さらに、露光処理を実施する場合は、露光に使用される光は使用される光硬化性樹脂に応じて適宜最適な波長の光が選択される。例えば、紫外線、可視光などが挙げられる。露光時間は、生産性の点から、0.2~10時間が好ましく、0.5~5時間がより好ましい。
The method for applying the silver ion diffusion suppression layer forming composition onto the insulating substrate with metal wiring is not particularly limited, and is a dispensing method, a screen printing method, a curtain coating method, a barcode method, a spin coater method, an inkjet method, A known method such as a dip dipping method can be employed. The dispense method, the screen printing method, the spin coater method, and the ink jet method are preferable because the amount of adhesion of the silver ion diffusion suppression layer can be more easily controlled.
Moreover, when the insulating resin contained in the composition is a curable resin, after applying the composition, a heat treatment or an exposure treatment may be performed as necessary.
In the case of carrying out the heat treatment, the optimum heating temperature is appropriately selected according to the thermosetting resin to be used, but it is usually preferably 100 to 300 ° C, more preferably 100 to 250 ° C. The heating time is preferably 0.2 to 10 hours and more preferably 0.5 to 5 hours from the viewpoint of productivity.
Furthermore, when performing an exposure process, the light used for exposure is appropriately selected according to the photocurable resin used. For example, ultraviolet rays and visible light can be used. The exposure time is preferably 0.2 to 10 hours and more preferably 0.5 to 5 hours from the viewpoint of productivity.
[絶縁層付き配線基板]
 必要に応じて、上記で得られた配線基板の銀イオン拡散抑制層側の表面にさらに絶縁層を設けてもよい。銀イオン拡散抑制層上にさらに絶縁層を設けることにより、絶縁層上に配線をさらに配線を設けて多層配線基板とすることができる。
 より具体的には、絶縁層付き配線基板200は、図3に示すように、銀イオン拡散抑制層18上に絶縁層20が配置されている。
 以下では、使用される材料(絶縁層)について説明し、その後製造方法の手順について説明する。
[Wiring board with insulating layer]
As needed, you may provide an insulating layer further in the surface at the side of the silver ion diffusion suppression layer of the wiring board obtained above. By further providing an insulating layer on the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, it is possible to provide a wiring on the insulating layer to form a multilayer wiring board.
More specifically, in the wiring substrate 200 with an insulating layer, the insulating layer 20 is disposed on the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer 18 as shown in FIG.
Below, the material (insulating layer) used is demonstrated, and the procedure of a manufacturing method is demonstrated after that.
(絶縁層)
 絶縁層の材料としては、公知の絶縁性の材料を使用することができる。例えば、エポキシ樹脂、アラミド樹脂、結晶性ポリオレフィン樹脂、非晶性ポリオレフィン樹脂、フッ素含有樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、全フッ素化ポリイミド、全フッ素化アモルファス樹脂など)、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリエーテルスルフォン樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド樹脂、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン樹脂、アクリレート樹脂など挙げられる。
 また、絶縁層として、いわゆる光学用透明粘着シート(OCA)を使用してもよい。OCAは市販品を用いてもよく、例えば、3M(株)製8171CLシリーズ、8146シリーズなどが挙げられる。
 また、絶縁層として、いわゆるソルダーレジスト層を使用してもよい。ソルダーレジストは市販品を用いてもよく、例えば、太陽インキ製造(株)製PFR800、PSR4000(商品名)、日立化成工業(株)製 SR7200Gなどが挙げられる。
(Insulating layer)
As a material for the insulating layer, a known insulating material can be used. For example, epoxy resin, aramid resin, crystalline polyolefin resin, amorphous polyolefin resin, fluorine-containing resin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluorinated polyimide, perfluorinated amorphous resin, etc.), polyimide resin, polyether sulfone resin, polyphenylene Examples thereof include sulfide resin, polyether ether ketone resin, and acrylate resin.
Moreover, you may use what is called a transparent adhesive sheet (OCA) for optics as an insulating layer. As the OCA, a commercially available product may be used, and examples thereof include 8171CL series and 8146 series manufactured by 3M Corporation.
Moreover, you may use what is called a soldering resist layer as an insulating layer. A commercially available solder resist may be used, for example, PFR800 manufactured by Taiyo Ink Manufacturing Co., Ltd., PSR4000 (trade name), SR7200G manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., and the like.
 なかでも、絶縁層は、エポキシ基または(メタ)アクリレート基を有する樹脂を含むことが好ましい。該樹脂は上述した銀イオン拡散抑制層と結合しやすく、結果として絶縁層の密着性が向上し、結果として銀のイオンマグレーション抑制効果がより向上する。
 該樹脂は絶縁層の主成分であることが好ましい。主成分とは、該樹脂の合計が絶縁層全量に対して、50質量%以上であることを意図し、60質量%以上であることが好ましい。なお、上限としては、100質量%である。
Especially, it is preferable that an insulating layer contains resin which has an epoxy group or a (meth) acrylate group. The resin is easily bonded to the above-described silver ion diffusion suppressing layer, and as a result, the adhesion of the insulating layer is improved, and as a result, the silver ion magnation suppressing effect is further improved.
The resin is preferably the main component of the insulating layer. The main component means that the total amount of the resin is 50% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the insulating layer, and is preferably 60% by mass or more. In addition, as an upper limit, it is 100 mass%.
 エポキシ基を有する樹脂としては、公知のエポキシ樹脂を使用することができる。例えば、グリシジルエーテル型エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルエステル型エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルアミン型エポキシ樹脂等を用いることができる。
 (メタ)アクリレート基を有する樹脂としては、公知の樹脂を使用することができる。例えば、アクリレート樹脂、メタクリレート樹脂等を用いることができる。
As the resin having an epoxy group, a known epoxy resin can be used. For example, a glycidyl ether type epoxy resin, a glycidyl ester type epoxy resin, a glycidyl amine type epoxy resin, or the like can be used.
As the resin having a (meth) acrylate group, a known resin can be used. For example, an acrylate resin or a methacrylate resin can be used.
(製造の手順)
 配線基板上への絶縁層の形成方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用することができる。例えば、絶縁層のフィルムを直接配線基板上にラミネートする方法や、絶縁層を構成する成分を含む絶縁層形成用組成物を配線基板上に塗布する方法や、配線基板を該絶縁層形成用組成物に浸漬する方法などが挙げられる。
 なお、上記絶縁層形成用組成物には、必要に応じて溶媒が含まれていてもよい。溶媒を含む絶縁層形成用組成物を使用する場合は、該組成物を配線基板上に配置した後、必要に応じて溶媒を除去するために加熱処理を施してもよい。
 また、絶縁層を配線基板上に設けた後、必要に応じて、絶縁層に対してエネルギー付与(例えば、露光または加熱処理)を施してもよい。
(Manufacturing procedure)
The method for forming the insulating layer on the wiring board is not particularly limited, and a known method can be employed. For example, a method of laminating a film of an insulating layer directly on a wiring substrate, a method of applying a composition for forming an insulating layer containing a component constituting the insulating layer on the wiring substrate, a composition of the wiring substrate for forming the insulating layer The method of immersing in a thing is mentioned.
In addition, the said composition for insulating layer formation may contain the solvent as needed. When using the composition for insulating layer formation containing a solvent, after arrange | positioning this composition on a wiring board, you may heat-process in order to remove a solvent as needed.
Moreover, after providing an insulating layer on a wiring board, you may give energy provision (for example, exposure or heat processing) with respect to an insulating layer as needed.
 形成される絶縁層の層厚は特に制限されず、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性の観点からは、5~50μmが好ましく、10~40μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the insulating layer to be formed is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 50 μm and more preferably 10 to 40 μm from the viewpoint of the insulation reliability between the metal wirings.
 また、得られた絶縁層付き配線基板中の絶縁層をドリル加工やレーザー加工により一部除去して、半導体チップを実装して、回路板として使用してもよい。
 例えば、絶縁層としてソルダーレジストを使用する場合は、所定のパターン状のマスクを絶縁層上に配置し、エネルギーを付与して硬化させ、エネルギー未付与領域の絶縁層を除去して金属配線を露出させる。次に、露出した金属配線の表面を公知の方法で洗浄(例えば、硫酸、ソフトエッチング剤、アルカリ、界面活性剤を使用して洗浄)した後、半導体チップを金属配線表面上に実装する。
Further, the insulating layer in the obtained wiring board with an insulating layer may be partially removed by drilling or laser processing, and a semiconductor chip may be mounted and used as a circuit board.
For example, when using a solder resist as the insulating layer, place a mask with a predetermined pattern on the insulating layer, apply energy to cure, remove the insulating layer in the non-energy-applied region, and expose the metal wiring Let Next, after the exposed surface of the metal wiring is cleaned by a known method (for example, cleaning using sulfuric acid, soft etching agent, alkali, and surfactant), the semiconductor chip is mounted on the surface of the metal wiring.
 また、得られた絶縁層上にさらに金属配線を設けてもよい。金属配線を形成する方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法(めっき処理、スパッタリング処理など)を使用することができる。
 本発明の第1態様においては、得られた絶縁層付き配線基板中の最外層に配置される絶縁層上にさらに金属配線を設けた基板を新たな金属配線付き絶縁基板(内層基板)として使用し、新たに絶縁層および金属配線を幾層にも積層することができる。
Further, metal wiring may be further provided on the obtained insulating layer. The method for forming the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and a known method (plating treatment, sputtering treatment, etc.) can be used.
In the first aspect of the present invention, a substrate in which metal wiring is further provided on the insulating layer arranged in the outermost layer in the obtained wiring substrate with insulating layer is used as a new insulating substrate with metal wiring (inner layer substrate). In addition, a number of new insulating layers and metal wirings can be stacked.
<導電膜積層体>
 次に、本発明の第1態様の導電膜積層体の好適態様について、図面を参照して詳述する。
 図4は、導電膜積層体の一実施態様の模式的断面図を示し、導電膜積層体300は、透明基板302と、透明基板302上に配置された銀または銀合金を含む導電膜304と、導電膜304上に貼り合わされた透明両面粘着シート306とを備える。
 以下に、各部材(透明基板302、導電膜304、透明両面粘着シート306)について詳述する。
<Conductive film laminate>
Next, the suitable aspect of the electrically conductive film laminated body of the 1st aspect of this invention is explained in full detail with reference to drawings.
FIG. 4 shows a schematic cross-sectional view of one embodiment of the conductive film stack, and the conductive film stack 300 includes a transparent substrate 302 and a conductive film 304 containing silver or a silver alloy disposed on the transparent substrate 302. And a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 bonded onto the conductive film 304.
Below, each member (The transparent substrate 302, the electrically conductive film 304, the transparent double-sided adhesive sheet 306) is explained in full detail.
[透明基板]
 透明基板は、後述する導電膜および透明両面粘着シートを支持し、可視光に対して透明な基板であれば特にその種類は制限されない。
 透明基板の材料としては、例えば、ガラスの他、高分子樹脂が用いられる。高分子樹脂としては、例えば、ポリエチレンやポリプロピレン等のポリオレフィン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、ポリエーテルスルフォン、ポリスルホン、ポリアリレート、環状ポリオレフィン、ポリイミド等が挙げられる。
[Transparent substrate]
The type of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited as long as it supports a conductive film and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet described later and is a substrate transparent to visible light.
As a material for the transparent substrate, for example, a polymer resin is used in addition to glass. Examples of the polymer resin include polyolefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, polyether sulfone, polysulfone, polyarylate, cyclic polyolefin, polyimide, and the like.
 透明基板の形状は特に制限されず、板状、フィルム状などが挙げられる。
 透明基板の厚みは特に制限されず、導電膜積層体をタッチパネルに応用する場合、厚みは0.01~3.0mmであることが好ましく、0.05~1.5mmであることがより好ましい。
 透明基板は、可視光域において高い透明性を有していることが好ましく、全光線透過率が80%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、透明基板は、下塗り層などのその他の機能層を有していてもよい。その他の機能層としては、例えば、マット剤層、保護層、耐溶剤層、帯電防止層、平滑化層、密着改良層、遮光層、反射防止層、ハードコート層、応力緩和層、防曇層、防汚層、被印刷層、易接着層などが挙げられる。これらは単層でもよく、複数を積層してもよい。
The shape of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a plate shape and a film shape.
The thickness of the transparent substrate is not particularly limited, and when the conductive film laminate is applied to a touch panel, the thickness is preferably 0.01 to 3.0 mm, and more preferably 0.05 to 1.5 mm.
The transparent substrate preferably has high transparency in the visible light region, and preferably has a total light transmittance of 80% or more.
The transparent substrate may have other functional layers such as an undercoat layer. Other functional layers include, for example, matting agent layers, protective layers, solvent resistant layers, antistatic layers, smoothing layers, adhesion improving layers, light shielding layers, antireflection layers, hard coat layers, stress relaxation layers, antifogging layers. , Antifouling layers, printed layers, and easy-adhesion layers. These may be a single layer or a plurality of layers.
[導電膜]
 導電膜は、上記透明基板上に配置され、主に銀を含む。該導電膜は、タッチパネル用途に応用する際は、タッチパネルの透明電極または周辺配線(リード配線)として利用できる。なお、導電膜中に、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、バインダーなどの樹脂成分や感光性化合物などが含まれていてもよく、更に必要に応じてその他の成分が含まれていてもよい。
 銀は銀合金の態様で含まれていてもよく、導電膜に銀合金が含まれる場合、銀以外の含有される金属としては、例えば、錫、パラジウム、金、ニッケル、クロムなどが挙げられる。
 導電膜のパターン形状は特に制限されず、図4に示すように、透明基板表面上の一部に配線状(パターン状導電膜)に設けられていてもよく(言い換えれば、導電性細線として設けられていてもよく)、または、全面に設けられていてもよい。なお、パターン形状としては、ストライプ状など任意のパターンをとりうる。
[Conductive film]
The conductive film is disposed on the transparent substrate and mainly contains silver. The conductive film can be used as a transparent electrode or peripheral wiring (lead wiring) of a touch panel when applied to a touch panel. The conductive film may contain a resin component such as a binder or a photosensitive compound as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and may further contain other components as necessary. .
Silver may be contained in the form of a silver alloy, and when the conductive film contains a silver alloy, examples of the metal contained other than silver include tin, palladium, gold, nickel, and chromium.
The pattern shape of the conductive film is not particularly limited, and as shown in FIG. 4, it may be provided in a part of the transparent substrate surface in a wiring shape (patterned conductive film) (in other words, provided as a conductive thin wire). Or may be provided over the entire surface. The pattern shape may be an arbitrary pattern such as a stripe shape.
 導電膜の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量は、50μg/mm2以下である。銀量を上記範囲にすることにより、導電膜の膜厚および幅を小さくすることが可能となり、高密度集積化の要望に対応することができる。銀量が多すぎると、導電膜間で短絡が生じやすくなる。なかでも、銀量は30μg/mm2以下であることが好ましく、15μg/mm2以下であることがより好ましい。下限に関しては特に制限されないが、導電膜の導電特性がより優れる点で0.001μg/mm2以上が好ましく、0.005μg/mm2以上がより好ましい。
 なお、導電膜に含まれる銀量が少ない場合にイオンマイグレーションが起こると、導電膜を形成していた銀が溶出してしまい、導電膜の断線が生じやすくなる。しかし、本発明においては、所定の化合物を含む透明両面粘着シートを導電膜に貼り合わせることにより、銀のイオンマイグレーションを抑制し、導電膜の断線を抑制することができる。
The amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film is 50 μg / mm 2 or less. By setting the amount of silver in the above range, the film thickness and width of the conductive film can be reduced, and the demand for high density integration can be met. When there is too much silver amount, it will become easy to produce a short circuit between electrically conductive films. Among them, silver amount is preferably at 30 [mu] g / mm 2 or less, more preferably 15 [mu] g / mm 2 or less. Although it does not restrict | limit in particular regarding a minimum, 0.001 microgram / mm < 2 > or more is preferable and 0.005 microgram / mm < 2 > or more is more preferable at the point which the electroconductivity of a electrically conductive film is more excellent.
Note that when ion migration occurs when the amount of silver contained in the conductive film is small, silver that has formed the conductive film is eluted, and disconnection of the conductive film is likely to occur. However, in the present invention, by bonding a transparent double-sided PSA sheet containing a predetermined compound to the conductive film, silver ion migration can be suppressed and disconnection of the conductive film can be suppressed.
 銀量の測定方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用できる。例えば、導電膜の断面SEM写真を観察して元素分析することにより銀量を測定することができる。また、導電膜を硝酸などの強酸と接触させて、導電膜中の銀を溶解させて、溶解した量から銀量を測定することもできる。また、銀ナノワイヤや銀ナノ粒子を含む分散液を使用して導電膜を作製する場合は、導電膜を作製する際に使用した分散液の量から、導電膜中における銀量を計算により求めることもできる。
 また、導電膜の単位面積当たりとは、導電膜の透明基板との接触部分の単位面積当たりを意味する。つまり、導電膜と透明基板との接触部分の面積のみを基準に銀量の計算を行う。言い換えると、導電膜がパターン状の場合、導電膜と接触していない透明基板表面(例えば、導電膜間に位置する、導電膜と接触していない透明基板表面)の面積は、上記導電膜の単位面積当たりの計算には考慮にいれない。従って、導電膜の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量とは、導電膜と透明基板との接触部分における単位面積あたり(mm2)に含まれる銀量を意味する。
The measuring method in particular of silver amount is not restrict | limited, A well-known method is employable. For example, the amount of silver can be measured by observing a cross-sectional SEM photograph of the conductive film and conducting elemental analysis. Alternatively, the amount of silver can be measured from the dissolved amount by bringing the conductive film into contact with a strong acid such as nitric acid to dissolve the silver in the conductive film. Moreover, when producing a conductive film using a dispersion containing silver nanowires or silver nanoparticles, the amount of silver in the conductive film is obtained by calculation from the amount of the dispersion used to produce the conductive film. You can also.
Moreover, per unit area of the conductive film means per unit area of the contact portion of the conductive film with the transparent substrate. That is, the amount of silver is calculated based only on the area of the contact portion between the conductive film and the transparent substrate. In other words, when the conductive film is patterned, the area of the transparent substrate surface that is not in contact with the conductive film (for example, the transparent substrate surface that is located between the conductive films and is not in contact with the conductive film) is the area of the conductive film. It is not taken into consideration in the calculation per unit area. Therefore, the amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film means the amount of silver contained per unit area (mm 2 ) at the contact portion between the conductive film and the transparent substrate.
 導電膜の厚みは特に制限されないが、導電膜積層体のタッチパネルへの応用の点からは、0.05~100μmが好ましく、0.1~20μmがより好ましく、0.1~10μmがさらに好ましい。
 導電膜をタッチパネルの透明電極として適用する際には、可視光域において高い透明性を有していることが好ましく、全光線透過率が80%以上であることが好ましい。
The thickness of the conductive film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.05 to 100 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 20 μm, and still more preferably 0.1 to 10 μm from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to a touch panel.
When the conductive film is applied as a transparent electrode of a touch panel, it is preferable to have high transparency in the visible light region, and it is preferable that the total light transmittance is 80% or more.
 導電膜がパターン形状(導電性細線)の場合、導電膜の幅は特に制限されないが、導電膜積層体のタッチパネルへの応用の点からは、0.1~100000μmが好ましく、1~20000μmがより好ましく、1~10000μmがさらに好ましく、10~300μmが特に好ましい。
 導電膜がパターン形状(導電線細線)の場合、導電膜間の間隔は特に制限されないが、導電膜積層体のタッチパネルへの応用の点から、最も狭い部位において0.1~500μmが好ましく、0.1~100μmがより好ましく、視認性の観点から0.1~20μmが特に好ましい。
When the conductive film has a pattern shape (conductive thin wire), the width of the conductive film is not particularly limited. However, from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to the touch panel, 0.1 to 100,000 μm is preferable, and 1 to 20000 μm is more preferable. It is preferably 1 to 10,000 μm, more preferably 10 to 300 μm.
When the conductive film has a pattern shape (conductive thin wire), the distance between the conductive films is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to the touch panel, 0.1 to 500 μm is preferable in the narrowest part. .1 to 100 μm is more preferable, and 0.1 to 20 μm is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
 導電膜の形成方法は特に制限されず、蒸着法、スパッタリング法などの物理的成膜法、またはCVD法などの化学的気相法、銀ナノ粒子や銀ナノワイヤを含有した銀ペーストを塗布して形成する方法、特開2009-188360号に開示される銀塩を利用した方法などが挙げられる。 The method for forming the conductive film is not particularly limited, and a physical film formation method such as a vapor deposition method or a sputtering method, or a chemical vapor phase method such as a CVD method, or a silver paste containing silver nanoparticles or silver nanowires is applied. And a method using a silver salt disclosed in JP2009-188360A.
 なお、導電膜をタッチパネル等の透明電極として適用する際には、導電膜は、銀または銀合金からなる金属ナノワイヤ(以後、単に金属ナノワイヤとも称する)を含有することが好ましい。この金属ナノワイヤを使用することにより、低温で導電膜を成膜することができ、高透過率で低抵抗な透明電極を提供できる。 When the conductive film is applied as a transparent electrode such as a touch panel, the conductive film preferably contains a metal nanowire made of silver or a silver alloy (hereinafter also simply referred to as a metal nanowire). By using this metal nanowire, a conductive film can be formed at a low temperature, and a transparent electrode having high transmittance and low resistance can be provided.
(金属ナノワイヤ)
 金属ナノワイヤは、銀または銀合金から構成される。銀合金の種類は、上述の通りである。
 金属ナノワイヤとは、導電性を有し、且つ長軸方向長さが直径(短軸方向長さ)に比べて十分に長い形状を持つものをいう。中実繊維であっても、中空繊維であってもよい。
(Metal nanowires)
The metal nanowire is composed of silver or a silver alloy. The kind of silver alloy is as above-mentioned.
The metal nanowire has conductivity and has a shape in which the length in the major axis direction is sufficiently longer than the diameter (length in the minor axis direction). It may be a solid fiber or a hollow fiber.
 金属ナノワイヤの材料は、導電性に優れる点で、銀、または、銀と他の金属との合金が特に好ましい。
 銀との合金で使用する他の金属としては、白金、オスミウム、パラジウム、イリジウム、錫、ビスマス、ニッケルなどが挙げられる。これらは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
The material of the metal nanowire is particularly preferably silver or an alloy of silver and another metal in terms of excellent conductivity.
Other metals used in the alloy with silver include platinum, osmium, palladium, iridium, tin, bismuth, nickel and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 金属ナノワイヤの平均短軸長さ(「平均短軸径」、「平均直径」と称することがある)としては、5~50nmが好ましく、5~25nmがより好ましく、さらに5~20nmが特に好ましい。
 平均短軸長さが5nm未満であると、耐酸化性が悪化し、耐久性が悪くなることがある。一方、平均短軸長が50nm超であると、金属ナノワイヤの散乱が大きくなり、導電膜のヘイズ値が大きくなることがある。特に、平均短軸長さを25nm以下にすることより、金属ナノワイヤの散乱は低減でき、導電膜のヘイズ値は大幅に改良(低減)される。ヘイズが小さい導電膜を用いたタッチパネルは、導電膜のパターン見え(骨見え)が解消でき、タッチパネルの視認性が向上する。
The average minor axis length (sometimes referred to as “average minor axis diameter” or “average diameter”) of the metal nanowire is preferably 5 to 50 nm, more preferably 5 to 25 nm, and particularly preferably 5 to 20 nm.
When the average minor axis length is less than 5 nm, the oxidation resistance may deteriorate and the durability may deteriorate. On the other hand, when the average minor axis length exceeds 50 nm, the scattering of the metal nanowires increases, and the haze value of the conductive film may increase. In particular, by setting the average minor axis length to 25 nm or less, the scattering of the metal nanowires can be reduced, and the haze value of the conductive film is greatly improved (reduced). A touch panel using a conductive film having a small haze can eliminate the pattern appearance (bone appearance) of the conductive film and improve the visibility of the touch panel.
 金属ナノワイヤの平均短軸長さは、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM;日本電子株式会社製、JEM-2000FX)を用い、300個の金属ナノワイヤを観察し、その平均値から金属ナノワイヤの平均短軸長さを求める。なお、金属ナノワイヤの短軸が円形でない場合の短軸長さは、最も長いものを短軸長さとする。 The average minor axis length of the metal nanowires was determined by observing 300 metal nanowires using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX) and calculating the average minor axis length of the metal nanowires from the average value. I ask for it. The short axis length when the short axis of the metal nanowire is not circular is the shortest axis.
 金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸長さ(「平均長さ」と称することがある)としては、5μm以上であることが好ましく、5μm~40μmがより好ましく、5μm~30μmが更に好ましい。
 平均長軸長さが、5μm未満であると、密なネットワークを形成することが難しく、十分な導電性を得ることができないことがあり、40μmを超えると、金属ナノワイヤが長すぎて製造時に絡まり、製造過程で凝集物が生じてしまうことがある。
 金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸長さは、例えば、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM;日本電子株式会社製、JEM-2000FX)を用い、300個の金属ナノワイヤを観察し、その平均値から金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸長さを求める。なお、金属ナノワイヤが曲がっている場合、それを弧とする円を考慮し、その半径、および、曲率から算出される値を長軸長さとする。
The average major axis length of the metal nanowire (sometimes referred to as “average length”) is preferably 5 μm or more, more preferably 5 μm to 40 μm, and even more preferably 5 μm to 30 μm.
If the average major axis length is less than 5 μm, it is difficult to form a dense network, and sufficient conductivity may not be obtained. If it exceeds 40 μm, metal nanowires are too long and become entangled during production. In the manufacturing process, agglomerates may occur.
The average major axis length of the metal nanowire is, for example, observed with 300 transmission nanoscopes using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX), and the average length of the metal nanowires from the average value. Find the shaft length. When the metal nanowire is bent, a circle having the arc as an arc is taken into consideration, and a value calculated from the radius and the curvature is taken as the major axis length.
 金属ナノワイヤの製造方法は特に制限はなく、いかなる方法で作製してもよいが、ハロゲン化合物と分散剤を溶解した溶媒中で金属イオンを還元することによって製造することが好ましい。また、金属ナノワイヤを形成した後は、常法により脱塩処理を行うことが、分散性、導電膜の経時安定性の観点から好ましい。
 また、金属ナノワイヤの製造方法としては、特開2009-215594号公報、特開2009-242880号公報、特開2009-299162号公報、特開2010-84173号公報、特開2010-86714号公報、特表2009-505358号公報などに記載の方法を用いることができる。
The method for producing the metal nanowire is not particularly limited and may be produced by any method, but it is preferably produced by reducing metal ions in a solvent in which a halogen compound and a dispersant are dissolved. In addition, after forming the metal nanowire, it is preferable to perform a desalting treatment by a conventional method from the viewpoints of dispersibility and stability of the conductive film over time.
In addition, as a method for producing metal nanowires, JP2009-215594A, JP2009-242880A, JP2009-299162A, JP2010-84173A, JP2010-86714A, The method described in JP-T-2009-505358 can be used.
 金属ナノワイヤのアスペクト比としては目的に応じて適宜選択することができるが、10以上であれば特に制限なく、50以上がより好ましく、100以上がさらに好ましく、5000以上がさらに好ましく、10,000から100,000が特に好ましい。アスペクト比とは、一般的には繊維状の物質の長辺と短辺との比(平均長軸長さ/平均短軸長さの比)を意味する。
 アスペクト比の測定方法としては、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができ、例えば、電子顕微鏡等により測定する方法などが挙げられる。
 金属ナノワイヤのアスペクト比を電子顕微鏡で測定する場合、電子顕微鏡の1視野で確認できればよい。また、金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸長さと平均短軸長さとを各々別に測定することによって、金属ナノワイヤ全体のアスペクト比を見積もることができる。
 なお、金属ナノワイヤがチューブ状の場合には、アスペクト比を算出するための直径としては、該チューブの外径を用いる。
The aspect ratio of the metal nanowire can be appropriately selected according to the purpose, but is not particularly limited as long as it is 10 or more, more preferably 50 or more, further preferably 100 or more, further preferably 5000 or more, and from 10,000 100,000 is particularly preferred. The aspect ratio generally means the ratio between the long side and the short side of the fibrous material (ratio of average major axis length / average minor axis length).
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a measuring method of an aspect ratio, According to the objective, it can select suitably, For example, the method etc. which measure with an electron microscope etc. are mentioned.
When measuring the aspect ratio of a metal nanowire with an electron microscope, it is only necessary to confirm with one field of view of the electron microscope. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the whole metal nanowire can be estimated by separately measuring the average major axis length and the average minor axis length of the metal nanowire.
When the metal nanowire has a tube shape, the outer diameter of the tube is used as the diameter for calculating the aspect ratio.
(銀または銀合金からなる金属ナノワイヤを含有する導電膜)
 銀または銀合金からなる金属ナノワイヤを含有する導電膜の形成方法は特に制限されないが、上記金属ナノワイヤと共に、マトリクス成分として、(1)バインダーおよび光重合性組成物を少なくとも含有する感光性組成物、(2)ゾルゲル硬化物、または(3)高分子を少なくとも含有する組成物、を少なくとも含有する組成物を用いることが好ましい。
 なお、マトリクス成分(導電膜に含まれる金属ナノワイヤおよび溶剤を除いた全ての成分)の質量と、金属ナノワイヤの質量との質量比は、0.5~15(より好ましくは1.0~12、特に好ましくは2.0~10)であることが好ましい。質量比が0.5未満であると、バインダー成分が少なく、金属ナノワイヤの基板表面に対する密着性が弱く、膜強度が弱くなる場合があり、質量比が15を超えると、導電膜の表面抵抗値が上昇してしまうことがある。
 以下に、マトリクス成分として使用される材料について詳述する。
(Conductive film containing metal nanowire made of silver or silver alloy)
A method for forming a conductive film containing metal nanowires made of silver or a silver alloy is not particularly limited, and together with the metal nanowires, as a matrix component, (1) a photosensitive composition containing at least a binder and a photopolymerizable composition, It is preferable to use a composition containing at least (2) a sol-gel cured product or (3) a composition containing at least a polymer.
The mass ratio of the mass of the matrix component (all components excluding the metal nanowire and the solvent contained in the conductive film) to the mass of the metal nanowire is 0.5 to 15 (more preferably 1.0 to 12, Particularly preferred is 2.0 to 10). When the mass ratio is less than 0.5, the binder component is small, the adhesion of the metal nanowires to the substrate surface is weak, and the film strength may be weak. When the mass ratio exceeds 15, the surface resistance value of the conductive film May rise.
Below, the material used as a matrix component is explained in full detail.
(バインダー)
 バインダーとしては、線状有機高分子重合体であって、分子(好ましくは、アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子)中に少なくとも1つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基(例えばカルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基など)を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂の中から適宜選択することができる。
 これらの中でも、有機溶剤に可溶でアルカリ水溶液に可溶なものが好ましく、また、酸解離性基を有し、酸の作用により酸解離性基が解離した時にアルカリ可溶となるものが特に好ましい。
 ここで、酸解離性基とは、酸の存在下で解離することが可能な官能基を表す。
(binder)
The binder is a linear organic high molecular polymer, and at least one group that promotes alkali solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain) ( For example, it can be appropriately selected from alkali-soluble resins having a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and the like.
Among these, those that are soluble in an organic solvent and soluble in an aqueous alkali solution are preferable, and those that have an acid-dissociable group and become alkali-soluble when the acid-dissociable group is dissociated by the action of an acid are particularly preferable. preferable.
Here, the acid dissociable group represents a functional group that can dissociate in the presence of an acid.
 バインダーの製造には、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法による方法を適用することができる。ラジカル重合法でアルカリ可溶性樹脂を製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類およびその量、溶媒の種類などの重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能であり、実験的に条件を定めることができる。 For the production of the binder, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent and the like when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and experimental conditions are determined. be able to.
 線状有機高分子重合体としては、側鎖にカルボン酸を有するポリマーが好ましい。
 側鎖にカルボン酸を有するポリマーとしては、例えば、特開昭59-44615号、特公昭54-34327号、特公昭58-12577号、特公昭54-25957号、特開昭59-53836号、特開昭59-71048号の各公報に記載されているような、メタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体、側鎖にカルボン酸を有する酸性セルロース誘導体、水酸基を有するポリマーに酸無水物を付加させたものなどがあり、更に側鎖に(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する高分子重合体も好ましいものとして挙げられる。
As the linear organic polymer, a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable.
Examples of the polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain include, for example, As described in JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partial ester Maleic acid copolymers, acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, polymers obtained by adding an acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group, and a polymer having a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain Are also preferred.
 これらの中でも、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸共重合体、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/他のモノマーからなる多元共重合体が特に好ましい。
 更に、側鎖に(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する高分子重合体や(メタ)アクリル酸/グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート/他のモノマーからなる多元共重合体も有用なものとして挙げられる。該ポリマーは任意の量で混合して用いることができる。
Among these, benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymers and multi-component copolymers composed of benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers are particularly preferable.
Furthermore, a high molecular polymer having a (meth) acryloyl group in the side chain and a multi-component copolymer composed of (meth) acrylic acid / glycidyl (meth) acrylate / other monomers are also useful. The polymer can be used by mixing in an arbitrary amount.
 上記以外にも、線状有機高分子重合体としては、特開平7-140654号公報に記載の、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシ-3-フェノキシプロピルアクリレート/ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/メチルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート/ポリスチレンマクロモノマー/ベンジルメタクレート/メタクリル酸共重合体、などが挙げられる。 In addition to the above, as the linear organic polymer, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer described in JP-A-7-140654, 2- Hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl acrylate / polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macro And monomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂における具体的な構成単位としては、(メタ)アクリル酸と、該(メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他の単量体とが好適である。 As specific structural units in the alkali-soluble resin, (meth) acrylic acid and other monomers copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic acid are suitable.
 (メタ)アクリル酸と共重合可能な他の単量体としては、例えば、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート、アリール(メタ)アクリレート、ビニル化合物などが挙げられる。これらは、アルキル基およびアリール基の水素原子は、置換基で置換されていてもよい。
 アルキル(メタ)アクリレートまたはアリール(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、オクチル(メタ)アクリレート、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、トリル(メタ)アクリレート、ナフチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンテニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンテニルオキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、グリシジルメタクリレート、テトラヒドロフルフリルメタクリレート、ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー、などが挙げられる。これらは、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, vinyl compounds, and the like. In these, the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group and aryl group may be substituted with a substituent.
Examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate or aryl (meth) acrylate include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, and pentyl (meth). Acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meta ) Acrylate, dicyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, Polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer, and the like. These may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
 ビニル化合物としては、例えば、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、アクリロニトリル、ビニルアセテート、N-ビニルピロリドン、ポリスチレンマクロモノマー、CH2=CR89〔ただし、R8は水素原子または炭素数1~5のアルキル基を表し、R9は炭素数6~10の芳香族炭化水素環を表す。〕などが挙げられる。これらは、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 Examples of the vinyl compound include styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, polystyrene macromonomer, CH 2 = CR 8 R 9 [where R 8 is a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 Represents an alkyl group having ˜5, and R 9 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. And the like. These may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
 バインダーの重量平均分子量は、アルカリ溶解速度、膜物性等の点から、1,000~500,000が好ましく、3,000~300,000がより好ましく、5,000~200,000が更に好ましい。
 ここで、重量平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエイションクロマトグラフィー法により測定し、標準ポリスチレン検量線を用いて求めることができる。
The weight average molecular weight of the binder is preferably from 1,000 to 500,000, more preferably from 3,000 to 300,000, and even more preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, from the viewpoints of alkali dissolution rate, film physical properties and the like.
Here, the weight average molecular weight is measured by gel permeation chromatography and can be determined using a standard polystyrene calibration curve.
 バインダーの含有量は、前述の金属ナノワイヤを含む光重合性組成物の固形分の総質量を基準として、5~90質量%が好ましく、10~85質量%がより好ましく、20~80質量%が更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、現像性と金属ナノワイヤの導電性の両立が図れる。 The content of the binder is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, more preferably 10 to 85% by mass, and 20 to 80% by mass based on the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowires. Further preferred. Within the above range, both developability and conductivity of the metal nanowire can be achieved.
(光重合性組成物)
 光重合性組成物は、露光により画像を形成する機能を導電膜に付与するか、またはそのきっかけを与える組成物を意味する。(a)付加重合性不飽和化合物と、(b)光に照射されるとラジカルを発生する光重合開始剤とを基本成分として含む。
(Photopolymerizable composition)
The photopolymerizable composition means a composition that imparts a function of forming an image by exposure to the conductive film or gives the trigger for the function. The basic component includes (a) an addition-polymerizable unsaturated compound and (b) a photopolymerization initiator that generates radicals when irradiated with light.
(a)付加重合性不飽和化合物
 成分(a)の付加重合性不飽和化合物(以下、「重合性化合物」ともいう。)は、ラジカルの存在下で付加重合反応を生じて高分子化される化合物であり、通常、分子末端に少なくとも一つの、より好ましくは二つ以上の、更に好ましくは四つ以上の、更により好ましくは六つ以上のエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物が使用される。
 これらは、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、即ち2量体、3量体若しくはオリゴマー、またはそれらの混合物などの化学的形態をもつ。
 このような重合性化合物としては、種々のものが知られており、それらは成分(a)として使用することができる。
 このうち、特に好ましい重合性化合物としては、膜強度の観点から、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリトリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリトリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリトリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートが特に好ましい。
(A) Addition polymerizable unsaturated compound The addition polymerizable unsaturated compound of component (a) (hereinafter also referred to as “polymerizable compound”) is polymerized by causing an addition polymerization reaction in the presence of a radical. Usually, a compound having at least one, more preferably two or more, more preferably four or more, and still more preferably six or more ethylenically unsaturated double bonds at the molecular terminals is used. The
These have chemical forms such as monomers, prepolymers, ie dimers, trimers or oligomers, or mixtures thereof.
Various kinds of such polymerizable compounds are known, and they can be used as the component (a).
Among these, particularly preferred polymerizable compounds are trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) from the viewpoint of film strength. Acrylate is particularly preferred.
 成分(a)の含有量は、前述の金属ナノワイヤを含む光重合性組成物の固形分の総質量を基準として、2.6~37.5質量%であることが好ましく、5.0~20.0質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the component (a) is preferably 2.6 to 37.5% by mass based on the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowire, and is preferably 5.0 to 20%. More preferably, it is 0.0 mass%.
(b)光重合開始剤
 成分(b)の光重合開始剤は、光に照射されるとラジカルを発生する化合物である。このよう光重合開始剤には、光照射により、最終的には酸となる酸ラジカルを発生する化合物、または、その他のラジカルを発生する化合物などが挙げられる。以下、前者を「光酸発生剤」と呼び、後者を「光ラジカル発生剤」と呼ぶ。
(B) Photopolymerization initiator The photopolymerization initiator of component (b) is a compound that generates radicals when irradiated with light. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a compound that generates an acid radical that finally becomes an acid upon irradiation with light, or a compound that generates another radical. Hereinafter, the former is referred to as “photoacid generator”, and the latter is referred to as “photoradical generator”.
-光酸発生剤-
 光酸発生剤としては、光カチオン重合の光開始剤、光ラジカル重合の光開始剤、色素類の光消色剤、光変色剤、あるいはマイクロレジスト等に使用されている活性光線または放射線の照射により酸ラジカルを発生する公知の化合物およびそれらの混合物を適宜に選択して使用することができる。
-Photoacid generator-
Photoacid generators include photoinitiators for photocationic polymerization, photoinitiators for photoradical polymerization, photodecolorants for dyes, photochromic agents, irradiation with actinic rays or radiation used in microresists, etc. Thus, known compounds that generate acid radicals and mixtures thereof can be appropriately selected and used.
 このような光酸発生剤としては特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができ、例えば、ジ-またはトリ-ハロメチル基を少なくとも一つ有するトリアジン、1,3,4-オキサジアゾール、ナフトキノン-1,2-ジアジド-4-スルホニルハライド、ジアゾニウム塩、ホスホニウム塩、スルホニウム塩、ヨードニウム塩、イミドスルホネート、オキシムスルホネート、ジアゾジスルホン、ジスルホン、o-ニトロベンジルスルホネートなどが挙げられる。これらの中でも、スルホン酸を発生する化合物であるイミドスルホネート、オキシムスルホネート、o-ニトロベンジルスルホネートが特に好ましい。
 また、活性光線または放射線の照射により酸ラジカルを発生する基または化合物を樹脂の主鎖または側鎖に導入した化合物、例えば、米国特許第3,849,137号明細書、独国特許第3914407号明細書、特開昭63-26653号、特開昭55-164824号、特開昭62-69263号、特開昭63-146038号、特開昭63-163452号、特開昭62-153853号、特開昭63-146029号の各公報等に記載の化合物を用いることができる。
 更に、米国特許第3,779,778号、欧州特許第126,712号等の各明細書に記載の化合物も、酸ラジカル発生剤として使用することができる。
Such a photoacid generator is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the intended purpose. For example, a triazine having at least one di- or tri-halomethyl group, 1,3,4-oxadiazole Naphthoquinone-1,2-diazido-4-sulfonyl halide, diazonium salt, phosphonium salt, sulfonium salt, iodonium salt, imide sulfonate, oxime sulfonate, diazodisulfone, disulfone, o-nitrobenzyl sulfonate, and the like. Among these, imide sulfonate, oxime sulfonate, and o-nitrobenzyl sulfonate, which are compounds that generate sulfonic acid, are particularly preferable.
Further, a compound in which a group or a compound that generates an acid radical upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation is introduced into the main chain or side chain of the resin, for example, US Pat. No. 3,849,137, German Patent No. 3914407. Description, JP-A-63-26653, JP-A-55-164824, JP-A-62-69263, JP-A-63-146038, JP-A-63-163452, JP-A-62-153853 The compounds described in JP-A-63-146029, etc. can be used.
Furthermore, compounds described in each specification such as US Pat. No. 3,779,778 and European Patent 126,712 can also be used as an acid radical generator.
 上記トリアジン系化合物としては、例えば、特開2011-018636号公報、特開2011-254046号公報に記載されている化合物を使用することができる。 As the triazine compound, for example, compounds described in JP2011-018636A and JP2011-254046A can be used.
 本発明においては、光酸発生剤の中でもスルホン酸を発生する化合物が好ましく、下記のようなオキシムスルホネート化合物が高感度である観点から特に好ましい。 In the present invention, among the photoacid generators, compounds that generate sulfonic acid are preferable, and the following oxime sulfonate compounds are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of high sensitivity.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 光酸発生剤として、1,2-ナフトキノンジアジド基を有する化合物を用いると高感度で現像性が良好である。
 光酸発生剤の中で下記の化合物でDが独立して水素原子または1,2-ナフトキノンジアジド基であるものが高感度である観点から好ましい。
When a compound having a 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide group is used as the photoacid generator, high sensitivity and good developability are obtained.
Among the photoacid generators, the following compounds in which D is independently a hydrogen atom or a 1,2-naphthoquinonediazide group are preferred from the viewpoint of high sensitivity.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
-光ラジカル発生剤-
 光ラジカル発生剤は、光を直接吸収しまたは光増感されて、分解反応または水素引き抜き反応を起こし、ラジカルを発生する機能を有する化合物である。光ラジカル発生剤としては、波長300nm~500nmの領域に吸収を有するものであることが好ましい。
 このような光ラジカル発生剤としては、多数の化合物が知られており、例えば、特開2008-268884号公報に記載されているようなトリアジン系化合物、カルボニル化合物、ケタール化合物、ベンゾイン化合物、アクリジン化合物、有機過酸化化合物、アゾ化合物、クマリン化合物、アジド化合物、メタロセン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、有機ホウ酸化合物、ジスルホン酸化合物、オキシムエステル化合物、アシルホスフィン(オキシド)化合物、が挙げられる。これらは目的に応じて適宜選択することができる。これらの中でも、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシムエステル化合物、またはアシルホスフィン(オキシド)化合物が露光感度の観点から特に好ましい。
-Photoradical generator-
The photoradical generator is a compound having a function of generating radicals by directly absorbing or photosensitizing light to cause a decomposition reaction or a hydrogen abstraction reaction. The photo radical generator is preferably one having absorption in a wavelength region of 300 nm to 500 nm.
A large number of compounds are known as such photo radical generators. For example, triazine compounds, carbonyl compounds, ketal compounds, benzoin compounds, acridine compounds as described in JP-A-2008-268884 are known. , Organic peroxide compounds, azo compounds, coumarin compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, organic boric acid compounds, disulfonic acid compounds, oxime ester compounds, and acylphosphine (oxide) compounds. These can be appropriately selected according to the purpose. Among these, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a hexaarylbiimidazole compound, an oxime ester compound, or an acylphosphine (oxide) compound is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
 光ラジカル発生剤としては、例えば、特開2011-018636号公報、特開2011-254046号公報に記載されている光ラジカル発生剤を使用することができる。 As the photoradical generator, for example, photoradical generators described in JP2011-018636A and JP2011-254046A can be used.
 光重合開始剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよく、その含有量は、金属ナノワイヤを含む光重合性組成物の固形分の総質量を基準として、0.1~50質量%が好ましく、0.5~30質量%がより好ましく、1~20質量%が更に好ましい。このような数値範囲において、後述の導電性領域と非導電性領域とを含むパターンを導電膜に形成する場合に、良好な感度とパターン形成性が得られる。 A photoinitiator may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together, The content is 0 on the basis of the total mass of solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing metal nanowire. 1 to 50% by mass is preferable, 0.5 to 30% by mass is more preferable, and 1 to 20% by mass is still more preferable. In such a numerical range, when a pattern including a conductive region and a non-conductive region described later is formed on the conductive film, good sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
 上記成分以外のその他の添加剤としては、例えば、連鎖移動剤、架橋剤、分散剤、溶媒、界面活性剤、酸化防止剤、硫化防止剤、金属腐食防止剤、粘度調整剤、防腐剤等の各種の添加剤などが挙げられる。 Other additives other than the above components include, for example, chain transfer agents, crosslinking agents, dispersants, solvents, surfactants, antioxidants, sulfurization inhibitors, metal corrosion inhibitors, viscosity modifiers, preservatives, and the like. Various additives are mentioned.
(連鎖移動剤)
 連鎖移動剤は、光重合性組成物の露光感度向上のために使用されるものである。このような連鎖移動剤としては、例えば、N,N-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチルエステルなどのN,N-ジアルキルアミノ安息香酸アルキルエステル、2-メルカプトベンゾチアゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾオキサゾール、2-メルカプトベンゾイミダゾール、N-フェニルメルカプトベンゾイミダゾール、1,3,5-トリス(3-メルカプトブチルオキシエチル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-トリオンなどの複素環を有するメルカプト化合物、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタンなどの脂肪族多官能メルカプト化合物などが挙げられる。これらは、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
(Chain transfer agent)
The chain transfer agent is used for improving the exposure sensitivity of the photopolymerizable composition. Examples of such chain transfer agents include N, N-dialkylaminobenzoic acid alkyl esters such as N, N-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-mercaptobenzoxazole, and 2-mercaptobenzoic acid. Complexes such as imidazole, N-phenylmercaptobenzimidazole, 1,3,5-tris (3-mercaptobutyloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione Aliphatic polyfunctional mercapto such as mercapto compounds having a ring, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptopropionate), pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane Compound etc. are mentioned. These may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
 連鎖移動剤の含有量は、前述の金属ナノワイヤを含む光重合性組成物の固形分の総質量を基準として、0.01~15質量%が好ましく、0.1~10質量%がより好ましく、0.5~5質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01 to 15% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowires described above. More preferably, it is 0.5 to 5% by mass.
(架橋剤)
 架橋剤は、フリーラジカル、酸、または熱により化学結合を形成し、導電膜を硬化させる化合物で、例えば、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、アシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの基で置換されたメラミン系化合物、グアナミン系化合物、グリコールウリル系化合物、ウレア系化合物、フェノール系化合物もしくはフェノールのエーテル化合物、エポキシ系化合物、オキセタン系化合物、チオエポキシ系化合物、イソシアネート系化合物、アジド系化合物、メタクリロイル基若しくはアクリロイル基などを含むエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物、などが挙げられる。これらの中でも、膜物性、耐熱性、溶剤耐性の点で、エポキシ系化合物、オキセタン系化合物、エチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物が特に好ましい。
 また、オキセタン樹脂は、1種単独でまたはエポキシ樹脂と混合して使用することができる。特に、エポキシ樹脂との併用で用いた場合には、反応性が高く、膜物性を向上させる観点から好ましい。
 なお、架橋剤としてエチレン性不飽和二重結合基を有する化合物を用いる場合、当該架橋剤も重合性化合物に包含され、その含有量は、本発明における重合性化合物の含有量に含まれることを考慮すべきである。
 架橋剤の含有量は、前述の金属ナノワイヤを含む光重合性組成物の固形分の総質量を100質量部としたとき、1~250質量部が好ましく、3~200質量部がより好ましい。
(Crosslinking agent)
The crosslinking agent is a compound that forms a chemical bond by free radical, acid, or heat, and cures the conductive film, and is substituted with at least one group selected from, for example, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group. Melamine compound, guanamine compound, glycoluril compound, urea compound, phenol compound or phenol ether compound, epoxy compound, oxetane compound, thioepoxy compound, isocyanate compound, azide compound, methacryloyl group or acryloyl And a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group containing a group. Among these, an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, and a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group are particularly preferable in terms of film properties, heat resistance, and solvent resistance.
Moreover, oxetane resin can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture with an epoxy resin. In particular, when used in combination with an epoxy resin, the reactivity is high, which is preferable from the viewpoint of improving film properties.
When a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond group is used as the crosslinking agent, the crosslinking agent is also included in the polymerizable compound, and the content thereof is included in the content of the polymerizable compound in the present invention. Should be considered.
The content of the cross-linking agent is preferably 1 to 250 parts by mass, and more preferably 3 to 200 parts by mass when the total mass of the solid content of the photopolymerizable composition containing the metal nanowire is 100 parts by mass.
(分散剤)
 分散剤は、光重合性組成物中における前述の金属ナノワイヤが凝集することを防止しつつ分散させるために用いられる。分散剤としては、金属ナノワイヤを分散させることができれば特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適否選択することができる。例えば、顔料分散剤として市販されている分散剤を利用でき、特に金属ナノワイヤに吸着する性質を持つ高分子分散剤が好ましい。このような高分子分散剤としては、例えばポリビニルピロリドン、BYKシリーズ(ビックケミー社製)、ソルスパースシリーズ(日本ルーブリゾール社製など)、アジスパーシリーズ(味の素株式会社製)などが挙げられる。
 なお、分散剤として高分子分散剤を、金属ナノワイヤの製造に用いたもの以外をさらに別に添加する場合、当該高分子分散剤も、また、バインダーに包含され、その含有量は、前述のバインダーの含有量に含まれることを考慮すべきである。
 分散剤の含有量としては、バインダー100質量部に対し、0.1~50質量部が好ましく、0.5~40質量部がより好ましく、1~30質量部が特に好ましい。
 分散剤の含有量を0.1質量部以上とすることで、分散液中での金属ナノワイヤの凝集が効果的に抑制され、50質量部以下とすることで、塗布工程において安定な液膜が形成され、塗布ムラの発生が抑制されるため好ましい。
(Dispersant)
A dispersing agent is used in order to disperse | distribute, preventing that the above-mentioned metal nanowire in a photopolymerizable composition aggregates. The dispersant is not particularly limited as long as the metal nanowires can be dispersed, and can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose. For example, a commercially available dispersant can be used as a pigment dispersant, and a polymer dispersant having a property of adsorbing to metal nanowires is particularly preferable. Examples of such a polymer dispersant include polyvinyl pyrrolidone, BYK series (manufactured by Big Chemie), Solsperse series (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), and Ajisper series (manufactured by Ajinomoto Co., Inc.).
In addition, when a polymer dispersant is added as a dispersant other than that used for the production of metal nanowires, the polymer dispersant is also included in the binder, and the content thereof is It should be considered that it is included in the content.
The content of the dispersant is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 40 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the binder.
By setting the content of the dispersant to 0.1 parts by mass or more, aggregation of metal nanowires in the dispersion is effectively suppressed, and by setting the content to 50 parts by mass or less, a stable liquid film can be formed in the coating process. It is preferable because it is formed and the occurrence of uneven coating is suppressed.
(溶媒)
 溶媒は、前述の金属ナノワイヤと、光重合性組成物とを含む組成物を基材表面に膜状に形成するための塗布液とするために使用される成分であり、目的に応じて適宜選択することができる。例えば、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、乳酸エチル、3-メトキシブタノール、水、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、イソプロピルアセテート、乳酸メチル、N-メチルピロリドン(NMP)、γ-ブチロラクトン(GBL)、プロピレンカーボネート、などが挙げられる。この溶媒は、前述の金属ナノワイヤの分散液の溶媒の少なくとも一部が兼ねていてもよい。これらは、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 このような溶媒を含む塗布液の固形分濃度は、0.1~20質量%の範囲で含有させることが好ましい。
(solvent)
The solvent is a component used to form a coating liquid for forming a composition containing the metal nanowire and the photopolymerizable composition on the surface of the substrate in the form of a film, and is appropriately selected depending on the purpose. can do. For example, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, 3-methoxybutanol, water, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, isopropyl acetate, methyl lactate N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP), γ-butyrolactone (GBL), propylene carbonate, and the like. This solvent may also serve as at least a part of the solvent of the metal nanowire dispersion described above. These may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
The solid content concentration of the coating solution containing such a solvent is preferably contained in the range of 0.1 to 20% by mass.
(金属腐食防止剤)
 金属ナノワイヤの金属腐食防止剤を含有させておくことが好ましい。このような金属腐食防止剤としては、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができるが、例えばチオール類、アゾール類などが好適である。
 金属腐食防止剤を含有させることで、防錆効果を発揮させることができ、導電材料の経時による導電性および透明性の低下を抑制することができる。金属腐食防止剤は感光性層形成用組成物中に、適した溶媒で溶解した状態、または粉末で添加するか、導電膜を作製後に、これを金属腐食防止剤浴に浸すことで付与することができる。
 金属腐食防止剤を添加する場合は、金属ナノワイヤに対して0.5~10質量%含有させることが好ましい。
(Metal corrosion inhibitor)
It is preferable to contain a metal corrosion inhibitor for metal nanowires. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as such a metal corrosion inhibitor, Although it can select suitably according to the objective, For example, thiols, azoles, etc. are suitable.
By containing a metal corrosion inhibitor, it is possible to exert a rust prevention effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in conductivity and transparency of the conductive material over time. The metal corrosion inhibitor should be added to the composition for forming the photosensitive layer by dissolving it in a suitable solvent, or by adding powder, or by immersing it in a metal corrosion inhibitor bath after preparing the conductive film. Can do.
When a metal corrosion inhibitor is added, it is preferably contained in an amount of 0.5 to 10% by mass with respect to the metal nanowires.
 その他マトリクスとしては、前述の金属ナノワイヤの製造の際に使用された分散剤としての高分子化合物を、マトリクスを構成する成分の少なくとも一部として使用することが可能である。 As the other matrix, it is possible to use, as at least a part of the components constituting the matrix, a polymer compound as a dispersant used in the production of the metal nanowire described above.
 透明導電膜の形成には、金属ナノワイヤとともに、マトリクス成分としてゾルゲル硬化物を少なくとも含有する組成物を用いることもできる。
 以下に、ゾルゲル硬化物について詳述する。
For the formation of the transparent conductive film, a composition containing at least a sol-gel cured product as a matrix component can be used together with the metal nanowires.
Below, a sol-gel hardened | cured material is explained in full detail.
(ゾルゲル硬化物)
 上記ゾルゲル硬化物は、Si、Ti、ZrおよびAlからなる群から選ばれた元素のアルコキシド化合物(以下、「特定アルコキシド化合物」ともいう。)を加水分解および重縮合し、更に所望により加熱、乾燥して得られるものである。
(Sol-gel cured product)
The sol-gel cured product is obtained by hydrolyzing and polycondensing an alkoxide compound of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti, Zr and Al (hereinafter also referred to as “specific alkoxide compound”), and further heating and drying as desired. Is obtained.
 特定アルコキシド化合物は、下記一般式(X)で示される化合物であることが、入手が容易である点で好ましい。
   M1(OR20a21 4-a    (X)
(一般式(X)中、M1はSi、TiおよびZrから選択される元素を示し、R20、R21はそれぞれ独立に水素原子または炭化水素基を示し、aは2~4の整数を示す。)
The specific alkoxide compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (X) because it is easily available.
M 1 (OR 20 ) a R 21 4-a (X)
(In the general formula (X), M 1 represents an element selected from Si, Ti and Zr, R 20 and R 21 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, and a represents an integer of 2 to 4) Show.)
 一般式(X)におけるR20およびR21の各炭化水素基としては、好ましくはアルキル基またはアリール基が挙げられる。
 アルキル基を示す場合の炭素数は好ましくは1~18、より好ましくは1~8であり、さらにより好ましくは1~4である。また、アリール基を示す場合は、フェニル基が好ましい。
 アルキル基またはアリール基は置換基を有していてもよく、導入可能な置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アミノ基、アルキルアミノ基、メルカプト基などが挙げられる。
 なお、一般式(X)で示される化合物は低分子化合物であり、分子量1000以下であることが好ましい。
Each hydrocarbon group of R 20 and R 21 in the general formula (X) is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
The carbon number in the case of showing an alkyl group is preferably 1 to 18, more preferably 1 to 8, and still more preferably 1 to 4. Moreover, when showing an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable.
The alkyl group or aryl group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent that can be introduced include a halogen atom, an amino group, an alkylamino group, and a mercapto group.
The compound represented by the general formula (X) is a low molecular compound, and preferably has a molecular weight of 1000 or less.
 一般式(X)で示される化合物の具体例としては、例えば、特開2010-064474号公報などに記載されている。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (X) are described in, for example, JP 2010-064474 A.
 本発明においてゾルゲル硬化物を導電膜のマトリクスとして用いる場合、前述の金属ナノワイヤに対する特定アルコキシド化合物の比率、即ち、特定アルコキシド化合物/金属ナノワイヤの質量比が0.25/1~30/1の範囲で使用されることが好ましい。上記質量比が0.25/1よりも小さい場合には、透明性が劣ると同時に、耐摩耗性、耐熱性、耐湿熱性および耐屈曲性のうちの少なくとも一つが劣った導電膜となり、他方、上記質量比が30/1よりも大きい場合には、導電性および耐屈曲性の劣る導電膜となる。
 上記質量比は、より好ましくは0.5/1~20/1の範囲、更に好ましくは1/1~15/1、最も好ましくは2/1~8/1の範囲が高い導電性と高い透明性(全光透過率及びヘイズ)を有すると共に、耐摩耗性、耐熱性および耐湿熱性に優れ、かつ耐屈曲性に優れる導電材料を安定的に得ることができるので、好ましい。
When the sol-gel cured product is used as a conductive film matrix in the present invention, the ratio of the specific alkoxide compound to the metal nanowire, that is, the mass ratio of the specific alkoxide compound / metal nanowire is in the range of 0.25 / 1 to 30/1. It is preferably used. When the mass ratio is smaller than 0.25 / 1, the transparency is inferior, and at the same time, at least one of the wear resistance, heat resistance, moist heat resistance and flex resistance becomes a conductive film, When the mass ratio is larger than 30/1, a conductive film having poor conductivity and bending resistance is obtained.
The mass ratio is more preferably in the range of 0.5 / 1 to 20/1, more preferably in the range of 1/1 to 15/1, and most preferably in the range of 2/1 to 8/1. High conductivity and high transparency It is preferable because it can stably obtain a conductive material having high properties (total light transmittance and haze), excellent wear resistance, heat resistance and moist heat resistance, and excellent flex resistance.
 また、導電膜の形成には、金属ナノワイヤとともに、マトリクス成分として高分子を少なくとも含有する組成物を用いることもできる。
 以下に、使用される高分子について詳述する。
In addition, the conductive film can be formed using a composition containing at least a polymer as a matrix component together with the metal nanowires.
Hereinafter, the polymers used will be described in detail.
 高分子としては合成高分子や天然高分子が含まれ、合成高分子としては、ポリエステル、ポリイミド、ポリアクリル、ポリビニロン、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリスチレン、ポリ塩化ビニル、メタクリル酸樹脂、フッ素系樹脂、フェノール樹脂、メラミン樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、合成ゴムやこれらのラテックス等が挙げられる。天然高分子としては、セルロース系樹脂や天然ゴムなどが挙げられる。 Synthetic polymers and natural polymers are included as polymers, and synthetic polymers include polyester, polyimide, polyacryl, polyvinylon, polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, methacrylic acid resin, fluorine resin, and phenol resin. , Melamine resin, silicone resin, synthetic rubber, and latex of these. Examples of natural polymers include cellulosic resins and natural rubber.
 必要により、導電膜上には保護コート材からなる保護層を設けてもよい。
 保護層を形成する保護コート材に関しては、例えば、特開2011-167848号公報に記載されるものが適応できる。
 保護コート材は、架橋剤、重合開始剤、安定剤(例えば、酸化防止剤および製品寿命長期化のための紫外線安定剤、および保存期間改善のための重合防止剤)、界面活性剤、および同様な効果を有するものを含んでもよい。また、保護コート材は、金属ナノワイヤの腐食を防止する腐食防止剤をさらに含んでもよい。
If necessary, a protective layer made of a protective coating material may be provided on the conductive film.
As the protective coating material for forming the protective layer, for example, those described in JP2011-167848A can be applied.
Protective coating materials include crosslinkers, polymerization initiators, stabilizers (eg, antioxidants and UV stabilizers for prolonging product life, and polymerization inhibitors for improving shelf life), surfactants, and the like You may include what has a special effect. The protective coating material may further include a corrosion inhibitor that prevents corrosion of the metal nanowires.
 保護層を形成する方法としては公知のウェットコート方法であれば特に制限はない。具体的には、スプレーコート、バーコート、ロールコート、ダイコート、インクジェットコート、スクリーンコート、ディップコートなどが挙げられる。 The method for forming the protective layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a known wet coating method. Specifically, spray coating, bar coating, roll coating, die coating, ink jet coating, screen coating, dip coating and the like can be mentioned.
 保護層用塗料によって透明導電膜を含浸しつつ保護層を形成するとき、塗布、乾燥後の保護層の膜厚は、塗布前の導電膜に対して薄すぎると耐擦過性、耐摩耗性、耐候性等の保護層としての機能が低下し、厚すぎると導体としての接触抵抗が増加する。 When forming the protective layer while impregnating the transparent conductive film with the protective layer coating, if the film thickness of the protective layer after application and drying is too thin relative to the conductive film before application, scratch resistance, abrasion resistance, The function as a protective layer such as weather resistance is reduced, and if it is too thick, the contact resistance as a conductor increases.
 保護層用塗料の塗布は導電膜の膜厚が50~150nmの範囲で形成されているときは、塗布、乾燥後の膜厚が30~150nmであることが好ましく、導電膜の膜厚を考慮して表面抵抗率、ヘイズ等が所定の値を実現出来るよう調整することができる。なかでも、40~175nmがより好ましく、50~150nmが特に好ましい。保護層用塗料の乾燥後の膜厚は、透明導電膜の膜厚にもよるが、30nm以上の膜厚であると保護層による保護機能がより良好に働く傾向にあり、150nm以下の膜厚であるとより良好な導電性能が確保できる傾向にある。 When the film thickness of the conductive film is applied in the range of 50 to 150 nm, the film thickness after coating and drying is preferably 30 to 150 nm. Thus, the surface resistivity, haze, and the like can be adjusted to achieve predetermined values. Among these, 40 to 175 nm is more preferable, and 50 to 150 nm is particularly preferable. Although the film thickness after drying of the coating material for the protective layer depends on the film thickness of the transparent conductive film, the protective function by the protective layer tends to work better when the film thickness is 30 nm or more, and the film thickness is 150 nm or less. When it is, it exists in the tendency which can ensure more favorable electroconductive performance.
 導電膜は、用途に応じて、所望の形状にパターニングしてもよい。
 導電膜をパターニングする方法は特に制限されず、例えば、導電膜に対し、露光し、現像するものである。より具体的には、パターン露光する工程と、現像工程とを含み、更に必要に応じてその他の工程を含んでなる。
The conductive film may be patterned into a desired shape depending on the application.
The method for patterning the conductive film is not particularly limited. For example, the conductive film is exposed and developed. More specifically, it includes a pattern exposure step and a development step, and further includes other steps as necessary.
 導電膜のマトリックスが非感光性のものである場合には、下記の(1)~(2)の方法によりパターンニングされることが好ましい。
(1)導電膜上にフォトレジスト層を設け、このフォトレジスト層に所望のパターン露光および現像を行って、当該パターン状のレジストを形成したのちに(エッチングマスク材)、導電膜をエッチング可能なエッチング液で処理するウェットプロセスか、または反応性イオンエッチングのようなドライプロセスにより、レジストで保護されていない領域の導電膜をエッチングして断線または消失させるパターニング方法。この方法は、例えば特表2010-507199号公報(特に、段落0212~0217)に記載されている。
(2)導電膜上の所望の領域に、光硬化性樹脂をインクジェット方式やスクリーン印刷方式によりパターン上に設け、この光硬化性樹脂層に所望の露光を行って、当該パターン状のレジスト(エッチングマスク材)を形成したのちに、導電膜をエッチング可能なエッチング液中に浸漬するか、またはエッチング液をシャワリングして、レジストで保護されていない領域の導電膜を断線または消失させるパターニング方法。
 上記(1)または(2)の方法による場合には、パターニングが終了した後に、導電膜上のレジストは常法により除去することが、好ましい。
In the case where the matrix of the conductive film is non-photosensitive, it is preferably patterned by the following methods (1) to (2).
(1) A photoresist layer is provided on the conductive film, and a desired pattern exposure and development are performed on the photoresist layer to form the patterned resist (etching mask material), and then the conductive film can be etched. A patterning method in which a conductive film in a region not protected by a resist is etched to be disconnected or lost by a wet process in which an etching solution is used or a dry process such as reactive ion etching. This method is described, for example, in JP-T-2010-507199 (particularly, paragraphs 0212 to 0217).
(2) A photo-curing resin is provided on a pattern in a desired region on the conductive film by an ink jet method or a screen printing method, and the photo-curing resin layer is subjected to a desired exposure to form a resist (etching) A patterning method in which, after forming a mask material, the conductive film is immersed in an etchant that can be etched or the etchant is showered to disconnect or disappear the conductive film in a region that is not protected by the resist.
In the case of the above method (1) or (2), it is preferable to remove the resist on the conductive film by a conventional method after the patterning is completed.
 エッチングマスク材を付与する方法には特に制限がなく、例えば塗布法、印刷法、インクジェット法などが挙げられる。
 塗布法としては特に制限はなく、例えば、ロールコート法、バーコート法、ディップコーティング法、スピンコーティング法、キャスティング法、ダイコート法、ブレードコート法、バーコート法、グラビアコート法、カーテンコート法、スプレーコート法、ドクターコート法、などが挙げられる。
 印刷法としては、例えば、凸版(活版)印刷法、孔版(スクリーン)印刷法、平版(オフセット)印刷法、凹版(グラビア)印刷法、などが挙げられる。なお、この工程で形成されるレジスト層はポジ型レジスト層でもよく、ネガ型レジスト層でもよい。ポジ型レジスト層の場合には、パターン状の露光領域が可溶化され、未露光領域(未溶解化領域)にパターン状のレジスト層が形成され、ネガ型レジスト層の場合には、露光領域が硬化されたレジスト層となり、溶解液の付与により、未露光部、即ち未硬化部のレジスト層が除去され、パターン状のレジスト層が形成される。
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the method to provide an etching mask material, For example, the apply | coating method, the printing method, the inkjet method etc. are mentioned.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include roll coating, bar coating, dip coating, spin coating, casting, die coating, blade coating, bar coating, gravure coating, curtain coating, and spray. Examples thereof include a coating method and a doctor coating method.
Examples of printing methods include letterpress (letterpress) printing, stencil (screen) printing, lithographic (offset) printing, and intaglio (gravure) printing. The resist layer formed in this step may be a positive resist layer or a negative resist layer. In the case of a positive resist layer, the pattern-shaped exposed region is solubilized, and a patterned resist layer is formed in the unexposed region (unsolubilized region). In the case of a negative resist layer, the exposed region is A cured resist layer is formed, and by application of the solution, the unexposed portion, that is, the uncured portion of the resist layer is removed, and a patterned resist layer is formed.
 上記(1)の方法に使用されるレジスト層形成用材料の種類は特に制限されず、ネガ型、ポジ型、ドライフィルムタイプなどのいずれも用いることができる。
 レジスト層の形成には、市販のアルカリ可溶性フォトレジストを適宜選択して用いることができる。例えば、富士フイルム製カラーモザイクシリーズ、FILSシリーズ、FIOSシリーズ、FMESシリーズ、FTENSシリーズ、FIESシリーズ、半導体プロセス用各ポジ型、ネガ型フォトレジストシリーズ、富士薬品製フジレジストシリーズ、中でも、FRシリーズ、FPPRシリーズ、FMRシリーズ、FDERシリーズなどを好ましく用いることができ、また、AZエレクトロニックマテリアルズ製フォトレジストシリーズ、中でも、RFPシリーズ、TFPシリーズ、SZPシリーズ、HKTシリーズ、SFP、シリーズ、SRシリーズ、SOPシリーズ、SZCシリーズ、CTPシリーズ、ANRシリーズ、P4000シリーズ、TPM606、40XT、nXTシリーズなどが好ましく挙げられ、JSR社製の各フォトレジストなども、高解像度タイプから、低解像度タイプまで広く用いることが可能である。
 ドライフィルムレジストとしては、日立化成工業製、プリント配線板用感光性フィルム、旭化成イーマテリアルズ製感光性ドライフィルムSUNFORTシリーズ、デュポンMRCドライフィルム製FXGシリーズ、FXRシリーズ、FX900シリーズ、JSF100シリーズ、SA100シリーズ、LDIシリーズ、FRAシリーズ、CMシリーズ、富士フイルム製トランサー各シリーズ等が挙げられ、これらを適宜使用することができる。
 これらレジスト層形成材料は、導電膜において形成されるパターンの解像度などに応じて、適宜、選択すればよい。
 レジスト層の形成において、ドライフィルム型のレジスト層形成材料を用いる場合、予め作製されたドライフィルムレジストの感光性レジスト層を、形成された導電膜の表面に転写すればよい。
The type of the resist layer forming material used in the method (1) is not particularly limited, and any of a negative type, a positive type and a dry film type can be used.
For forming the resist layer, a commercially available alkali-soluble photoresist can be appropriately selected and used. For example, Fujifilm Color Mosaic Series, FILS Series, FIOS Series, FMES Series, FTENS Series, FIES Series, Positive Type for Semiconductor Processes, Negative Photoresist Series, Fuji Chemical Fujiresist Series, Above all, FR Series, FPPR Series, FMR series, FDER series, etc. can be used preferably. Also, AZ Electronic Materials photoresist series, among them, RFP series, TFP series, SZP series, HKT series, SFP, series, SR series, SOP series, SZC series, CTP series, ANR series, P4000 series, TPM606, 40XT, nXT series, etc. are preferably mentioned. Well as strike, from a high resolution type, it can be used widely to low resolution type.
As dry film resists, Hitachi Chemical, photosensitive film for printed wiring boards, Asahi Kasei E-materials photosensitive dry film SUNFORT series, DuPont MRC dry film FXG series, FXR series, FX900 series, JSF100 series, SA100 series , LDI series, FRA series, CM series, FUJIFILM Transer series, etc., which can be used as appropriate.
These resist layer forming materials may be appropriately selected according to the resolution of the pattern formed in the conductive film.
In the formation of the resist layer, when a dry film type resist layer forming material is used, a photosensitive resist layer of a dry film resist prepared in advance may be transferred to the surface of the formed conductive film.
 露光工程は、光重合開始剤を含むエッチングマスク材を用いて酸素濃度が5%以下で露光を行う。 In the exposure step, exposure is performed at an oxygen concentration of 5% or less using an etching mask material containing a photopolymerization initiator.
 また、導電膜は、転写材料を利用して、転写により、目的とする基板上にパターニング形成してもよい。
 また、特開2011-167848号公報の[0147]~[0148]に記載されているように、導電膜上に除去剤(エッチング液)をスクリーン印刷でパターン塗布することにより、導電膜のパターニングも可能である。
Further, the conductive film may be patterned on the target substrate by transfer using a transfer material.
Further, as described in JP 2011-167848 A, [0147] to [0148], a conductive film can be patterned by applying a remover (etching solution) on the conductive film by screen printing. Is possible.
[透明両面粘着シート]
 透明両面粘着シートは、透明であり、表面および裏面が粘着性を示すシートである。該シートは、一方の粘着性を示す面が上記導電膜に貼り付けられるように、導電膜上に積層する。言い換えると、透明両面粘着シートは、透明基板とその上に配置される導電膜とを有する導電膜付き透明基板の導電膜側に貼り付けられる。
 より具体的には、図4中、透明両面粘着シート306の表面306cおよび裏面306dが粘着性を示し、表面306cが導電膜304に貼り付けられるように透明両面粘着シート306が導電膜304上に配置される。
[Transparent double-sided adhesive sheet]
The transparent double-sided PSA sheet is a sheet that is transparent and has adhesiveness on the front and back surfaces. The sheet is laminated on the conductive film so that one of the adhesive surfaces is attached to the conductive film. In other words, the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is attached to the conductive film side of a transparent substrate with a conductive film having a transparent substrate and a conductive film disposed thereon.
More specifically, in FIG. 4, the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 is placed on the conductive film 304 so that the front surface 306 c and the back surface 306 d of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 exhibit adhesiveness, Be placed.
 透明両面粘着シートは粘着剤層を少なくとも有していればよく、基材の両面に粘着剤層が配置された基材を有するタイプ(基材付き透明両面粘着シート)であってもよいし、粘着剤層のみからなり基材を有しないタイプ(基材レス透明両面粘着シート)であってもよい。なかでも、透明両面粘着シートを用いた製品の薄膜化の観点からは、基材レス透明両面粘着シートが好ましい。 The transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet only needs to have at least a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and may be a type having a base material in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is disposed on both sides of the base material (transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material) It may be of a type consisting only of an adhesive layer and having no substrate (baseless transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet). Of these, a substrate-less transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is preferable from the viewpoint of thinning a product using the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet.
 透明両面粘着シートには、上述した還元性化合物が含まれる。含有される還元性化合物の好適態様は、上述の通りである。
 なお、透明両面粘着シートが基材付き透明両面粘着シートの場合、還元性化合物は基材中、または、粘着剤層中のどちらに含有されていてもよく、基材と粘着剤層の両方に含まれていてもよい。
 また、上述した還元性化合物が両面粘着シートの粘着剤層に含まれる場合、粘着剤中における還元性化合物の分散性がより優れることから、高温高湿環境下に導電膜積層体が放置された場合であっても、粘着剤層の粘着力の低下が見られない。
The transparent double-sided PSA sheet contains the reducing compound described above. The preferred embodiment of the reducing compound contained is as described above.
When the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate, the reducing compound may be contained in either the substrate or the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. It may be included.
In addition, when the reducing compound described above is included in the adhesive layer of the double-sided PSA sheet, the conductive film laminate was left in a high-temperature and high-humidity environment because the dispersibility of the reducing compound in the adhesive is more excellent. Even if it is a case, the fall of the adhesive force of an adhesive layer is not seen.
 透明両面粘着シート中における還元性化合物の含有量は特に制限されないが、還元性化合物の総質量Aと透明樹脂の総質量Cとの質量比(A/C)は、還元性化合物の透明樹脂内部での析出がより抑制されシートの透明性がより優れると共に、シート表面近傍での還元性化合物の析出がより抑制され、シートと被着体との密着性がより向上し、電気信頼性がより向上する点から、0.20以下が好ましく、0.10以下がより好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、薄い透明両面粘着シートでも所定も効果が得られる点で、0.0001以上が好ましく、0.0005以上が好ましい。
 なお、総質量Aは2種以上の還元性化合物が含まれる場合、それらの合計質量を表す。総質量Cは、2種以上の透明樹脂が含まれる場合、それらの合計質量を表す。
The content of the reducing compound in the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, but the mass ratio (A / C) of the total mass A of the reducing compound and the total mass C of the transparent resin is the inside of the transparent resin of the reducing compound. In addition, the precipitation of the sheet is further suppressed and the transparency of the sheet is more excellent, the precipitation of the reducing compound in the vicinity of the sheet surface is further suppressed, the adhesion between the sheet and the adherend is further improved, and the electrical reliability is further improved. From the point of improvement, 0.20 or less is preferable, and 0.10 or less is more preferable. Although a minimum in particular is not restrict | limited, 0.0001 or more are preferable and 0.0005 or more are preferable at the point from which a predetermined | prescribed effect is acquired even with a thin transparent double-sided adhesive sheet.
In addition, total mass A represents those total mass, when two or more types of reducing compounds are contained. When two or more kinds of transparent resins are included, the total mass C represents the total mass thereof.
 透明両面粘着シートの厚みは特に制限されず、導電膜積層体のタッチパネルへの応用の点から、5~150μmが好ましく、20~100μmがより好ましい。
 透明両面粘着シートの厚みを20μm以上とすることで貼り付ける基板の段差や凹凸をカバーできるという効果が得られ、100μm以下とすることで透明両面粘着シートの透過率を充分に確保できるという効果が得られる。
The thickness of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 150 μm and more preferably 20 to 100 μm from the viewpoint of application of the conductive film laminate to a touch panel.
By making the thickness of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 20 μm or more, it is possible to cover the steps and irregularities of the substrate to be attached, and by making the thickness 100 μm or less, it is possible to sufficiently secure the transmittance of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet. can get.
 透明両面粘着シートが基材付き透明両面粘着シートである場合、粘着剤層は基材の両面に設けられる。使用される基材の種類は特に制限されないが、透明基材を使用することが好ましい。透明基材としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリブチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリエチレンナフタレートフィルム、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、セロファン、ジアセチルセルロースフィルム、トリアセチルセルロースフィルム、アセチルセルロースブチレートフィルム、ポリ塩化ビニルフィルム、ポリ塩化ビニリデンフィルム、ポリビニルアルコールフィルム、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体フィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム、ポリメチルペンテンフィルム、ポリスルホンフィルム、ポリエーテルエーテルケトンフィルム、ポリエーテルスルホンフィルム、ポリエーテルイミドフィルム、ポリイミドフィルム、フッソ樹脂フィルム、ナイロンフィルム、アクリル樹脂フィルム等を挙げることができる。 When the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is a transparent double-sided PSA sheet with a substrate, the adhesive layer is provided on both sides of the substrate. The type of substrate used is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to use a transparent substrate. As the transparent substrate, for example, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polyethylene film, polypropylene film, cellophane, diacetyl cellulose film, triacetyl cellulose film, acetyl cellulose butyrate film, polyvinyl chloride film, Polyvinylidene chloride film, polyvinyl alcohol film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polymethylpentene film, polysulfone film, polyetheretherketone film, polyethersulfone film, polyetherimide film, polyimide film , Fluorine resin film, nylon film, acrylic It can be exemplified a resin film or the like.
 透明両面粘着シートの粘着剤層の材料は特に限定されず、公知の材料を使用することができる。例えば、ゴム系粘着剤、アクリル系粘着剤、シリコーン系粘着剤、ウレタン系粘着剤などの各種の透明樹脂粘着剤を使用できるが、透明性がより優れると共に上記還元性化合物との相溶性がより優れる点で、アクリル系粘着剤が好ましい。 The material of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, and known materials can be used. For example, various transparent resin pressure sensitive adhesives such as rubber pressure sensitive adhesive, acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive, silicone pressure sensitive adhesive, urethane pressure sensitive adhesive, etc. can be used, but the transparency is more excellent and the compatibility with the reducing compound is more. An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive is preferred from the viewpoint of superiority.
 アクリル系粘着剤は、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートのモノマーユニットを主骨格とするアクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとする。なお、(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレートおよび/またはメタクリレートをいう。アクリル系ポリマーの主骨格を構成する、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートのアルキル基の平均炭素数は1~12程度が好ましく、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの具体例としては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等を例示できる。 The acrylic adhesive is based on an acrylic polymer having a main skeleton of an alkyl (meth) acrylate monomer unit. (Meth) acrylate refers to acrylate and / or methacrylate. The average carbon number of the alkyl group of the alkyl (meth) acrylate constituting the main skeleton of the acrylic polymer is preferably about 1 to 12, and specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) ) Acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
 また、透明両面粘着シートは、60℃、90%RH条件下に100時間静置直後の全光線透過率が80%以上(より好ましくは85%以上、さらに好ましくは90%以上)、ヘイズが1.0%以下(より好ましくは0.7%以下)であることが好ましい。
 また、透明両面粘着シートの吸水率は、60℃、90%RH条件下に100時間静値後において、2.0%以下(より好ましくは1.25%以下、さらに好ましくは1.0%以下)であることが好ましい。
 吸水率の測定方法は、特開2012-11637号公報記載の方法に準じる。
The transparent double-sided PSA sheet has a total light transmittance of 80% or more (more preferably 85% or more, more preferably 90% or more) immediately after standing at 60 ° C. and 90% RH for 100 hours, and a haze of 1 It is preferably 0.0% or less (more preferably 0.7% or less).
The water absorption of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet is 2.0% or less (more preferably 1.25% or less, more preferably 1.0% or less) after 100 hours of static value at 60 ° C. and 90% RH. ) Is preferable.
The method for measuring the water absorption rate is in accordance with the method described in JP2012-11637A.
 上記透明両面粘着シートは、公知の方法によって製造することができる。例えば、基材レス透明両面粘着シートの場合には、セパレータ(剥離ライナー)上に還元性化合物を含む粘着剤組成物を、乾燥後の厚さが所定の厚さとなるように塗布して粘着剤組成物の塗布層を設けた後、該塗布層を乾燥、必要に応じて硬化して、粘着剤層を形成することにより、透明両面粘着シートを作製しうる。
 また、基材付き透明両面粘着シートの場合には、還元性化合物を含む粘着剤組成物を、基材表面に直接塗布、乾燥することにより粘着剤層を設けてもよいし(直写法)、上記と同様にセパレータ上に還元性化合物を含む粘着剤層を形成した後、基材と転写する(貼り合わせる)ことにより基材上に粘着剤層を設けてもよい(転写法)。
 また、他の製造方法としては、例えば、還元性化合物を含む基材表面に、粘着剤組成物を塗布して粘着剤層を設け、基材付き透明両面粘着シートを製造する方法も挙げられる。
The said transparent double-sided adhesive sheet can be manufactured by a well-known method. For example, in the case of a substrate-less transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a reducing compound on a separator (release liner) is applied so that the thickness after drying becomes a predetermined thickness. After providing the coating layer of the composition, the coating layer is dried and cured as necessary to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, whereby a transparent double-sided PSA sheet can be produced.
In the case of a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate, a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing a reducing compound may be directly applied to the substrate surface and dried to provide a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (direct copying method). In the same manner as described above, after forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing a reducing compound on the separator, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided on the substrate by transferring (bonding) to the substrate (transfer method).
Moreover, as another manufacturing method, the method of apply | coating an adhesive composition to the base-material surface containing a reducing compound, providing an adhesive layer, and manufacturing a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet with a base material is also mentioned, for example.
 なお、図4においては、透明基板302の一方の表面上に導電膜304および透明両面粘着シート306が設けられているが、該態様には限定されない。
 例えば、図5に示す導電膜積層体400のように、透明基板302の両面上に導電膜304a、304bおよび透明両面粘着シート306a、306bが設けられていてもよい。また、導電膜304aと304bのように、両者のパターン形状は異なっていてもよい。なお、導電膜304aと304bとは共に細線状であり、両者は直交するように配置される。
In FIG. 4, the conductive film 304 and the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 306 are provided on one surface of the transparent substrate 302, but the embodiment is not limited thereto.
For example, conductive films 304a and 304b and transparent double-sided pressure- sensitive adhesive sheets 306a and 306b may be provided on both surfaces of the transparent substrate 302 as in a conductive film laminate 400 shown in FIG. Further, like the conductive films 304a and 304b, the pattern shapes of both may be different. Note that the conductive films 304a and 304b are both thin lines, and are disposed so as to be orthogonal to each other.
<導電膜積層体>
 本発明の第1態様の導電膜積層体は、上記のように、透明基板と、透明基板上に配置された銀を含む導電膜と、導電膜上に貼り合わされた透明両面粘着シートとを備える。
 なお、必要に応じて、上記透明両面粘着シートの露出した粘着性を示す表面上にさらに別の部材(例えば、後述する保護基板)を貼り合せてもよい。
<Conductive film laminate>
As described above, the conductive film laminate according to the first aspect of the present invention includes a transparent substrate, a conductive film containing silver disposed on the transparent substrate, and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet bonded to the conductive film. .
If necessary, another member (for example, a protective substrate described later) may be bonded to the exposed surface of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet.
 導電膜積層体は、導電膜間のイオンマイグレーションをより抑制できる点から、例えば、タッチパネル、ディスプレイ用電極、電磁波シールド、有機または無機ELディスプレイ用電極、電子パーパー、フレキシブルディスプレイ用電極、集積型太陽電池、表示素子、その他の各種デバイスなどに幅広く適用される。これらの中でも、タッチパネルのリード配線部が特に好ましい。以下に、タッチパネルのリード配線部の態様について詳述する。 From the point which can suppress the ion migration between electrically conductive films more, a conductive film laminated body is a touch panel, a display electrode, an electromagnetic wave shield, an organic or inorganic EL display electrode, an electronic paper, a flexible display electrode, an integrated solar cell, for example. It is widely applied to display devices and other various devices. Among these, the lead wiring part of the touch panel is particularly preferable. Below, the aspect of the lead wiring part of a touchscreen is explained in full detail.
[好適態様]
 上述した導電膜積層体をタッチパネルに使用した場合、導電膜間でのイオンマイグレーションがより抑制されることから過酷な環境下に長期間に渡って放置された後であってもその性能が維持される。
 近年、タッチパネルの小型の情報端末機器への適用がすすみ、広い入力エリアを確保するため、額縁部分の幅を狭くすること(狭額縁化)が求められている。通常、タッチパネルの額縁部分にはリード配線(周辺配線)が配置されており、挟額縁化を達成するためには、リード配線の幅およびリード配線間の距離をより狭小化する必要がある。一方、このような狭小化を実施すると、リード配線の断線や、リード配線間の短絡が進行しやすくなる。
 それに対して、上記導電膜積層体をリード配線部に適用した場合(つまり、導電膜積層体の導電膜をリード配線として適用した場合)、還元性化合物を含む透明両面粘着シートの機能によって、リード配線(金属配線)の断線や、リード配線間の短絡がより抑制される。
[Preferred embodiment]
When the conductive film laminate described above is used for a touch panel, ion migration between the conductive films is further suppressed, so that the performance is maintained even after being left for a long time in a harsh environment. The
In recent years, the application of touch panels to small information terminal devices has progressed, and in order to secure a wide input area, it is required to narrow the width of the frame portion (narrow frame). Normally, lead wires (peripheral wires) are arranged in the frame portion of the touch panel, and in order to achieve a framed frame, it is necessary to further reduce the width of the lead wires and the distance between the lead wires. On the other hand, when such narrowing is performed, the disconnection of the lead wiring and the short circuit between the lead wirings are likely to proceed.
On the other hand, when the conductive film laminate is applied to the lead wiring portion (that is, when the conductive film of the conductive film laminate is applied as the lead wiring), the function of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing the reducing compound leads to the lead. Disconnection of wiring (metal wiring) and short circuit between lead wirings are further suppressed.
 以下、図面を参照して、より詳細に説明する。
 図6(A)は、タッチパネル部材の一部平面概略図であり、図6(B)はA-A線での模式的断面図である。図6(A)に示す、タッチパネル部材500は、タッチパネル用導電膜積層体600と、タッチパネル用導電膜積層体600の所定の位置に接合されるフレキシブル回路30とを備えて構成される。
 タッチパネル用導電膜積層体600には、透明基板32の一方の面側に透明電極層34(例えば、ITO層、銀含有層)と、透明両面粘着シート42とが設けられている。なお、透明電極層34は、透明基板32上に整列する複数のダイヤ形状を一方方向に直線状に連結するパターンで形成されている。透明電極層34には、電気的に接続される複数のリード配線36が設けられている。リード配線36の末端には、図示しない導電体が設けられており、フレキシブル回路30中の図示しない端子と電気的に接続している。
 透明基板32には、透明電極層34が設けられている領域においてタッチパネル使用者が視認可能で、タッチ位置を検出することができる感知部(センサ部)として機能するアクティブエリア38が構成されており、一方、その外側は、非アクティブエリア40となっている。タッチパネルの額縁部分は、非アクティブエリア40に該当する。通常、非アクティブエリア40には、上記のようにリード配線36やフレキシブル回路30が存在する。このリード配線36上に、リード配線36を覆うように透明両面粘着シート42を配置することにより、リード配線36の断線およびリード配線36間の短絡をより抑制することができる。
Hereinafter, it will be described in more detail with reference to the drawings.
6A is a schematic plan view of a part of the touch panel member, and FIG. 6B is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line AA. A touch panel member 500 illustrated in FIG. 6A includes a touch panel conductive film stack 600 and a flexible circuit 30 that is bonded to a predetermined position of the touch panel conductive film stack 600.
The conductive film laminate 600 for a touch panel is provided with a transparent electrode layer 34 (for example, an ITO layer or a silver-containing layer) and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 42 on one surface side of the transparent substrate 32. The transparent electrode layer 34 is formed in a pattern in which a plurality of diamond shapes aligned on the transparent substrate 32 are linearly connected in one direction. The transparent electrode layer 34 is provided with a plurality of lead wires 36 that are electrically connected. A conductor (not shown) is provided at the end of the lead wiring 36 and is electrically connected to a terminal (not shown) in the flexible circuit 30.
The transparent substrate 32 includes an active area 38 that functions as a sensing unit (sensor unit) that can be visually recognized by a touch panel user and can detect a touch position in an area where the transparent electrode layer 34 is provided. On the other hand, the outside is an inactive area 40. The frame portion of the touch panel corresponds to the inactive area 40. Normally, the lead wiring 36 and the flexible circuit 30 exist in the inactive area 40 as described above. By disposing the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet 42 on the lead wiring 36 so as to cover the lead wiring 36, disconnection of the lead wiring 36 and short-circuiting between the lead wirings 36 can be further suppressed.
 つまり、導電膜積層体の好適態様の一つは、透明基板と、透明基板上に配置され、センサとして機能する電極パターン部と、透明基板上で電極パターン部の電極と一端が接続し、他端が外部の制御回路に接続される端子と接続する、銀を含有するリード配線からなる端子配線部と、少なくともリード配線上に配置された上記透明両面粘着シートとを有するタッチパネル用導電膜積層体が挙げられる。なお、リード配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量が50μg/mm2以下であり、透明両面粘着シートには、上述した透明樹脂、および、還元性化合物が含まれる。 In other words, one of the preferred embodiments of the conductive film laminate is a transparent substrate, an electrode pattern portion that is disposed on the transparent substrate and functions as a sensor, the electrode of the electrode pattern portion is connected to one end on the transparent substrate, and the other A conductive film laminate for a touch panel having a terminal wiring portion made of a lead wiring containing silver and having an end connected to a terminal connected to an external control circuit, and at least the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet disposed on the lead wiring Is mentioned. The amount of silver contained per unit area of the lead wiring is 50 μg / mm 2 or less, and the transparent double-sided PSA sheet contains the above-described transparent resin and reducing compound.
<<第2態様>>
 以下に、本発明の第2態様の配線基板および透明粘着シートの好適態様について説明する。
 まず、本発明の第2態様の従来技術と比較した特徴点について詳述する。
 上述したように、本発明の第2態様においては、所定の酸化還元電位を有する化合物を含み、所定の環境試験でヘイズの経時変化が一定範囲内である透明粘着層を使用することにより、所望の効果が得られることを見出している。酸化還元電位が所定の範囲内にある化合物を使用することにより、透明粘着層中の銀イオンを金属銀に還元することができ、結果としてイオンマイグレーションの発生を抑制することができる。そして、後述する環境試験で所定の特性を示す透明粘着層は、水分と比較的相互作用しやすく、その結果白化が抑制されると共に、化合物の分散性にも優れる。結果として、従来トレード・オフの関係にあったイオンマイグレーション抑制能と耐白化性をより高いレベルで達成することができる。
 特に、化合物がフェノール化合物の場合、化合物中の水酸基部分が透明粘着層を構成する材料(粘着剤)と相互作用しやすくなり、透明粘着層中での分散性がより優れる。結果として、イオンマイグレーション抑制能と耐白化性をより高いレベルで達成することができる。
<< Second Aspect >>
Below, the suitable aspect of the wiring board and transparent adhesive sheet of the 2nd aspect of this invention is demonstrated.
First, the feature point compared with the prior art of the 2nd aspect of this invention is explained in full detail.
As described above, in the second aspect of the present invention, the use of a transparent adhesive layer containing a compound having a predetermined oxidation-reduction potential and having a time-dependent change in haze within a predetermined range in a predetermined environmental test is desired. It has been found that the effect can be obtained. By using a compound having an oxidation-reduction potential within a predetermined range, silver ions in the transparent adhesive layer can be reduced to metallic silver, and as a result, the occurrence of ion migration can be suppressed. And the transparent adhesive layer which shows a predetermined characteristic by the environmental test mentioned later is easy to interact with a water | moisture content comparatively, and as a result, whitening is suppressed and it is excellent also in the dispersibility of a compound. As a result, it is possible to achieve ion migration suppression ability and whitening resistance, which have conventionally been in a trade-off relationship, at a higher level.
In particular, when the compound is a phenol compound, the hydroxyl group in the compound easily interacts with the material (adhesive) constituting the transparent adhesive layer, and the dispersibility in the transparent adhesive layer is more excellent. As a result, ion migration suppression ability and whitening resistance can be achieved at a higher level.
 まず、本発明の第2態様の透明粘着シートの好適態様について詳述する。
 透明粘着シートには、酸化還元電位が0.40~1.30Vの化合物、および、粘着剤が含有される透明粘着層が少なくとも含まれる。
 以下では、まず、透明粘着層に含まれる各成分について詳述する。
First, the suitable aspect of the transparent adhesive sheet of the 2nd aspect of this invention is explained in full detail.
The transparent adhesive sheet includes at least a compound having an oxidation-reduction potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V and a transparent adhesive layer containing the adhesive.
Below, each component contained in a transparent adhesion layer is explained in full detail first.
(酸化還元電位が0.40~1.30Vの化合物)
 透明粘着シートの透明粘着層には、酸化還元電位が0.40~1.30Vの化合物(以後、適宜還元性化合物とも称する)が含まれる。この還元性化合物はいわゆるマイグレーション抑止剤(マイグレーション防止剤)であり、この還元性化合物が透明粘着層に含まれることにより、透明粘着層中の銀イオンを金属銀に還元することにより、イオンマイグレーションを抑制する。
 還元性化合物の酸化還元電位は0.40~1.30Vであり、なかでもイオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、0.50~1.20Vが好ましく、0.55~1.1Vがより好ましく、0.55~1.0Vがさらに好ましい。
 還元性化合物の酸化還元電位が0.40V未満または1.30V超の場合、イオンマイグレーション抑制能に劣る。
 なお、本発明の第2態様に用いられる還元性化合物の酸化還元電位の測定方法は、多くの文献に記載された方法で測定することができるが、本発明においては以下の方法で測定した値を酸化還元電位と定義する。
 還元性化合物1mM、支持電解質として過塩素酸テトラブチルアンモニウム0.1MのDMF溶液に5分間Arバブリングを行った後、ポテンショスタット(ビー・エー・エス株式会社 ALS-604A)にて、サイクリックボルタンメトリー測定を行う。作用極:Glassy Carbon、対極:Pt、参照電極:飽和カロメル電極を用いたときの酸化還元電位を測定する。
(Compounds with a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V)
The transparent adhesive layer of the transparent adhesive sheet contains a compound having a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V (hereinafter also referred to as a reducing compound as appropriate). This reducing compound is a so-called migration inhibitor (migration inhibitor), and when this reducing compound is contained in the transparent adhesive layer, the silver ions in the transparent adhesive layer are reduced to metallic silver, thereby causing ion migration. Suppress.
The redox potential of the reducing compound is 0.40 to 1.30 V, and in particular, 0.50 to 1.20 V is preferable, and 0.55 to 1.1 V is more preferable in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent. 0.55 to 1.0 V is more preferable.
When the redox potential of the reducing compound is less than 0.40 V or more than 1.30 V, the ion migration suppressing ability is poor.
In addition, although the measuring method of the oxidation-reduction potential of the reducing compound used in the second aspect of the present invention can be measured by methods described in many literatures, in the present invention, the value measured by the following method Is defined as a redox potential.
After bubbling Ar for 5 minutes in a DMF solution containing 1 mM of reducing compound and tetrabutylammonium perchlorate as a supporting electrolyte, cyclic voltammetry was performed with a potentiostat (ALS-604A). Measure. Working electrode: Glassy Carbon, counter electrode: Pt, reference electrode: redox potential when using saturated calomel electrode is measured.
 還元性化合物の種類は上記酸化還元電位を満たしていれば特に制限されず、例えば、フェノール化合物、アミン系化合物、硫黄系化合物、リン系化合物などが挙げられる。本発明の第2態様における還元性化合物は、酸化還元電位が規定の範囲であれば銀が酸化される代わりに酸化されるため、目的の効果が得られる。
 なかでも、透明粘着層中での分散性に優れ、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、フェノール化合物が好ましい。より詳細には、粘着層は比較的親水性の性質を示すため、粘着層を構成する粘着剤との間でフェノール化合物中の水酸基が相互作用を形成しやすく、粘着剤中でのフェノール化合物の分散性が優れ、結果としてイオンマイグレーション抑制能が向上する。
The type of the reducing compound is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the oxidation-reduction potential, and examples thereof include phenol compounds, amine compounds, sulfur compounds, and phosphorus compounds. Since the reducing compound in the second aspect of the present invention is oxidized instead of being oxidized if the oxidation-reduction potential is within a specified range, the intended effect can be obtained.
Especially, a phenol compound is preferable at the point which is excellent in the dispersibility in a transparent adhesion layer, and is more excellent in ion migration suppression ability. More specifically, since the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exhibits a relatively hydrophilic property, the hydroxyl group in the phenol compound tends to form an interaction with the pressure-sensitive adhesive constituting the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Dispersibility is excellent, and as a result, ion migration suppression ability is improved.
 フェノール化合物の種類としては、上記酸化還元電位を満たしてれば特に制限されず、例えば、DL-α-トコフェロールなどが挙げられる。 The type of phenol compound is not particularly limited as long as the above redox potential is satisfied, and examples thereof include DL-α-tocopherol.
(好適態様)
 フェノール化合物の好適態様としては、以下の式(1A)~式(3A)で表される化合物が挙げられる。該化合物であれば、粘着剤との相溶性により優れ、イオンマイグレーション抑制能により優れる。
(Preferred embodiment)
Preferable embodiments of the phenol compound include compounds represented by the following formulas (1A) to (3A). If it is this compound, it is excellent in compatibility with an adhesive and it is excellent in ion migration suppression ability.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 R11a~R15aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 炭化水素基の好適例としては、例えば、-O-R31aが挙げられる。R31aは、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。-O-R31aが複数ある場合は、それらは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 炭化水素基の炭素数としては、粘着剤との相溶性により優れる点で、1~12が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。
 炭化水素基としては、より具体的には、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 また、R11a~R15aの各基の分子量の合計は21以上である。なかでも、35以上が好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、1000以下が好ましく、500以下がより好ましく、300以下がさらに好ましい。上記各基の分子量の合計とは、R11a~R15aそれぞれの基の分子量を計算し、それらを合計した値を意図する。
 また、R11a~R15aは、任意の2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。例えば、R11aとR12a、R12aとR13a、R13aとR14a、または、R14aとR15aなどのように隣接する2つの基が、各々結合して環を形成してもよい。形成される環の種類は特に制限されないが、例えば、5~6員環構造を挙げることができる。
R 11a to R 15a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
Preferable examples of the hydrocarbon group include —O—R 31a . R 31a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. When there are a plurality of —O—R 31a , they may be the same or different.
The number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 12 and more preferably 1 to 10 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
More specifically, examples of the hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and a group obtained by combining these. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The total molecular weight of each group of R 11a to R 15a is 21 or more. Especially, 35 or more are preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. The sum of the molecular weights of the above groups is intended to be a value obtained by calculating the molecular weights of the respective groups of R 11a to R 15a and summing them.
Further, any two of R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. For example, two adjacent groups such as R 11a and R 12a , R 12a and R 13a , R 13a and R 14a , or R 14a and R 15a may be bonded to form a ring. The type of ring formed is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a 5- to 6-membered ring structure.
 炭化水素基中に含まれるヘテロ原子の種類は特に制限されないが、ハロゲン原子、酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子、セレン原子、テルル原子などが挙げられる。なかでも、銀のイオンマイグレーション抑制能が優れる点で、-Y1-、-N(Ra)-、-C(=Y2)-、-CON(Rb)-、-C(=Y3)Y4-、-SOt-、-SO2N(Rc)-、ハロゲン原子、またはこれらを組み合わせた基の態様で含まれることが好ましい。
 Y1~Y4は、各々独立に、酸素原子、硫黄原子、セレン原子、およびテルル原子からなる群から選択される。なかでも、取り扱いがより簡便である点から、酸素原子、硫黄原子が好ましい。tは、1~3の整数を表す。
The kind of the hetero atom contained in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, —Y 1 —, —N (R a ) —, —C (═Y 2 ) —, —CON (R b ) —, —C (= Y 3) ) Y 4 —, —SO t —, —SO 2 N (R c ) —, a halogen atom, or a combination of these is preferable.
Y 1 to Y 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom. Of these, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferred because they are easier to handle. t represents an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(1A)中、R11aおよびR15aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、または、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表すことが好ましい。炭化水素基の炭素数としては、粘着剤との相溶性により優れる点で、1~8が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭化水素基としては、より具体的には、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基としては、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、環状のいずれであってもよい。
 また、炭化水素基には、酸素原子が含まれていてもよい。酸素原子が含まれる場合は、例えば、-O-、-COO-などの連結基の形で含まれていてもよい。
 R12aおよびR14aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、または、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~10の炭化水素基を表すことが好ましい。炭化水素基の炭素数としては、粘着剤との相溶性により優れる点で、2~9が好ましく、3~8がより好ましい。
 R13aは、水酸基、または、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基(例えば、-O-Ra)を表すことが好ましい。Raは、炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。R13aおよびRaで表される炭化水素基の炭素数は、粘着剤との相溶性により優れる点で、1~18が好ましく、1~15がより好ましい。
 R11a~R15aは、それぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。つまり、R11a~R15aのうち任意の2つは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。例えば、R11aとR12a、R12aとR13a、R13aとR14a、または、R14aとR15aなどのように隣接する2つの基が、それぞれ結合して環を形成してもよい。
 形成される環の種類は特に制限されないが、例えば、5~6員環構造を挙げることができる。
In formula (1A), R 11a and R 15a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom. The number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 8 and more preferably 1 to 4 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
More specifically, the hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, or these The group which combined these is mentioned. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The hydrocarbon group may contain an oxygen atom. When an oxygen atom is contained, it may be contained in the form of a linking group such as —O— or —COO—.
R 12a and R 14a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom. The number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group is preferably 2 to 9 and more preferably 3 to 8 in view of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
R 13a preferably represents a hydroxyl group or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom (for example, —O—R a ). R a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 13a and R a is preferably 1 to 18 and more preferably 1 to 15 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. That is, any two of R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. For example, two adjacent groups such as R 11a and R 12a , R 12a and R 13a , R 13a and R 14a , or R 14a and R 15a may be bonded to form a ring.
The type of ring formed is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a 5- to 6-membered ring structure.
 式(2A)中、R16a~R23aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 R16a~R23aで表される炭化水素基の好適範囲は、上述したR11a~R15aで表される炭化水素基の好適範囲と同義である。
 また、R16a~R23aの各基の分子量の合計は24以上である。なかでも、35以上が好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、1000以下が好ましく、500以下がより好ましく、300以下がさらに好ましい。また、R16a~R23aは、任意の2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 R24aは、水素原子またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
In the formula (2A), R 16a to R 23a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
The preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 16a to R 23a is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 11a to R 15a described above.
The total molecular weight of each group of R 16a to R 23a is 24 or more. Especially, 35 or more are preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent. Also, any two of R 16a to R 23a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
R 24a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
 式(2A)中、R16a、R23aおよびR24aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、または、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表すことが好ましい。R16a、R23aおよびR24aで表される酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭化水素基の好適範囲は、上述したR11aおよびR15aで表される酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭化水素基の好適範囲と同義である。
 R17a、R19a、20aおよびR22aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、または、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~10の炭化水素基を表すことが好ましい。R17a、R19a、20aおよびR22aで表される酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭化水素基の好適範囲は、上述したR12aおよびR14aで表される酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭化水素基の好適範囲と同義である。
 R18aおよびR21aは、それぞれ独立に、水酸基、または、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基(例えば、-O-Ra)を表す。Raは、炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。R18aおよびR21aで表される炭化水素基の好適範囲は、上述したR13aおよびRaで表される炭化水素基の好適範囲と同義である。
In the formula (2A), R 16a , R 23a and R 24a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom. The preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 16a , R 23a and R 24a is the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 11a and R 15a described above. It is synonymous with the suitable range of.
R 17a , R 19a, R 20a and R 22a each independently preferably represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom. The preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing the oxygen atom represented by R 17a , R 19a, R 20a and R 22a may contain the oxygen atom represented by R 12a and R 14a described above. It is synonymous with the suitable range of a hydrocarbon group.
R 18a and R 21a each independently represent a hydroxyl group or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom (for example, —O—R a ). R a represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 18a and R 21a is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 13a and R a described above.
 式(3A)中、R25a~R28aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
 R25a~R28aで表される炭化水素基の好適範囲は、上述したR11a~R15aで表される炭化水素基の好適範囲と同義である。
 また、R25a~R28aの各基の分子量の合計は40以上である。なかでも、50以上が好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、1000以下が好ましく、500以下がより好ましく、300以下がさらに好ましい。
 また、R25a~R28aは、任意の2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Lは、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい2価若しくは3価の炭化水素基、-S-、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。2価の炭化水素基の炭素数は、絶縁樹脂との相溶性により優れる点で、1~12が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。
 mは、2または3の整数を表す。
In formula (3A), R 25a to R 28a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may contain a hetero atom.
The preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 25a to R 28a is synonymous with the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 11a to R 15a described above.
The total molecular weight of each group of R 25a to R 28a is 40 or more. Especially, 50 or more are preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1000 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and even more preferably 300 or less, from the viewpoint that the effects of the present invention are more excellent.
Further, any two of R 25a to R 28a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
L represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these. The number of carbon atoms of the divalent hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 12 and more preferably 1 to 10 in terms of excellent compatibility with the insulating resin.
m represents an integer of 2 or 3.
 式(3A)中、R25a~R28aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、または、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表すことが好ましい。R25a~R28aで表される酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭化水素基の好適範囲は、上述したR11aおよびR15aで表される酸素原子を含んでいてもよい炭化水素基の好適範囲と同義である。
 Lは、酸素原子を有していてもよい2価若しくは3価の炭化水素基、-S-、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表すことが好ましい。炭化水素基に含まれる炭素原子の数は特に制限されないが、1~40が好ましく、2~20がより好ましい。炭化水素基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状、または芳香族含む形態のいずれであってもよく、脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。なお、酸素原子は、例えば、-O-、-COO-などの連結基の形で上記炭化水素基に含まれていてもよい。
In the formula (3A), R 25a to R 28a each independently preferably represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain an oxygen atom. The preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 25a to R 28a is the preferred range of the hydrocarbon group optionally containing oxygen atoms represented by R 11a and R 15a described above. It is synonymous with.
L preferably represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group optionally having an oxygen atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these. The number of carbon atoms contained in the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 40, and more preferably 2 to 20. The hydrocarbon group may be any of linear, branched, cyclic, or aromatic forms, and examples thereof include an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The oxygen atom may be contained in the hydrocarbon group in the form of a linking group such as —O— or —COO—.
 式(1A)中のR13a、式(2A)中のR18aおよびR21aの好適態様として、式(4)で表される基が挙げられる
 式(4A)  *-CH2-R32a
 R32aは、水素原子または炭素数1~19の炭化水素基を表す。R32aで表される炭化水素基の炭素数は、粘着剤との相溶性により優れる点で、1~15が好ましく、1~12がより好ましい。*は結合位置を表す。
A preferred embodiment of R 13a in formula (1A) and R 18a and R 21a in formula (2A) includes a group represented by formula (4) Formula (4A) * —CH 2 —R 32a
R 32a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 19 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon group represented by R 32a is preferably 1 to 15 and more preferably 1 to 12 in terms of excellent compatibility with the pressure-sensitive adhesive. * Represents a bonding position.
 還元性化合物のなかでも、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、式(5)で表される化合物が好適に挙げられる。 Among the reducing compounds, the compound represented by the formula (5) is preferably mentioned in that the ion migration suppressing ability is more excellent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(5A)中、R11a、R14a、R15aの定義は、式(1A)中の各基の定義と同義である。
 式(5A)中、R40aおよびR41aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、酸素原子を含んでもよい脂肪族炭化水素基、酸素原子を含んでもよい芳香族炭化水素基を表す。なかでも、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、3級炭素原子あるいは4級炭素原子を含むアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基に含まれる炭素原子の数は特に制限されないが、2~20がより好ましい。特に、R40aが炭素原子数1~5個のアルキル基で、R41aが炭素原子数10~20個のアルキル基であることが好ましい。
In formula (5A), the definitions of R 11a , R 14a and R 15a are the same as the definitions of each group in formula (1A).
In formula (5A), R 40a and R 41a each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may contain an oxygen atom. Among these, a tertiary carbon atom or an alkyl group containing a quaternary carbon atom is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent ion migration suppressing ability.
The number of carbon atoms contained in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group or the aromatic hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited, but 2 to 20 is more preferable. In particular, R 40a is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 41a is preferably an alkyl group having 10 to 20 carbon atoms.
 R11a、R15a、R40aおよびR41aのうち少なくとも一つに含まれる炭素原子の数が1~20であることが好ましい。炭素原子の数が上記範囲内であれば、粘着剤への溶解性が向上して、化合物の分散性が向上し、結果として銀のイオンマイグレーション抑制能が向上する。なかでも、炭素原子の数は8~20が好ましく、10~18がより好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms contained in at least one of R 11a , R 15a , R 40a and R 41a is preferably 1-20. When the number of carbon atoms is within the above range, the solubility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive is improved, the dispersibility of the compound is improved, and as a result, the ability to suppress ion migration of silver is improved. Among these, the number of carbon atoms is preferably 8-20, and more preferably 10-18.
 また、R11a、R15a、R40aおよびR41aの各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上であることが好ましい。炭素原子の合計数が該範囲であれば、銀のイオンマイグレーションが抑制され、金属配線間の絶縁信頼性が向上する。なお、該効果がより優れる点で、合計数は8以上が好ましく、10以上がより好ましい。なお、上限は特に制限されないが、合成がより容易であり、粘着剤への分散性がより優れる点から、合計数は50以下が好ましく、40以下がより好ましい。 The total number of carbon atoms contained in each of R 11a , R 15a , R 40a and R 41a is preferably 4 or more. When the total number of carbon atoms is within this range, silver ion migration is suppressed, and the insulation reliability between metal wirings is improved. In addition, 8 or more are preferable and 10 or more are more preferable in the point which this effect is more excellent. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but the total number is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, from the viewpoint that synthesis is easier and dispersibility in the adhesive is more excellent.
(粘着剤)
 粘着剤としては特に限定されず、粘着性を示す材料(例えば、粘着性樹脂)であれば公知の材料を使用することができる。例えば、ゴム系粘着剤、アクリル系粘着剤、シリコーン系粘着剤、ウレタン系粘着剤などの各種の粘着剤を使用できるが、透明性がより優れると共に還元性化合物との相溶性がより優れる点で、アクリル系粘着剤が好ましい。
(Adhesive)
It does not specifically limit as an adhesive, If a material (for example, adhesive resin) which shows adhesiveness, a well-known material can be used. For example, various adhesives such as rubber adhesives, acrylic adhesives, silicone adhesives, urethane adhesives can be used, but in terms of better transparency and compatibility with reducing compounds. An acrylic adhesive is preferred.
 アクリル系粘着剤は、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートのモノマーユニットを主骨格とするアクリル系ポリマーをベースポリマーとする。なお、(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレートおよび/またはメタクリレートをいう。アクリル系ポリマーの主骨格を構成する、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートのアルキル基の平均炭素数は1~12程度が好ましく、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの具体例としては、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等を例示できる。 The acrylic adhesive is based on an acrylic polymer having a main skeleton of an alkyl (meth) acrylate monomer unit. (Meth) acrylate refers to acrylate and / or methacrylate. The average carbon number of the alkyl group of the alkyl (meth) acrylate constituting the main skeleton of the acrylic polymer is preferably about 1 to 12, and specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) ) Acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
 透明粘着シートは、透明粘着層のみからなり基材を有しないタイプ(基材レス透明粘着シート)であっても、基材の少なくとも一方の主面に透明粘着層が配置された基材を有するタイプ(基材付き透明粘着シート。例えば、基材の両面に粘着層を有する基材付き透明両面粘着シート、基材の片面にのみ粘着層を有する基材付き透明片面粘着シート)であってもよい。なかでも、粘着シートを用いた製品の薄膜化の観点からは、基材レス透明両面粘着シートが好ましい。 The transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet has a base material in which the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is disposed on at least one main surface of the base material, even if the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is composed of only the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and does not have a base material Even if it is a type (transparent adhesive sheet with a substrate. For example, a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet with a substrate having an adhesive layer on both sides of the substrate, a transparent single-sided adhesive sheet with a substrate having an adhesive layer only on one side of the substrate) Good. Among these, a substrate-less transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet is preferable from the viewpoint of thinning a product using the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet.
 透明粘着シートが基材付き透明粘着シートの場合、使用される基材の種類は特に制限されないが、透明基材を使用することが好ましい。透明基材としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリブチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリエチレンナフタレートフィルム、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、セロファン、ジアセチルセルロースフィルム、トリアセチルセルロースフィルム、アセチルセルロースブチレートフィルム、ポリ塩化ビニルフィルム、ポリ塩化ビニリデンフィルム、ポリビニルアルコールフィルム、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体フィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム、ポリメチルペンテンフィルム、ポリスルホンフィルム、ポリエーテルエーテルケトンフィルム、ポリエーテルスルホンフィルム、ポリエーテルイミドフィルム、ポリイミドフィルム、フッソ樹脂フィルム、ナイロンフィルム、アクリル樹脂フィルム等を挙げることができる。 When the transparent adhesive sheet is a transparent adhesive sheet with a substrate, the type of substrate used is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to use a transparent substrate. As the transparent substrate, for example, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polyethylene film, polypropylene film, cellophane, diacetyl cellulose film, triacetyl cellulose film, acetyl cellulose butyrate film, polyvinyl chloride film, Polyvinylidene chloride film, polyvinyl alcohol film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polymethylpentene film, polysulfone film, polyetheretherketone film, polyethersulfone film, polyetherimide film, polyimide film , Fluorine resin film, nylon film, acrylic It can be exemplified a resin film or the like.
 透明粘着シートに含まれる透明粘着層は、以下の環境試験において時間Xが12時間以下を示す透明粘着層である。なかでも、透明粘着層のイオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、上記時間Xが6時間未満であることが好ましい。
 上記時間Xが12時間超の場合、イオンマイグレーション抑制能に劣る。
 環境試験としては、まず、上記還元性化合物と所定の粘着剤とを含む透明粘着層(長さ5cm×幅4cm×厚み50μm)をガラス基板上に設け、透明粘着層上にPET基板(50μm)を配置して評価サンプルを作製する。その後、評価サンプルを65℃、95%RHの条件で72時間放置する。その後、評価サンプルを取り出し、23℃、50%RHの環境下で放置する。その際に、評価サンプル中の透明粘着層のヘイズを村上色彩技術研究所製「HR-100型」を用いて測定し、ヘイズが3%以下に達するまでの時間Xを測定する。
The transparent adhesive layer contained in the transparent adhesive sheet is a transparent adhesive layer in which time X indicates 12 hours or less in the following environmental test. Especially, it is preferable that the said time X is less than 6 hours at the point which the ion migration suppression capability of a transparent adhesion layer is more excellent.
When the said time X is over 12 hours, it is inferior to ion migration suppression ability.
As an environmental test, first, a transparent adhesive layer (length 5 cm × width 4 cm × thickness 50 μm) containing the reducing compound and a predetermined adhesive is provided on a glass substrate, and a PET substrate (50 μm) is formed on the transparent adhesive layer. To prepare an evaluation sample. Thereafter, the evaluation sample is allowed to stand for 72 hours at 65 ° C. and 95% RH. Thereafter, the evaluation sample is taken out and left in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH. At that time, the haze of the transparent adhesive layer in the evaluation sample is measured using “HR-100 type” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory, and the time X until the haze reaches 3% or less is measured.
 透明粘着層中における上記還元性化合物の質量(A)と上記粘着剤の質量(B)との質量比(A/B)は特に制限されないが、粘着層のイオンマイグレーション抑制能と白化耐性がより優れる点で、0.0001~0.20が好ましく、0.0005~0.10がより好ましい。 The mass ratio (A / B) of the mass (A) of the reducing compound and the mass (B) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive in the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited. In terms of superiority, 0.0001 to 0.20 is preferable, and 0.0005 to 0.10 is more preferable.
 透明粘着シートの全光線透過率は特に制限されないが、80%以上(より好ましくは85%以上、さらに好ましくは90%以上)であることが好ましい。
 なお、全光線透過率は、村上色彩技術研究所製「HR-100型」を用いて測定する。
The total light transmittance of the transparent adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80% or more (more preferably 85% or more, still more preferably 90% or more).
The total light transmittance is measured using “HR-100 type” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory.
 透明粘着シート中の透明粘着層の厚みは特に制限されず、粘着シートのタッチパネルへの応用の点から、5~250μmが好ましく、20~200μmがより好ましい。
 透明粘着層の厚みを20μm以上とすることで貼り付ける基板の段差や凹凸をカバーできるという効果が得られ、250μm以下とすることで透明粘着シートの透過率を充分に確保できるという効果が得られる。
The thickness of the transparent adhesive layer in the transparent adhesive sheet is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 250 μm and more preferably 20 to 200 μm from the viewpoint of application of the adhesive sheet to a touch panel.
By setting the thickness of the transparent adhesive layer to 20 μm or more, it is possible to cover the steps and irregularities of the substrate to be attached, and by setting the thickness to 250 μm or less, it is possible to sufficiently secure the transmittance of the transparent adhesive sheet. .
 上記透明粘着シートは、公知の方法によって製造することができる。例えば、基材レス透明両面粘着シートの場合には、セパレータ(剥離ライナー)上に上記還元性化合物および粘着剤を含む粘着剤組成物を、乾燥後の厚さが所定の厚さとなるように塗布して粘着剤組成物の塗布層を設けた後、該塗布層を乾燥、必要に応じて硬化して、透明粘着層を形成することにより、透明両面粘着シートを作製しうる。
 また、基材付き透明両面粘着シートの場合には、上記還元性化合物および粘着剤を含む粘着剤組成物を、基材表面に直接塗布、乾燥することにより透明粘着層を設けてもよいし(直写法)、上記と同様にセパレータ上に上記化合物を含む透明粘着層を形成した後、基材と転写する(貼り合わせる)ことにより基材上に透明粘着層を設けてもよい(転写法)。さらに、セパレータ(剥離ライナー)に塗布したあと、塗布面にセパレータを貼り、紫外線を照射することで硬化してもよい。この場合、光重合開始剤を添加するのが一般的である。
The said transparent adhesive sheet can be manufactured by a well-known method. For example, in the case of a substrate-less transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the reducing compound and the pressure-sensitive adhesive is applied on a separator (release liner) so that the thickness after drying becomes a predetermined thickness. Then, after providing a coating layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, the coating layer is dried and cured as necessary to form a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, whereby a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet can be produced.
In the case of a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a substrate, a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided by directly applying and drying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the reducing compound and the pressure-sensitive adhesive on the surface of the substrate ( (Direct copying method), after forming a transparent adhesive layer containing the above-mentioned compound on the separator in the same manner as described above, a transparent adhesive layer may be provided on the substrate by transferring (bonding) to the substrate (transfer method) . Furthermore, after apply | coating to a separator (release liner), you may harden | cure by sticking a separator to an application surface and irradiating with an ultraviolet-ray. In this case, it is common to add a photopolymerization initiator.
[配線基板]
 次に、本発明の第2態様の配線基板の好適態様について、図面を参照して詳述する。
 図7は、配線基板の一実施態様の模式的断面図を示し、配線基板10は、絶縁基板12と、絶縁基板12上に配置された金属配線14と、金属配線14を覆う透明粘着層19とを備える。なお、絶縁基板12と金属配線14とは、金属配線付き絶縁基板16を構成する。
 以下に、各部材(絶縁基板12、金属配線14、透明粘着層19)について詳述する。
[Wiring board]
Next, the suitable aspect of the wiring board of the 2nd aspect of this invention is explained in full detail with reference to drawings.
FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the wiring board. The wiring board 10 includes an insulating substrate 12, a metal wiring 14 disposed on the insulating substrate 12, and a transparent adhesive layer 19 that covers the metal wiring 14. With. The insulating substrate 12 and the metal wiring 14 constitute an insulating substrate 16 with metal wiring.
Below, each member (the insulated substrate 12, the metal wiring 14, and the transparent adhesion layer 19) is explained in full detail.
(絶縁基板)
 絶縁基板は、絶縁性であり、金属配線を支持できるものであれば、その種類は特に制限されない。例えば、有機基板、セラミック基板、ガラス基板などを使用することができる。
 また、絶縁基板は、有機基板、セラミック基板、およびガラス基板からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも2つの基板が積層した構造であってもよい。
(Insulated substrate)
The type of the insulating substrate is not particularly limited as long as it is insulative and can support metal wiring. For example, an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, a glass substrate, or the like can be used.
The insulating substrate may have a structure in which at least two substrates selected from the group consisting of an organic substrate, a ceramic substrate, and a glass substrate are stacked.
 有機基板の材料としては樹脂が挙げられ、例えば、熱硬化性樹脂、熱可塑性樹脂、またはそれらを混合した樹脂を使用することが好ましい。熱硬化性樹脂としては、例えば、フェノール樹脂、尿素樹脂、メラミン樹脂、アルキッド樹脂、アクリル樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、ジアリルフタレート樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、フラン樹脂、ケトン樹脂、キシレン樹脂、ベンゾシクロブテン樹脂等が挙げられる。熱可塑性樹脂としては、例えば、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリフェニレンオキサイド樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド樹脂、アラミド樹脂、液晶ポリマー等が挙げられる。
 なお、有機基板の材料としては、ガラス織布、ガラス不織布、アラミド織布、アラミド不織布、芳香族ポリアミド織布や、これらに上記樹脂を含浸させた材料なども使用できる。
Resin is mentioned as a material of an organic substrate, For example, it is preferable to use a thermosetting resin, a thermoplastic resin, or resin which mixed them. Examples of the thermosetting resin include phenol resin, urea resin, melamine resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, diallyl phthalate resin, epoxy resin, silicone resin, furan resin, ketone resin, xylene resin, benzocyclo Examples include butene resin. Examples of the thermoplastic resin include polyimide resin, polyphenylene oxide resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, aramid resin, and liquid crystal polymer.
In addition, as a material of the organic substrate, a glass woven fabric, a glass nonwoven fabric, an aramid woven fabric, an aramid nonwoven fabric, an aromatic polyamide woven fabric, a material impregnated with the above resin, or the like can be used.
(金属配線)
 金属配線は、主に銀を含む。銀は銀合金の形態で含まれていてもよく、金属配線が銀合金を含む場合、銀以外の含有される金属としては、例えば、錫、パラジウム、金、ニッケル、クロムなどが挙げられる。なお、金属配線中に、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、バインダーなどの樹脂成分や感光性化合物などが含まれていてもよく、さらに必要に応じてその他の成分が含まれていてもよい。
 また、金属配線は、銀または銀合金からなる金属ナノワイヤを含有することが好ましい。なお、金属ナノワイヤについては、後段で詳述する。
(Metal wiring)
The metal wiring mainly contains silver. Silver may be contained in the form of a silver alloy. When the metal wiring contains a silver alloy, examples of the metal contained other than silver include tin, palladium, gold, nickel, and chromium. The metal wiring may contain a resin component such as a binder or a photosensitive compound as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and may further contain other components as necessary. .
Moreover, it is preferable that a metal wiring contains the metal nanowire which consists of silver or a silver alloy. The metal nanowire will be described in detail later.
 金属配線の形成方法は特に制限されず、蒸着法、スパッタリング法などの物理的成膜法、またはCVD法などの化学的気相法、銀ナノ粒子や銀ナノワイヤを含有した銀ペーストを塗布して形成する方法、特開2009-188360号に開示される銀塩を利用した方法などが挙げられる。 The method of forming the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and a physical film formation method such as a vapor deposition method or a sputtering method, or a chemical vapor phase method such as a CVD method, or a silver paste containing silver nanoparticles or silver nanowires is applied. And a method using a silver salt disclosed in JP2009-188360A.
 金属配線は絶縁基板上に複数配置され、隣り合う金属配線間の距離(間隔)の最小値は50μm未満である。言い換えれば、隣り合う金属配線間の距離が50μm未満である部分(領域)が少なくとも1か所以上含まれる。金属配線間の距離を上記範囲と設定することにより、より高密度に金属配線が集積された配線基板を製造することができる。なかでも、金属配線の集積度をより高める点からは、隣り合う金属配線間の距離(間隔)の最小値は40μm未満であることが好ましい。
 また、金属配線間の距離は、最小値が上記範囲を満たしていればよく、50μm以上の距離(間隔)があってもよい。
A plurality of metal wirings are arranged on the insulating substrate, and the minimum distance (interval) between adjacent metal wirings is less than 50 μm. In other words, at least one portion (region) where the distance between adjacent metal wirings is less than 50 μm is included. By setting the distance between the metal wirings within the above range, a wiring board in which the metal wirings are integrated at a higher density can be manufactured. In particular, the minimum value of the distance (interval) between adjacent metal wirings is preferably less than 40 μm from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of integration of the metal wirings.
Further, the distance between the metal wirings only needs to satisfy the above range in the minimum value, and there may be a distance (interval) of 50 μm or more.
 金属配線間の平均間隔は特に制限されないが、配線基板の高集積化の点から、0.1~60μmがさらに好ましく、0.2~50μmが特に好ましい。なお、ここで平均間隔とは、任意の位置の金属配線間の間隔を20箇所以上測定して、それらを算術平均した値である。 The average distance between the metal wirings is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 60 μm and particularly preferably 0.2 to 50 μm from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board. In addition, an average space | interval here is the value which measured the space | interval between the metal wiring of arbitrary positions 20 places or more, and arithmetically averaged them.
 金属配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量は、50μg/mm2以下であることが好ましい。銀量を上記範囲にすることにより、金属配線の膜厚および幅を小さくすることが可能となり、高密度集積化の要望に対応することができる。なかでも、銀量は30μg/mm2以下であることが好ましく、15μg/mm2以下であることがより好ましい。下限に関しては特に制限されないが、金属配線の導電特性がより優れる点で、0.001μg/mm2以上が好ましく、0.005μg/mm2以上がより好ましい。
 なお、金属配線中に含まれる銀量が少ない場合にイオンマイグレーションが起こると、金属配線を形成していた銀が溶出することによって、金属配線の断線が生じやすくなる。しかし、本発明の第2態様においては、所定の還元性化合物を含む透明樹脂層で金属配線を覆うことにより、銀のイオンマイグレーションを抑制し、金属配線の断線を抑制することができる。
The amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring is preferably 50 μg / mm 2 or less. By setting the amount of silver in the above range, the film thickness and width of the metal wiring can be reduced, and the demand for high density integration can be met. Among them, silver amount is preferably at 30 [mu] g / mm 2 or less, more preferably 15 [mu] g / mm 2 or less. Although it does not restrict | limit in particular regarding a minimum, 0.001 microgram / mm < 2 > or more is preferable and 0.005 microgram / mm < 2 > or more is more preferable at the point which the electroconductivity of a metal wiring is more excellent.
In addition, when ion migration occurs when the amount of silver contained in the metal wiring is small, disconnection of the metal wiring is likely to occur due to elution of silver forming the metal wiring. However, in the second aspect of the present invention, by covering the metal wiring with a transparent resin layer containing a predetermined reducing compound, silver ion migration can be suppressed and disconnection of the metal wiring can be suppressed.
 銀量の測定方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用できる。例えば、金属配線の断面SEM写真を観察して元素分析することにより銀量を測定することができる。また、金属配線を硝酸などの強酸と接触させて、金属配線中の銀を溶解させ、溶解した量から銀量を測定することもできる。また、銀ナノワイヤや銀ナノ粒子を含む分散液を使用して金属配線を作製する場合は、金属配線を作製する際に使用した分散液の量から、金属配線中における銀量を計算により求めることもできる。
 また、金属配線の単位面積当たりとは、言い換えると、金属配線の絶縁基板との接触部分の単位面積当たりを意味する。つまり、金属配線と絶縁基板との接触部分の面積のみを基準に銀量の計算を行う。言い換えると、金属配線と接触していない絶縁基板表面(例えば、金属配線間に位置する、金属配線と接触していない絶縁基板表面)の面積は、上記金属配線の単位面積当たりの計算には考慮にいれない。従って、金属配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量とは、金属配線と絶縁基板との接触部分における単位面積あたり(mm2)に含まれる銀量を意味する。
The measuring method in particular of silver amount is not restrict | limited, A well-known method is employable. For example, the amount of silver can be measured by observing a cross-sectional SEM photograph of a metal wiring and conducting elemental analysis. Alternatively, the metal wiring is brought into contact with a strong acid such as nitric acid to dissolve silver in the metal wiring, and the amount of silver can be measured from the dissolved amount. In addition, when metal wiring is produced using a dispersion containing silver nanowires or silver nanoparticles, the amount of silver in the metal wiring is obtained by calculation from the amount of the dispersion used to produce the metal wiring. You can also.
In addition, per unit area of the metal wiring means in other words per unit area of the contact portion of the metal wiring with the insulating substrate. That is, the amount of silver is calculated based only on the area of the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate. In other words, the area of the insulating substrate surface that is not in contact with the metal wiring (for example, the surface of the insulating substrate that is not in contact with the metal wiring that is located between the metal wirings) is considered in the calculation per unit area of the metal wiring. I ca n’t enter. Therefore, the amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring means the amount of silver contained per unit area (mm 2 ) at the contact portion between the metal wiring and the insulating substrate.
 金属配線の幅は特に制限されないが、配線基板の高集積化部および引き出し配線部(リード配線部)における電気信頼性を確保する点から、0.1~10000μmが好ましく、0.1~300μmがより好ましく、0.1~100μmがさらに好ましく、0.2~50μmが特に好ましい。
 また、金属配線の形状は特に制限されず、任意の形状であってもよい。例えば、直線状、曲線状、矩形状、円状などが挙げられる。また、金属配線の配置(パターン)は特に制限あれず、例えば、ストライプ状が挙げられる。
 さらに、図1において金属配線14は2つ設けられているが、その数は特に制限されない。通常、金属配線は複数設けられる。
The width of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 10,000 μm, and preferably 0.1 to 300 μm, from the viewpoint of ensuring electrical reliability in the highly integrated portion and the lead wiring portion (lead wiring portion) of the wiring board. More preferably, 0.1 to 100 μm is more preferable, and 0.2 to 50 μm is particularly preferable.
Further, the shape of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and may be an arbitrary shape. For example, a linear shape, a curved shape, a rectangular shape, a circular shape, and the like can be given. Further, the arrangement (pattern) of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a stripe shape.
Further, although two metal wirings 14 are provided in FIG. 1, the number is not particularly limited. Usually, a plurality of metal wirings are provided.
 金属配線の厚みは特に制限されないが、配線基板の高集積化の点から、0.001~100μmが好ましく、0.01~30μmがより好ましく、0.01~20μmがさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the metal wiring is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 to 100 μm, more preferably 0.01 to 30 μm, and still more preferably 0.01 to 20 μm from the viewpoint of high integration of the wiring board.
 図7においては、金属配線14は、絶縁基板12の片面だけに設けられているが、両面に設けられていてもよい。つまり、金属配線付き絶縁基板16は、片面基板であっても、両面基板であってもよい。金属配線14が絶縁基板12の両面にある場合、透明粘着層19も両面に設けてもよい。
 また、図7では、金属配線14が一層の配線構造を例にあげたが、もちろんこれに限定されない。例えば、複数の金属配線と絶縁基板とを交互に積層した金属配線付き絶縁基板(多層配線基板)を使用することにより、多層配線構造の配線基板としてもよい。
In FIG. 7, the metal wiring 14 is provided only on one side of the insulating substrate 12, but may be provided on both sides. That is, the insulating substrate 16 with metal wiring may be a single-sided substrate or a double-sided substrate. When the metal wiring 14 is on both sides of the insulating substrate 12, the transparent adhesive layer 19 may also be provided on both sides.
In FIG. 7, the metal wiring 14 has a single-layer wiring structure as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an insulating substrate with a metal wiring (multilayer wiring substrate) in which a plurality of metal wirings and insulating substrates are alternately laminated may be used to provide a wiring substrate having a multilayer wiring structure.
 また、絶縁基板中にスルーホールが形成されていてもよい。絶縁基板の両面に金属配線が設けられる場合は、該スルーホール内に金属(例えば、銀または銀合金)が充填されることにより、両面の金属配線が導通されていてもよい。 Further, a through hole may be formed in the insulating substrate. When metal wiring is provided on both surfaces of the insulating substrate, the metal wiring on both surfaces may be made conductive by filling the through hole with a metal (for example, silver or silver alloy).
(金属ナノワイヤ)
 金属ナノワイヤは、銀または銀合金から構成される。銀合金の種類は、上述の通りである。
 金属ナノワイヤとは、導電性を有し、且つ長軸方向長さが直径(短軸方向長さ)に比べて十分に長い形状を持つものをいう。中実繊維であっても、中空繊維であってもよい。
(Metal nanowires)
The metal nanowire is composed of silver or a silver alloy. The kind of silver alloy is as above-mentioned.
The metal nanowire has conductivity and has a shape in which the length in the major axis direction is sufficiently longer than the diameter (length in the minor axis direction). It may be a solid fiber or a hollow fiber.
 金属ナノワイヤの材料は、導電性に優れる点で、銀、または、銀と他の金属との合金が特に好ましい。銀との合金で使用する他の金属としては、白金、オスミウム、パラジウム、イリジウム、錫、ビスマス、ニッケルなどが挙げられる。これらは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。 The material of the metal nanowire is particularly preferably silver or an alloy of silver and another metal in terms of excellent conductivity. Other metals used in the alloy with silver include platinum, osmium, palladium, iridium, tin, bismuth, nickel and the like. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 金属ナノワイヤの平均短軸長さ(「平均短軸径」と称することがある)としては、5~50nmであり、5~25nmがより好ましく、さらに5~20nmが特に好ましい。
 平均短軸径が5nm以上とすることで、耐酸化性を向上させられるため好ましく、平均短軸径を50nm以下とすることで、金属ナノワイヤの散乱を低減できるため好ましい。特に、平均短軸長さを25nm以下にすることより、金属ナノワイヤの散乱は大きく低減でき、より好ましい。
 金属ナノワイヤの平均短軸径は、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM;日本電子株式会社製、JEM-2000FX)を用い、300個の金属ナノワイヤの短軸径を観察し、その平均値から金属ナノワイヤの平均短軸径を求める。なお、金属ナノワイヤの断面が円形でない場合の短軸径は、最も長いものを短軸径とする。
The average minor axis length of the metal nanowire (sometimes referred to as “average minor axis diameter”) is 5 to 50 nm, more preferably 5 to 25 nm, and even more preferably 5 to 20 nm.
An average minor axis diameter of 5 nm or more is preferable because oxidation resistance can be improved, and an average minor axis diameter of 50 nm or less is preferable because scattering of metal nanowires can be reduced. In particular, by making the average minor axis length 25 nm or less, the scattering of metal nanowires can be greatly reduced, which is more preferable.
The average minor axis diameter of the metal nanowires was determined by observing the minor axis diameters of 300 metal nanowires using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX). Find the minor axis diameter. In addition, let the shortest axis | shaft diameter be the short axis diameter when the cross section of metal nanowire is not circular.
 金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸長さ(「平均長軸径」と称することがある)としては、5μm以上が好ましく、5μm~40μmがより好ましく、5μm~30μmがさらに好ましい。
 平均長軸径を5μm以上とすることで金属ナノワイヤ同士が接触して導電性ネットワーク形成しやすくなるため好ましく、40μm以下とすることで金属ナノワイヤ同士が製造時に絡まる可能性が低くなるため好ましい。
 金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸径は、例えば、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM;日本電子株式会社製、JEM-2000FX)を用い、300個の金属ナノワイヤの長軸径を観察し、その平均値から金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸径を求める。なお、金属ナノワイヤが曲がっている場合、それを弧とする円を考慮し、その半径、および、曲率から算出される値を長軸径とする。
The average major axis length of the metal nanowire (sometimes referred to as “average major axis diameter”) is preferably 5 μm or more, more preferably 5 μm to 40 μm, and even more preferably 5 μm to 30 μm.
An average major axis diameter of 5 μm or more is preferable because the metal nanowires come into contact with each other to easily form a conductive network, and an average major axis diameter of 40 μm or less is preferable because the possibility of the metal nanowires becoming entangled during manufacturing is reduced.
The average major axis diameter of the metal nanowires is determined by, for example, observing the major axis diameters of 300 metal nanowires using a transmission electron microscope (TEM; manufactured by JEOL Ltd., JEM-2000FX). The average major axis diameter is obtained. In addition, when the metal nanowire is bent, a circle having the arc as an arc is taken into consideration, and a value calculated from the radius and the curvature is taken as the major axis diameter.
 金属ナノワイヤの製造方法は特に制限はなく、いかなる方法で作製してもよいが、ハロゲン化合物と分散剤を溶解した溶媒中で金属イオンを還元することによって製造することが好ましい。また、金属ナノワイヤを形成した後は、常法により脱塩処理を行うことが、分散性、導電膜の経時安定性の観点から好ましい。
 また、金属ナノワイヤの製造方法としては、特開2009-215594号公報、特開2009-242880号公報、特開2009-299162号公報、特開2010-84173号公報、特開2010-86714号公報、特表2009-505358号公報などに記載の方法を用いることができる。
The method for producing the metal nanowire is not particularly limited and may be produced by any method, but it is preferably produced by reducing metal ions in a solvent in which a halogen compound and a dispersant are dissolved. In addition, after forming the metal nanowire, it is preferable to perform a desalting treatment by a conventional method from the viewpoints of dispersibility and stability of the conductive film over time.
In addition, as a method for producing metal nanowires, JP2009-215594A, JP2009-242880A, JP2009-299162A, JP2010-84173A, JP2010-86714A, The method described in JP-T-2009-505358 can be used.
 金属ナノワイヤのアスペクト比としては目的に応じて適宜選択することができるが、10以上であれば特に制限なく、50以上がより好ましく、100以上がさらに好ましく、5000以上がさらに好ましく、10,000から100,000が特に好ましい。アスペクト比とは、一般的には繊維状の物質の長辺と短辺との比(平均長軸径/平均短軸径の比)を意味する。
 アスペクト比の測定方法としては、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができ、例えば、電子顕微鏡等により測定する方法などが挙げられる。
 金属ナノワイヤのアスペクト比を電子顕微鏡で測定する場合、電子顕微鏡の1視野で確認できればよい。また、金属ナノワイヤの平均長軸径と平均短軸径とを各々別に測定することによって、金属ナノワイヤ全体のアスペクト比を見積もることができる。
 なお、金属ナノワイヤがチューブ状の場合には、アスペクト比を算出するための直径としては、該チューブの外径を用いる。
The aspect ratio of the metal nanowire can be appropriately selected according to the purpose, but is not particularly limited as long as it is 10 or more, more preferably 50 or more, further preferably 100 or more, further preferably 5000 or more, and from 10,000 100,000 is particularly preferred. The aspect ratio generally means the ratio between the long side and the short side of the fibrous material (ratio of average major axis diameter / average minor axis diameter).
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a measuring method of an aspect ratio, According to the objective, it can select suitably, For example, the method etc. which measure with an electron microscope etc. are mentioned.
When measuring the aspect ratio of a metal nanowire with an electron microscope, it is only necessary to confirm with one field of view of the electron microscope. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the whole metal nanowire can be estimated by measuring the average major axis diameter and the average minor axis diameter of the metal nanowire separately.
When the metal nanowire has a tube shape, the outer diameter of the tube is used as the diameter for calculating the aspect ratio.
(透明粘着層)
 透明粘着層は、金属配線付き絶縁基板の金属配線側の表面に配置され、金属配線表面を覆い、金属配線間の銀のイオンマイグレーションを抑制するための層である。言い換えれば、透明粘着層は銀イオン拡散抑制層に該当する。
 なお、透明粘着層中には、銀イオンまたは金属銀が実質的に含まれていないことが好ましい。透明粘着層に過剰の銀イオンまたは金属銀が含まれていると、イオンマイグレーション抑制効果が低下する場合がある。
 なお、銀イオンまたは金属銀が実質的に含まれないとは、透明粘着層中における銀イオンまたは金属銀の含有量が、1μmol/l以下であることを指し、0.1μmol/l以下であることがより好ましく、最も好ましくは0mol/lである。
(Transparent adhesive layer)
The transparent adhesive layer is a layer that is disposed on the surface on the metal wiring side of the insulating substrate with metal wiring, covers the metal wiring surface, and suppresses silver ion migration between the metal wirings. In other words, the transparent adhesive layer corresponds to a silver ion diffusion suppression layer.
In addition, it is preferable that a silver ion or metallic silver is not substantially contained in the transparent adhesion layer. If the transparent adhesive layer contains excessive silver ions or metallic silver, the ion migration suppressing effect may be reduced.
The phrase “substantially free of silver ions or metallic silver” means that the content of silver ions or metallic silver in the transparent adhesive layer is 1 μmol / l or less, and is 0.1 μmol / l or less. Is more preferable, and most preferably 0 mol / l.
 透明粘着層には、上述した還元性化合物および粘着剤が含有される。それぞれの成分の定義は、上述の通りである。また、透明粘着層中における還元性化合物と粘着剤との質量比は、上述した透明粘着シート中における還元性化合物と粘着剤との質量比と同義であり、好適態様も同義である。 The transparent adhesive layer contains the reducing compound and the adhesive described above. The definition of each component is as described above. Moreover, mass ratio of the reducing compound and adhesive in a transparent adhesive layer is synonymous with mass ratio of the reducing compound and adhesive in the transparent adhesive sheet mentioned above, and a suitable aspect is also synonymous.
 透明粘着層の厚みは特に制限されないが、イオンマイグレーション抑制能がより優れる点で、5~1000μmが好ましく、10~500μmがより好ましい。 The thickness of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 1000 μm, more preferably 10 to 500 μm, from the viewpoint of better ion migration suppression ability.
 透明粘着層の全光線透過率は特に制限されないが、80%以上(より好ましくは85%以上、さらに好ましくは90%以上)であることが好ましい。
 なお、全光線透過率は、村上色彩技術研究所製「HR-100型」を用いて測定する。
The total light transmittance of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80% or more (more preferably 85% or more, still more preferably 90% or more).
The total light transmittance is measured using “HR-100 type” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory.
 透明粘着層の製造方法は特に制限されず、例えば、還元性化合物および粘着剤を含む粘着層形成用組成物を金属配線付き絶縁基板上に塗布して、必要に応じて溶媒を除去して、透明粘着層を形成する方法がある。また、還元性化合物および粘着剤を含む透明粘着シートを直接金属配線付き絶縁基板上に積層(貼り付け)する方法も挙げられる。 The production method of the transparent adhesive layer is not particularly limited, for example, an adhesive layer forming composition containing a reducing compound and an adhesive is applied on an insulating substrate with metal wiring, and the solvent is removed as necessary. There is a method of forming a transparent adhesive layer. Moreover, the method of laminating | stacking (attaching) the transparent adhesive sheet containing a reducing compound and an adhesive directly on the insulated substrate with metal wiring is also mentioned.
 必要に応じて、上記で得られた配線基板の透明粘着層の表面にさらに絶縁層を設けてもよい。樹脂層上にさらに絶縁層を設けることにより、該絶縁層上にさらに金属配線を設けて多層配線基板とすることができる。 If necessary, an insulating layer may be further provided on the surface of the transparent adhesive layer of the wiring board obtained above. By further providing an insulating layer on the resin layer, a metal wiring can be further provided on the insulating layer to obtain a multilayer wiring board.
 配線基板は、金属配線間のイオンマイグレーションをより抑制できる点から、例えば、タッチパネル、ディスプレイ用電極、電磁波シールド、有機または無機ELディスプレイ用電極、電子パーパー、フレキシブルディスプレイ用電極、集積型太陽電池、表示素子、その他の各種デバイスなどに幅広く適用される。これらの中でも、タッチパネルが特に好ましい。つまり、配線基板は、タッチパネル用に使用されることが好ましい。より具体的には、上記配線基板中の金属配線が、タッチパネル電極部に接続された引き出し配線となる態様が好ましく挙げられる。なお、タッチパネル電極部とは、例えば、静電容量式のタッチパネルにおいては、静電容量の変化を感知するセンシング電極部のことを意味する。 From the point that the ion migration between metal wirings can be further suppressed, for example, the touch panel, display electrode, electromagnetic wave shield, organic or inorganic EL display electrode, electronic paper, flexible display electrode, integrated solar cell, display It is widely applied to devices and other various devices. Among these, a touch panel is particularly preferable. That is, the wiring board is preferably used for a touch panel. More specifically, an embodiment in which the metal wiring in the wiring board becomes a lead wiring connected to the touch panel electrode part is preferable. Note that the touch panel electrode unit means, for example, a sensing electrode unit that senses a change in capacitance in a capacitive touch panel.
 以下、実施例により、本発明について更に詳細に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, although an Example demonstrates this invention further in detail, this invention is not limited to these.
<<第1態様>>
<実施例1>
(透明両面粘着シートの製造)
 アクリル共重合体の調製攪拌機、寒流冷却器、温度計、滴下漏斗および窒素ガス導入口を備えた反応容器に、n-ブチルアクリレート91.5質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート0.5質量部、アクリル酸8.0質量部と重合開始剤として2,2’-アゾビスイソブチルニトリル0.2部とを酢酸エチル100質量部に溶解し、窒素置換後、80℃で8時間重合して質量平均分子量80万のアクリル共重合体(1)を得た。
 次に、上記アクリル共重合体(1)(98質量部)と、上記トコフェロール(2質量部)とを酢酸エチルで希釈し樹脂固形分30%の粘着剤組成物を得た。
 上記粘着剤組成物100重量部にイソシアネート系架橋剤(日本ポリウレタン社製コロネートL-45、固形分45%)を0.7重量部添加し15分攪拌後、シリコーン化合物で片面を剥離処理した厚さ50μmのPETフィルム上に乾燥後の厚さが25μmになるように塗工して、75℃で5分間乾燥した。得られた粘着シートと、シリコーン化合物で片面を剥離処理した厚さ38μmのPETフィルムを貼り合わせた。その後23℃で5日間熟成し厚さ25μmの透明両面粘着シート(基材レス粘着シート)S-1を得た。該粘着シートの全光線透過率は90.8%、ヘイズは0.6%、吸水率は1.24%であった。全光線透過率、ヘイズおよび吸水率の測定方法は、特開2012-11637号公報記載の方法に準じる。より具体的には、後段の記載の方法で測定を実施した。
 なお、透明両面粘着シート中におけるトコフェロールの含有量は、透明両面粘着シート全質量に対して、2質量%であった。
<< First Aspect >>
<Example 1>
(Manufacture of transparent double-sided PSA sheet)
Preparation of acrylic copolymer In a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, cold flow cooler, thermometer, dropping funnel and nitrogen gas inlet, 91.5 parts by mass of n-butyl acrylate, 0.5 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, 8.0 parts by mass of acrylic acid and 0.2 parts of 2,2′-azobisisobutylnitrile as a polymerization initiator are dissolved in 100 parts by mass of ethyl acetate, and after substitution with nitrogen, polymerization is carried out at 80 ° C. for 8 hours to obtain a mass average. An acrylic copolymer (1) having a molecular weight of 800,000 was obtained.
Next, the acrylic copolymer (1) (98 parts by mass) and the tocopherol (2 parts by mass) were diluted with ethyl acetate to obtain an adhesive composition having a resin solid content of 30%.
A thickness obtained by adding 0.7 parts by weight of an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent (Coronate L-45 manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Co., Ltd., solid content: 45%) to 100 parts by weight of the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, stirring for 15 minutes, and then stripping one side with a silicone compound The film was coated on a 50 μm thick PET film so that the thickness after drying was 25 μm, and dried at 75 ° C. for 5 minutes. The obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was bonded to a PET film having a thickness of 38 μm, one side of which was peeled off with a silicone compound. Thereafter, it was aged at 23 ° C. for 5 days to obtain a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (baseless pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet) S-1 having a thickness of 25 μm. The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet had a total light transmittance of 90.8%, a haze of 0.6%, and a water absorption of 1.24%. The method for measuring the total light transmittance, haze, and water absorption is in accordance with the method described in JP 2012-11637 A. More specifically, the measurement was performed by the method described later.
In addition, content of the tocopherol in a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet was 2 mass% with respect to the transparent double-sided adhesive sheet total mass.
(透明両面粘着シートの全光線透過率およびヘイズ測定)
 得られた透明両面粘着シートS-1を60℃、90%RH条件下に100時間放置した後、PETフィルム、ガラスの順で貼り合わせて試験サンプルを調整した。(株)村上色彩技術研究所製「HR-100型」を使用し、調整サンプルの全光線透過率およびヘイズ(%)を測定した。
(Total light transmittance and haze measurement of transparent double-sided PSA sheet)
The obtained transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-1 was allowed to stand for 100 hours at 60 ° C. and 90% RH, and then a test sample was prepared by laminating PET film and glass in this order. Using the “HR-100 Model” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory Co., Ltd., the total light transmittance and haze (%) of the adjusted sample were measured.
(透明両面粘着シートの吸水率測定)
 100mm×100mmの両面粘着シートを、60℃、90%RH条件下に100時間放置した後、直ちに透明両面粘着シートの片面の剥離フィルムを剥がして、予め秤量してある150mm×150mmのステンレスメッシュ(#250)に貼り合わせ、さらにもう一方の剥離フィルムを剥がして秤量する(この重量から該ステンレスメッシュの重量を除いた重量をW1とする)。これを105℃条件下で2時間乾燥した後、秤量を行う(この重量から該ステンレスメッシュの重量を除いた重量をW2とする)。両面粘着シートの吸水率は下記の式で算出した。
両面粘着シートの吸水率(%)=(W1-W2)/W2×100
(Measurement of water absorption rate of transparent double-sided PSA sheet)
A 100 mm × 100 mm double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was allowed to stand at 60 ° C. and 90% RH for 100 hours, and then immediately peeled off the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and a 150 mm × 150 mm stainless mesh ( The other release film is peeled off and weighed (W1 is the weight obtained by subtracting the weight of the stainless steel mesh from this weight). This is dried at 105 ° C. for 2 hours and then weighed (the weight obtained by subtracting the weight of the stainless steel mesh from this weight is W2). The water absorption rate of the double-sided PSA sheet was calculated by the following formula.
Water absorption of double-sided PSA sheet (%) = (W1−W2) / W2 × 100
<実施例2>
 銅張積層板(日立化成社製 MCL-E-679F、基板:ガラスエポキシ基板)を用いて、スクリーン印刷法により、L/S=200μm/200μmの銀配線を備える金属配線付き絶縁基板Aを製造した。金属配線付き絶縁基板Aは、以下の方法により作製した。
 銅張積層板の銅箔をエッチング処理により剥離した後、スクリーン印刷装置を用いて導電性銀ペースト(藤倉化成製 FA-451)を、メタルマスクを通して基板上にパターニングした。
 その後、150℃の条件にて30分間加熱処理を行い、銀配線を硬化させ、銀配線のパターンがL/S=200μm/200μmの櫛型銀配線基板(金属配線付き絶縁基板A)を得た。
 スクリーン印刷を用いて形成された銀配線断面は、下辺(配線と基板が接触する辺に相当)が上辺よりもやや長い台形状であった。配線部の中心近傍の平均厚みは16μmであり、用いた導電性銀ペースト中の銀成分量は70wt%であり、銀配線と絶縁基板との接触部分における銀配線自体の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量は、銀の比重10.5g/cm3として、約24.2μg/mm2と算出された。なお、上記単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量を計算する際には、銀配線と絶縁基板とが接触している部分の面積を基準に計算し、銀配線と接触していない絶縁基板表面(例えば、銀配線と接触していない銀配線間の絶縁基板表面)の面積は考慮しない。
 なお、銀量は、金属配線の断面SEM写真の元素分析の結果からも算出した。なお、SEM観察より観察される全ての銀粒子の円相当形面積総計と配線の断面積率から算出された銀量は、使用した導電性銀ペーストの使用量からの算出した銀量の値とおおよそ同じであった。
<Example 2>
Using a copper-clad laminate (MCL-E-679F, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., substrate: glass epoxy substrate), an insulating substrate A with metal wiring having silver wiring of L / S = 200 μm / 200 μm is manufactured by screen printing. did. The insulating substrate A with metal wiring was produced by the following method.
After the copper foil of the copper clad laminate was peeled off by etching, conductive silver paste (Fujikura Kasei FA-451) was patterned on the substrate through a metal mask using a screen printing apparatus.
Thereafter, heat treatment was performed for 30 minutes at 150 ° C. to cure the silver wiring, and a comb-shaped silver wiring board (insulating substrate A with metal wiring) having a silver wiring pattern of L / S = 200 μm / 200 μm was obtained. .
The cross section of the silver wiring formed using screen printing had a trapezoidal shape in which the lower side (corresponding to the side where the wiring and the substrate contact) was slightly longer than the upper side. The average thickness in the vicinity of the center of the wiring portion is 16 μm, and the amount of silver component in the conductive silver paste used is 70 wt%, which is included per unit area of the silver wiring itself at the contact portion between the silver wiring and the insulating substrate. The amount of silver was calculated to be about 24.2 μg / mm 2 with a specific gravity of silver of 10.5 g / cm 3 . When calculating the amount of silver contained per unit area, calculation is based on the area of the portion where the silver wiring and the insulating substrate are in contact, and the surface of the insulating substrate not in contact with the silver wiring (for example, The area of the insulating substrate surface between the silver wires not in contact with the silver wires is not considered.
The amount of silver was also calculated from the result of elemental analysis of a cross-sectional SEM photograph of the metal wiring. In addition, the amount of silver calculated from the total equivalent circle-shaped area of all silver particles and the cross-sectional area ratio of the wiring observed by SEM observation is the value of the amount of silver calculated from the amount of conductive silver paste used. It was roughly the same.
(配線基板の製造)
 得られた金属配線付き絶縁基板A上に、銀イオン拡散抑制層に該当する透明両面粘着シートS-1の一方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す一方の表面を積層面として貼り合せて、さらに透明両面粘着シートS-1の他方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す他方の表面上にPETフィルム(膜厚:50μm)を貼り合せて配線基板を得た。その後、得られた配線基板を45℃、0.5MPaの条件下で20分オートクレーブ処理を行った。これにより配線基板T-1を得た。
 得られた配線基板T-1に関して、以下の寿命測定を行った。
(Manufacture of wiring boards)
On the obtained insulating substrate A with metal wiring, the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 corresponding to the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer is peeled off, and one surface showing adhesiveness is used as the laminated surface. Further, the release film on the other side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 μm) was pasted on the other surface showing adhesiveness to obtain a wiring board. . Thereafter, the obtained wiring board was autoclaved for 20 minutes at 45 ° C. and 0.5 MPa. As a result, a wiring board T-1 was obtained.
The following lifetime measurement was performed on the obtained wiring board T-1.
(評価方法1(寿命延長効果測定))
 得られた配線基板を用いて、湿度90%、温度60度、電圧10Vの条件で寿命測定(使用装置:エスペック(株)社製、EHS-221MD)を行った。
 評価方法としては、まず、トコフェロールを使用せずに上記実施例1の手順に従って透明両面粘着シートS-0を製造した。この透明両面粘着シートS-0には、トコフェロールが含まれていない。その後、金属配線付き絶縁基板A上に、透明両面粘着シートS-0の一方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す一方の表面を積層面として貼り合せて、さらに透明両面粘着シートの他方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す他方の表面上にPETフィルム(膜厚:50μm)を貼り合せて比較配線基板を得た。得られた比較配線基板を用いて、上記条件で寿命測定を行い、銀配線間の抵抗値が1×105Ωを下回るまでの時間Xを測定した。
 次に、配線基板T-1に対して上記条件で寿命測定を行い、銀配線間の抵抗値が1×105Ωを下回るまでの時間Yを測定した。
 得られた時間Xおよび時間Yを用いて寿命の改善効果(Y/X)を計算した。結果を表1に示す。
(Evaluation method 1 (life extension effect measurement))
Using the obtained wiring board, life measurement was performed under the conditions of a humidity of 90%, a temperature of 60 degrees, and a voltage of 10 V (use apparatus: EHS-221MD, manufactured by Espec Corp.).
As an evaluation method, first, a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 was produced according to the procedure of Example 1 without using tocopherol. This transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 does not contain tocopherol. Thereafter, the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 is peeled off on the insulating substrate A with metal wiring, and one surface showing adhesiveness is bonded as a laminated surface. The release film on the other side of the film was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 μm) was bonded onto the other surface exhibiting adhesiveness to obtain a comparative wiring board. Using the obtained comparative wiring board, the lifetime was measured under the above conditions, and the time X until the resistance value between the silver wirings fell below 1 × 10 5 Ω was measured.
Next, the lifetime measurement was performed on the wiring board T-1 under the above conditions, and the time Y until the resistance value between the silver wirings fell below 1 × 10 5 Ω was measured.
The life improvement effect (Y / X) was calculated using the obtained time X and time Y. The results are shown in Table 1.
<実施例3>
 特開2009―188360号の段落[0108]~[0120]に記載の手法によりL/S=50μm/50μmの銀配線を備える金属配線付き絶縁基板Bを製造した。なお、金属配線の単位面積あたりに含まれる銀量は8.7μg/mm2であった。
 金属配線付き絶縁基板Aの代わりに金属配線付き絶縁基板Bを使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様の手順に従って、配線基板T-2を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 3>
Insulating substrate B with metal wiring comprising silver wiring of L / S = 50 μm / 50 μm was manufactured by the method described in paragraphs [0108] to [0120] of JP-A-2009-188360. The amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring was 8.7 μg / mm 2 .
A wiring board T-2 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the insulating board B with metal wiring was used instead of the insulating board A with metal wiring, and evaluation of the evaluation method 1 was performed. . The results are shown in Table 1.
<実施例4>
(導電膜付き透明基板の製造)
 透明基板に該当するPET基板(厚み125μm)からなる透明基板を用意し、以下の手順に従って、櫛形電極パターン(L/S=200μm/200μm)の銀を含む導電膜を透明基板上に作製した。導電膜の単位面積あたりに含まれる銀量は、当該配線基板を硝酸に浸漬して溶解させたことにより得られた硝酸銀水溶液を、ICP-MSを用いて濃度を測定し、算出することができ、0.014μg/mm2であった。なお、PET基板は絶縁基板にも該当する。
<Example 4>
(Manufacture of transparent substrate with conductive film)
A transparent substrate made of a PET substrate (thickness 125 μm) corresponding to the transparent substrate was prepared, and a conductive film containing silver having a comb-shaped electrode pattern (L / S = 200 μm / 200 μm) was produced on the transparent substrate according to the following procedure. The amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film can be calculated by measuring the concentration of the aqueous silver nitrate solution obtained by immersing the wiring board in nitric acid and measuring the concentration using ICP-MS. 0.014 μg / mm 2 . The PET substrate also corresponds to an insulating substrate.
(銀ナノワイヤの水分散物の作製)
―銀ナノワイヤ分散液(1)の調製―
 プロピレングリコール370gに硝酸銀粉末60gを溶解させ、硝酸銀溶液101を調製した。プロピレングリコール4.45kgにポリビニルピロリドン(分子量55,000)72.0gを添加し、窒素ガスを容器の気相部分に通気しながら、90℃に昇温した。この液を反応溶液101とした。窒素ガスの通気を保持したまま、激しく攪拌している反応溶液101へ硝酸銀溶液101を2.50g添加して、加熱攪拌を1分間行った。さらに、この溶液へテトラブチルアンモニウムクロリド11.8gをプロピレングリコール100gに溶解させた溶液を添加し、反応溶液102とした。
 90℃に保ち、攪拌速度500rpmで攪拌している反応溶液102へ、硝酸銀溶液101を添加速度50cc/分で200g添加した。攪拌速度を100rpmに落とし、窒素ガスの通気を止めて、加熱攪拌を15時間行った。90℃に保ち、攪拌速度100rpmで攪拌しているこの液へ、硝酸銀溶液101を添加速度0.5cc/分にて220g添加し、添加終了後から2時間、加熱攪拌を続けた。攪拌を500rpmに変更し、蒸留水1.0kgを添加した後に、25℃まで冷却して仕込液101を作製した。
 分画分子量15万の限外濾過モジュールを用いて、限外濾過を次の通り実施した。蒸留水と1-プロパノールの混合溶液(体積比1対1)の仕込液101への添加と仕込液101の濃縮を、最終的にろ液の伝導度が50μS/cm以下になるまで繰り返した。濃縮を行い、金属含有量0.45%の銀ナノワイヤ分散液(1)を得た。
 得られた銀ナノワイヤ分散液(1)の銀ナノワイヤについて、前述のようにして平均短軸長、平均長軸長を測定した。
 その結果、平均短軸長28.5nm、平均長軸長15.2μmであった。以後、「銀ナノワイヤ分散液(1)」と表記する場合は、上記方法で得られた銀ナノワイヤ分散液を示す。
(Preparation of aqueous dispersion of silver nanowires)
-Preparation of silver nanowire dispersion (1)-
A silver nitrate solution 101 was prepared by dissolving 60 g of silver nitrate powder in 370 g of propylene glycol. 72.0 g of polyvinylpyrrolidone (molecular weight 55,000) was added to 4.45 kg of propylene glycol, and the temperature was raised to 90 ° C. while venting nitrogen gas through the gas phase portion of the container. This solution was designated as reaction solution 101. 2.50 g of the silver nitrate solution 101 was added to the vigorously stirred reaction solution 101 while maintaining the nitrogen gas flow, and the mixture was heated and stirred for 1 minute. Further, a solution in which 11.8 g of tetrabutylammonium chloride was dissolved in 100 g of propylene glycol was added to this solution to obtain a reaction solution 102.
200 g of the silver nitrate solution 101 was added to the reaction solution 102 which was kept at 90 ° C. and stirred at a stirring speed of 500 rpm at an addition speed of 50 cc / min. The stirring speed was reduced to 100 rpm, the aeration of nitrogen gas was stopped, and heating and stirring were performed for 15 hours. 220 g of the silver nitrate solution 101 was added at an addition speed of 0.5 cc / min to this liquid kept at 90 ° C. and stirred at a stirring speed of 100 rpm, and the heating and stirring were continued for 2 hours after the addition was completed. The stirring was changed to 500 rpm, and after adding 1.0 kg of distilled water, the mixture was cooled to 25 ° C. to prepare a charged solution 101.
Using an ultrafiltration module with a molecular weight cut off of 150,000, ultrafiltration was performed as follows. Addition of a mixed solution of distilled water and 1-propanol (volume ratio of 1: 1) to the charged liquid 101 and concentration of the charged liquid 101 were repeated until the conductivity of the filtrate finally reached 50 μS / cm or less. Concentration was performed to obtain a silver nanowire dispersion liquid (1) having a metal content of 0.45%.
About the silver nanowire of the obtained silver nanowire dispersion liquid (1), the average minor axis length and the average major axis length were measured as described above.
As a result, the average minor axis length was 28.5 nm and the average major axis length was 15.2 μm. Hereinafter, the notation “silver nanowire dispersion (1)” indicates the silver nanowire dispersion obtained by the above method.
(導電膜の作製)
 下記組成のアルコキシド化合物の溶液を60℃で1時間撹拌して均一になったことを確認した。得られたゾルゲル液の重量平均分子量(Mw)をGPC(ポリスチレン換算)で測定したところ、Mwは4,400であった。ゾルゲル溶液2.24部と上記調整された銀ナノワイヤ分散液(1)17.76部を混合し、さらに蒸留水と1-プロパノールで希釈して銀ナノワイヤ塗布液(1)を得た。得られた塗布液の溶剤比率は蒸留水:1-プロパノール=60:40であった。PET基板(厚み125μm)上にバーコート法で銀量が0.015g/m2、全固形分塗布量が0.120g/m2となるように銀ナノワイヤ塗布液(1)を塗布したのち、120℃で1分間乾燥して、銀ナノワイヤを含有する導電膜1を形成した。
(Preparation of conductive film)
The solution of the alkoxide compound having the following composition was stirred at 60 ° C. for 1 hour to confirm that the solution became uniform. When the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the obtained sol-gel solution was measured by GPC (polystyrene conversion), Mw was 4,400. 2.24 parts of the sol-gel solution and 17.76 parts of the prepared silver nanowire dispersion liquid (1) were mixed and further diluted with distilled water and 1-propanol to obtain a silver nanowire coating liquid (1). The solvent ratio of the obtained coating solution was distilled water: 1-propanol = 60: 40. PET substrate (thickness 125 [mu] m) amount of silver 0.015 g / m 2 by a bar coating method on, after the total solid content in the coating solution was coated silver nanowire coating solution (1) so that 0.120 g / m 2, It dried at 120 degreeC for 1 minute, and the electrically conductive film 1 containing a silver nanowire was formed.
<アルコキシド化合物の溶液>
・テトラエトキシシラン                        5.0部
(KBE-04、信越化学工業(株)製)
・1%酢酸水溶液                          11.0部
・蒸留水                               4.0部
<Solution of alkoxide compound>
・ Tetraethoxysilane 5.0 parts (KBE-04, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
・ 1% acetic acid aqueous solution 11.0 parts ・ Distilled water 4.0 parts
(導電膜のパターニング)
 導電膜1にフォトレジスト(TMSMR-8900LB:東京応化製)をスピンコートで塗布し、90℃で60秒間焼成した。次に、フォトマスクを用いてパターン露光(露光量:12mW/cm2、20秒)し、現像液(NMD-W:東京応化性)にて現像し、水洗、乾燥させた後に、120℃で60秒間焼成し、導電膜1上にパターニングされたフォトレジストを形成した。
 次に、銀エッチング液(SEA-2:関東化学製)に30秒浸漬後、水洗、乾燥させて、銀ナノワイヤをエッチングして、導電膜1に非導電部を形成した。その後、中性剥離液(PK-SFR8120:パーカーコーポーレーション製)を用いてフォトレジストを剥離し、その後、水洗、乾燥をさせて、櫛形電極パターン(L/S=200μm/200μm)にパターニングされた導電膜1を作製した。
(Patterning of conductive film)
A photoresist (TMSMR-8900LB: manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.) was applied to the conductive film 1 by spin coating and baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds. Next, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask (exposure amount: 12 mW / cm 2 , 20 seconds), developed with a developer (NMD-W: Tokyo Sensitivity), washed with water and dried, then at 120 ° C. A patterned photoresist was formed on the conductive film 1 by baking for 60 seconds.
Next, after being immersed in a silver etching solution (SEA-2: manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) for 30 seconds, washed with water and dried, the silver nanowires were etched to form a nonconductive portion in the conductive film 1. Thereafter, the photoresist is stripped using a neutral stripping solution (PK-SFR8120: manufactured by Parker Corporation), and then washed with water and dried to be patterned into a comb-shaped electrode pattern (L / S = 200 μm / 200 μm). A conductive film 1 was prepared.
(導電膜積層体の製造)
 次に、得られた導電膜付き透明基板上に、実施例2と同様にして、透明両面粘着シートS-1を貼り合せて、導電膜積層体(配線基板にも該当)T-3を得た。
(Manufacture of conductive film laminate)
Next, a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 was bonded to the obtained transparent substrate with a conductive film in the same manner as in Example 2 to obtain a conductive film laminate (also applicable to a wiring board) T-3. It was.
(評価方法2(寿命延長効果測定))
 得られた導電膜積層体を用いて、湿度85%、温度85度、圧力1.0atm、電圧100Vの条件で寿命測定(使用装置:エスペック(株)社製、EHS-221MD)を行った。
 評価方法としては、まず、トコフェロールを使用せずに上記実施例1の手順に従って透明両面粘着シートS-0を製造した。その後、導電膜付き透明基板上に、透明両面粘着シートS-0の一方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す一方の表面を積層面として貼り合せて、さらに透明両面粘着シートの他方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す他方の表面上にPETフィルム(膜厚:50μm)を貼り合せて比較導電膜積層体を得た。得られた比較導電膜積層体を用いて、上記条件で寿命測定を行い、導電膜間の抵抗値が10%上昇するまでの時間Xを測定した。
 次に、導電膜積層体(配線基板にも該当)T-3を用いて上記条件で寿命測定を行い、導電膜間の抵抗値が10%上昇するまでの時間Yを測定した。
 得られた時間Xおよび時間Yを用いて寿命の改善効果(Y/X)を計算した。
 実施例4で得られた配線基板の結果を、表1に示す。
(Evaluation method 2 (life extension effect measurement))
Using the obtained conductive film laminate, life measurement was performed under the conditions of a humidity of 85%, a temperature of 85 degrees, a pressure of 1.0 atm, and a voltage of 100 V (device used: EHS-221MD, manufactured by Espec Corp.).
As an evaluation method, first, a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 was produced according to the procedure of Example 1 without using tocopherol. Thereafter, the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 is peeled off on a transparent substrate with a conductive film, and one surface showing adhesiveness is bonded as a laminated surface, and further the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet The release film on the other side was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 μm) was bonded onto the other surface showing tackiness to obtain a comparative conductive film laminate. Using the obtained comparative conductive film laminate, the lifetime was measured under the above conditions, and the time X until the resistance value between the conductive films increased by 10% was measured.
Next, a lifetime measurement was performed using the conductive film laminate (also applicable to a wiring board) T-3 under the above conditions, and a time Y until the resistance value between the conductive films increased by 10% was measured.
The life improvement effect (Y / X) was calculated using the obtained time X and time Y.
Table 1 shows the results of the wiring board obtained in Example 4.
<実施例5>
 トコフェロールの代わりに以下の化合物A-1を使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様の手順に従って、配線基板T-4を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 5>
A wiring substrate T-4 was prepared in accordance with the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-1 was used instead of tocopherol, and evaluation of the evaluation method 1 was performed. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
<実施例6>
 トコフェロールの代わりに以下の化合物A-2を使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様手順に従って、配線基板T-5を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 6>
A wiring substrate T-5 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-2 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
<実施例7>
 トコフェロールの代わりに以下の化合物A-3を使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様の手順に従って、配線基板T-6を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 7>
A wiring board T-6 was produced in accordance with the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-3 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
<実施例8>
 トコフェロールの代わりに以下の化合物A-4を使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様の手順に従って、配線基板T-7を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 8>
A wiring board T-7 was produced in accordance with the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-4 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
<実施例9>
 銀量を24.2μg/mm2から0.011μg/mm2に変更した以外は、実施例1および5と同様の手順に従って、配線基板T-8を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 9>
A wiring board T-8 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 5 except that the amount of silver was changed from 24.2 μg / mm 2 to 0.011 μg / mm 2 , and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. did. The results are shown in Table 1.
<実施例10>
 トコフェロールの代わりに以下の化合物A-5に使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様手順に従って、配線基板T-9を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 10>
A wiring board T-9 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-5 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
<実施例11>
 トコフェロールの代わりに以下の化合物A-6に使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様手順に従って、配線基板T-9を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 11>
A wiring board T-9 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-6 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
<実施例12>
 トコフェロールの代わりに以下の化合物A-7に使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様手順に従って、配線基板T-10を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Example 12>
A wiring substrate T-10 was produced according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the following compound A-7 was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
<比較例1>
 トコフェロールを用いなかった以外は、実施例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-0を作製した。
 透明両面粘着シートS-1の代わりに透明両面粘着シートS-0を使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様の手順に従って、配線基板R-1を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Comparative Example 1>
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-0 was produced according to the same procedure as in Example 1 except that no tocopherol was used.
A wiring board R-1 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-0 was used instead of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. Carried out. The results are shown in Table 1.
<比較例2>
 実施例2の方法に従って、銀配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量は76.1μg/mm2となるように、金属配線の厚みを調整して、L/S=200μm/200μmの金属配線付き絶縁基板Cを得た。
 金属配線付き絶縁基板Aの代わりに金属配線付き絶縁基板Cを使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様の手順に従って、配線基板R-2を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Comparative example 2>
According to the method of Example 2, the thickness of the metal wiring is adjusted so that the amount of silver contained per unit area of the silver wiring is 76.1 μg / mm 2, and the metal wiring with L / S = 200 μm / 200 μm is attached. An insulating substrate C was obtained.
A wiring board R-2 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that the insulating board C with metal wiring was used instead of the insulating board A with metal wiring, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. . The results are shown in Table 1.
<比較例3>
 トコフェロールの代わりにアスコルビン酸に使用した以外は、実施例1および2と同様の手順に従って、配線基板R-3を作製し、上記評価方法1の評価を実施した。結果を表1に示す。
<Comparative Example 3>
A wiring board R-3 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Examples 1 and 2 except that ascorbic acid was used instead of tocopherol, and the evaluation method 1 was evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
 また、「剥離」とは評価中の加温過程においてシートが配線を被覆する能力を失い、湿熱で短絡したことを示す。
 また、実施例4は上記評価方法2で評価した結果であり、他の実施例および比較例は上記評価方法1で評価した結果である。
Further, “peeling” means that the sheet lost the ability to cover the wiring during the heating process under evaluation, and was short-circuited by wet heat.
Moreover, Example 4 is a result evaluated by the said evaluation method 2, and another Example and a comparative example are the results evaluated by the said evaluation method 1. FIG.
 上記表1に示すように、所定の化合物を使用した実施例2~12においては、優れた寿命延命効果が示され、絶縁特性の向上が確認された。
 特に、実施例2、5~8、10~12の比較から分かるように、式(5)で表される化合物または式(6)で表される化合物を使用した実施例5、6、10、および11において、より優れた効果が発現することが確認された。
As shown in Table 1 above, in Examples 2 to 12 using a predetermined compound, an excellent life extension effect was shown, and an improvement in insulation characteristics was confirmed.
In particular, as can be seen from the comparison of Examples 2, 5 to 8, and 10 to 12, Examples 5, 6, 10, and 10 using the compound represented by Formula (5) or the compound represented by Formula (6) In 11 and 11, it was confirmed that a more excellent effect was exhibited.
 一方、銀量が多い比較例2、および、所定の化合物を使用していない比較例3においては、絶縁特性の大きな向上は確認されなかった。 On the other hand, in Comparative Example 2 in which the amount of silver is large and in Comparative Example 3 in which a predetermined compound is not used, no significant improvement in the insulation characteristics was confirmed.
<<第2態様>>
(合成例1:透明両面粘着シートS-1の製造)
 アクリル共重合体の調製攪拌機、還流冷却器、温度計、滴下漏斗および窒素ガス導入口を備えた反応容器に、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート50質量部と、イソボルニルアクリレート25質量部と、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート15質量部と、アクリル酸2質量部とを酢酸エチル100質量部に溶解し、窒素置換後に内温70℃までに加温した。
 この反応液に2,2‘-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)0.1部と酢酸エチル10部とを予め溶解させた溶液をゆっくり滴下しながら、3時間攪拌した。その後さらに内温80℃に加温し、2,2‘-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)0.1部と酢酸エチル10部とを予め溶解させた溶液をゆっくり滴下しながら、3時間攪拌して質量平均分子量40万のアクリル共重合体(P-1)を得た。
 次に、上記アクリル共重合体(P-1)と、イソシアネート系架橋剤(日本ポリウレタン社製コロネートL-45、固形分45%)0.7重量部を添加し、5分間攪拌した。これにDL-α-トコフェロール(酸化還元電位0.56V)を酢酸エチル/トルエン混合溶剤(酢酸エチル/トルエン=1/1)に溶解した溶液を添加し、5分間攪拌して、アクリル共重合体固形分100質量部に対してDL-α-トコフェロール0.5質量部の粘着剤組成物を得た。
 上記粘着剤組成物を、シリコーン化合物で片面を剥離処理した厚さ50μmのPETフィルム上に乾燥後の厚さが50μmになるように塗工して、75℃で5分間乾燥した。得られた粘着シートと、シリコーン化合物で片面を剥離処理した厚さ38μmのPETフィルムを貼り合わせた。その後23℃で5日間熟成し厚さ50μmの透明両面粘着シート(基材レス粘着シート)S-1を得た。
<< Second Aspect >>
(Synthesis Example 1: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-1)
Preparation of acrylic copolymer In a reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, reflux condenser, thermometer, dropping funnel and nitrogen gas inlet, 50 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 25 parts by mass of isobornyl acrylate, and 2-hydroxy 15 parts by mass of ethyl acrylate and 2 parts by mass of acrylic acid were dissolved in 100 parts by mass of ethyl acetate, and heated to an internal temperature of 70 ° C. after substitution with nitrogen.
To this reaction liquid, a solution prepared by dissolving 0.1 part of 2,2′-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) and 10 parts of ethyl acetate in advance was slowly added dropwise and stirred for 3 hours. Thereafter, the internal temperature was further raised to 80 ° C., and a solution prepared by previously dissolving 0.1 part of 2,2′-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) and 10 parts of ethyl acetate was slowly added dropwise for 3 hours. By stirring, an acrylic copolymer (P-1) having a mass average molecular weight of 400,000 was obtained.
Next, 0.7 parts by weight of the acrylic copolymer (P-1) and an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent (Coronate L-45 manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Co., Ltd., 45% solid content) were added and stirred for 5 minutes. To this was added a solution prepared by dissolving DL-α-tocopherol (redox potential 0.56V) in an ethyl acetate / toluene mixed solvent (ethyl acetate / toluene = 1/1), and the mixture was stirred for 5 minutes. A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition having 0.5 parts by mass of DL-α-tocopherol with respect to 100 parts by mass of the solid content was obtained.
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition was coated on a 50 μm-thick PET film having one surface peel-treated with a silicone compound so that the thickness after drying was 50 μm, and dried at 75 ° C. for 5 minutes. The obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet was bonded to a PET film having a thickness of 38 μm, one side of which was peeled off with a silicone compound. Thereafter, it was aged at 23 ° C. for 5 days to obtain a transparent double-sided PSA sheet (base material-less PSA sheet) S-1 having a thickness of 50 μm.
(合成例2:透明両面粘着シートS-2の製造)
 2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレートの使用量を15質量部から20質量部に、アクリル酸の使用量を2質量部から0質量部に変更した以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-2を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 2: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-2)
Transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 except that the amount of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate used was changed from 15 parts by weight to 20 parts by weight and the amount of acrylic acid used was changed from 2 parts by weight to 0 parts by weight. S-2 was produced.
(合成例3:透明両面粘着シートS-3の製造)
 2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレートの使用量を15質量部から25質量部に、アクリル酸の使用量を2質量部から0質量部に変更した以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-3を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 3: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-3)
Transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1, except that the amount of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate used was changed from 15 parts by weight to 25 parts by weight and the amount of acrylic acid used was changed from 2 parts by weight to 0 parts by weight. S-3 was produced.
(合成例4:透明両面粘着シートS-4の製造)
 2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレートの使用量を15質量部から30質量部に、アクリル酸の使用量を2質量部から0質量部に変更した以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-4を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 4: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-4)
Transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1, except that the amount of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate used was changed from 15 parts by weight to 30 parts by weight and the amount of acrylic acid used was changed from 2 parts by weight to 0 parts by weight. S-4 was produced.
(合成例5:透明両面粘着シートS-5の製造)
 2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレートの使用量を15質量部から25質量部に変更し、さらに、モノマーとしてメチルアクリレート25質量部およびブチルアクリレート25質量部を追加してアクリル共重合体の重合を行った以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-5を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 5: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-5)
The amount of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate used was changed from 15 parts by weight to 25 parts by weight, and 25 parts by weight of methyl acrylate and 25 parts by weight of butyl acrylate were added as monomers to polymerize the acrylic copolymer. According to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1, a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-5 was produced.
(合成例6:透明両面粘着シートS-6の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例5と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-7を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 6: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-6)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-7 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 5 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
(合成例7:透明両面粘着シートS-7の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物C(酸化還元電位:1.17V)に変更した以外は、合成例5と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-7を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 7: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-7)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-7 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 5 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound C (redox potential: 1.17 V).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
(合成例8:透明両面粘着シートS-8の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-8を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 8: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-8)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-8 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1, except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
(合成例9:透明両面粘着シートS-9の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例2と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-9を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 9: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-9)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-9 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 2 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
(合成例10:透明両面粘着シートS-10の製造)
 2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート50質量部、イソボルニルアクリレート25質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート15質量部、およびアクリル酸2質量部のモノマーの代わり、メチルアクリレート30質量部と、ブチルアクリレート70質量部と、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート8質量部と、アクリル酸2質量部を使用してアクリル共重合体の重合を行った以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-10を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 10: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-10)
Instead of 50 parts by weight of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 25 parts by weight of isobornyl acrylate, 15 parts by weight of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and 2 parts by weight of acrylic acid, 30 parts by weight of methyl acrylate, 70 parts by weight of butyl acrylate, A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-10 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 except that the acrylic copolymer was polymerized using 8 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate and 2 parts by mass of acrylic acid. .
(合成例11:透明両面粘着シートS-11の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例10と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-11を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 11: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-11)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-11 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 10, except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
(合成例12:透明両面粘着シートS-12の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物C(酸化還元電位:1.17V)に変更した以外は、合成例10と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-12を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 12: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-12)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-12 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 10 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound C (redox potential: 1.17 V).
(合成例13:透明両面粘着シートS-13の製造)
 2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート50質量部、イソボルニルアクリレート25質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート15質量部、およびアクリル酸2質量部のモノマーの代わり、ブチルアクリレート75質量部と、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート25質量部とを使用してアクリル共重合体の重合を行った以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-13を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 13: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-13)
Instead of 50 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 25 parts by mass of isobornyl acrylate, 15 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and 2 parts by mass of acrylic acid, 75 parts by mass of butyl acrylate and 25 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-13 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 except that the acrylic copolymer was polymerized using the same part.
(合成例14:透明両面粘着シートS-14の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例13と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-14を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 14: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-14)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-14 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 13 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
(合成例15:透明両面粘着シートS-15の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物C(酸化還元電位:1.17V)に変更した以外は、合成例13と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-15を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 15: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-15)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-15 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 13, except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound C (redox potential: 1.17 V).
(合成例16:透明両面粘着シートS-16の製造)
 2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート50質量部、イソボルニルアクリレート25質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート15質量部、およびアクリル酸2質量部のモノマーの代わり、ブチルアクリレート75質量部と、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート15質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート6質量部と、アクリル酸1.5質量部とを使用してアクリル共重合体の重合を行った以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-16を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 16: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-16)
Instead of monomers of 50 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 25 parts by mass of isobornyl acrylate, 15 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and 2 parts by mass of acrylic acid, 75 parts by mass of butyl acrylate and 15 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S- was prepared in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1 except that the acrylic copolymer was polymerized using 6 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate and 1.5 parts by mass of acrylic acid. 16 was produced.
(合成例17:透明両面粘着シートS-17の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例16と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-17を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 17: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-17)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-17 was produced in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 16 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
(合成例18:透明両面粘着シートS-18の製造)
 反応容器中で、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート50質量部と、イソボルニルアクリレート25質量部と、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート15質量部と、アクリル酸2質量部と、重合開始剤としてイルガキュア651(チバ・スペシャルティ・ケミカルズ製)0.05質量部とを混合し、窒素置換後、低圧水銀ランプで7分間紫外線を照射し、粘度2000mPa・s程度の粘着剤組成物を得た。このあと、粘着剤組成物にDL-α-トコフェロール(酸化還元電位0.56V)を酢酸エチル/トルエン混合溶剤(酢酸エチル/トルエン=1/1)に溶解した溶液を添加した。このとき、粘着剤固形成分100質量部に対してDL-α-トコフェロールが0.5質量部になるように添加した。
 得られた粘着剤組成物を厚さ50μmのPETフィルム上に乾燥後の厚さが50μmになるように塗工し、溶剤を乾燥させた。得られた粘着シートと、シリコーン化合物で片面を剥離処理した厚さ38μmのPETフィルムを貼り合わせ、両面から低圧水銀ランプを5分間照射し、透明両面粘着シートS-18を得た。
(Synthesis Example 18: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-18)
In a reaction vessel, 50 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 25 parts by mass of isobornyl acrylate, 15 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, 2 parts by mass of acrylic acid, and Irgacure 651 (Ciba Specialty) as a polymerization initiator (Made by Chemicals) 0.05 part by mass was mixed, and after substitution with nitrogen, UV irradiation was performed with a low-pressure mercury lamp for 7 minutes to obtain an adhesive composition having a viscosity of about 2000 mPa · s. Thereafter, a solution of DL-α-tocopherol (redox potential 0.56 V) dissolved in an ethyl acetate / toluene mixed solvent (ethyl acetate / toluene = 1/1) was added to the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. At this time, DL-α-tocopherol was added to 0.5 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the adhesive solid component.
The obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive composition was coated on a 50 μm thick PET film so that the thickness after drying was 50 μm, and the solvent was dried. The obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and a 38 μm-thick PET film peeled from one side with a silicone compound were bonded together, and irradiated with a low-pressure mercury lamp from both sides for 5 minutes to obtain a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-18.
(合成例19:透明両面粘着シートS-19の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例18と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-19を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 19: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-19)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-19 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 18 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
(合成例20:透明両面粘着シートS-20の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物C(酸化還元電位:1.17V)に変更した以外は、合成例18と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-20を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 20: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-20)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-20 was produced in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 18 except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound C (redox potential: 1.17 V).
(合成例21:透明両面粘着シートS-21の製造)
 反応容器に、ブチルアクリレート56質量部、シクロヘキシルアクリレート13質量部、4-ヒドロキシブチルアクリレート23質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート8質量部と、イルガキュア651(0.05質量部)とを投入したあと窒素雰囲気下で攪拌しながら紫外線を照射した。
 これにコロネートL55EおよびDL-α-トコフェロールを、粘着剤固形成分100質量部に対して、それぞれ0.1質量部および0.5質量部添加した後、攪拌し、粘着剤組成物を得た。
 上記粘着剤組成物を厚さ50μmのPETフィルム上に乾燥後の厚さが50μmになるように塗工し、溶剤を乾燥させた。得られた粘着シートと、シリコーン化合物で片面を剥離処理した厚さ38μmのPETフィルムを貼り合わせ、両面から低圧水銀ランプを5分間照射し、透明両面粘着シートS-21を得た。
(Synthesis Example 21: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-21)
A reaction vessel was charged with 56 parts by mass of butyl acrylate, 13 parts by mass of cyclohexyl acrylate, 23 parts by mass of 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate, 8 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and Irgacure 651 (0.05 parts by mass), and then nitrogen. Ultraviolet rays were irradiated while stirring under an atmosphere.
To this, Coronate L55E and DL-α-tocopherol were added in an amount of 0.1 parts by mass and 0.5 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the adhesive solid component, respectively, and then stirred to obtain an adhesive composition.
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition was applied onto a 50 μm thick PET film so that the thickness after drying was 50 μm, and the solvent was dried. The obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and a 38 μm-thick PET film peeled from one side with a silicone compound were bonded together, and irradiated with a low-pressure mercury lamp from both sides for 5 minutes to obtain a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-21.
(合成例22:透明両面粘着シートS-22の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物B(酸化還元電位:1.09V)に変更した以外は、合成例21と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-22を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 22: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-22)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-22 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 21, except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound B (redox potential: 1.09 V).
(合成例23:透明両面粘着シートS-23の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを化合物C(酸化還元電位:1.17V)に変更した以外は、合成例21と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-23を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 23: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-23)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-23 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 21, except that DL-α-tocopherol was changed to Compound C (redox potential: 1.17 V).
(合成例24:透明両面粘着シートS-24の製造)
 化合物Bの含有量を0.5質量部から0.1質量部にした以外は、実施例6と同様に透明両面粘着シートS-24を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 24: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-24)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-24 was produced in the same manner as in Example 6 except that the content of Compound B was changed from 0.5 parts by mass to 0.1 parts by mass.
(合成例25:透明両面粘着シートS-25の製造)
 化合物Bの含有量を0.5質量部から1.0質量部にした以外は、実施例6と同様に透明両面粘着シートS-25を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 25: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-25)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-25 was produced in the same manner as in Example 6 except that the content of Compound B was changed from 0.5 parts by mass to 1.0 part by mass.
(合成例26:透明両面粘着シートS-26の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-26を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 26: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-26)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-26 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例27:透明両面粘着シートS-27の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例2と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-27を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 27: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-27)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-27 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 2 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例28:透明両面粘着シートS-28の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例3と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-28を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 28: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-28)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-28 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 3 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例29:透明両面粘着シートS-29の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例4と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-29を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 29: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-29)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-29 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 4 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例30:透明両面粘着シートS-30の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例5と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-30を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 30: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-30)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-30 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 5 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例31:透明両面粘着シートS-31の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールの代わりに化合物D(酸化還元電位0.17V)を使用した以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-31を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 31: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-31)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-31 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 except that Compound D (redox potential 0.17 V) was used instead of DL-α-tocopherol.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(合成例32:透明両面粘着シートS-32の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールの代わりに化合物E(酸化還元電位1.39V)を使用した以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-32を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 32: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-32)
A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-32 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 except that Compound E (redox potential 1.39 V) was used instead of DL-α-tocopherol.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
(合成例33:透明両面粘着シートS-33の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例10と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-33を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 33: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-33)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-33 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 10 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例34:透明両面粘着シートS-34の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例13と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-34を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 34: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-34)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-34 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 13 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例35:透明両面粘着シートS-35の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例16と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-35を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 35: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-35)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-35 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 16 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
(合成例36:透明両面粘着シートS-36の製造)
 2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート50質量部、イソボルニルアクリレート25質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート15質量部、およびアクリル酸2質量部のモノマーの代わり、ブチルアクリレート60質量部と、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート25質量部、メチルメタクリレート15質量部とを使用してアクリル共重合体の重合を行い、DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-36を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 36: Production of transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-36)
In place of 50 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 25 parts by mass of isobornyl acrylate, 15 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and 2 parts by mass of acrylic acid, 60 parts by mass of butyl acrylate and 25 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-36 was prepared according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1, except that 15 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate was used to polymerize the acrylic copolymer and DL-α-tocopherol was not used. Manufactured.
(合成例37:透明両面粘着シートS-37の製造)
 2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート50質量部、イソボルニルアクリレート25質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート15質量部、およびアクリル酸2質量部のモノマーの代わり、ブチルアクリレート60質量部と、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート25質量部、メチルメタクリレート15質量部とを使用してアクリル共重合体の重合を行った以外は、合成例1と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-37を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 37: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-37)
In place of 50 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, 25 parts by mass of isobornyl acrylate, 15 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and 2 parts by mass of acrylic acid, 60 parts by mass of butyl acrylate and 25 parts by mass of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-37 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 1 except that 15 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate was used to polymerize the acrylic copolymer.
(合成例38:透明両面粘着シートS-38の製造)
 DL-α-トコフェロールを使用しなかった以外は、合成例21と同様の手順に従って、透明両面粘着シートS-38を製造した。
(Synthesis Example 38: Production of transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-38)
A transparent double-sided PSA sheet S-38 was produced according to the same procedure as in Synthesis Example 21 except that DL-α-tocopherol was not used.
<実施例1A>
 PET基板上に、スクリーン印刷法により、銀ペースト(アサヒ化学研究所製 LS-450-7HL)を用いて、L/S=40μm/40μmのストライプ状の銀配線パターンを形成した。その後130℃で30分加熱処理を行い、銀配線を硬化させることで、銀配線を備える金属配線付き絶縁基板を製造した。
<Example 1A>
A stripe-shaped silver wiring pattern of L / S = 40 μm / 40 μm was formed on a PET substrate using a silver paste (LS-450-7HL manufactured by Asahi Chemical Research Laboratory) by screen printing. Thereafter, a heat treatment was performed at 130 ° C. for 30 minutes to cure the silver wiring, thereby manufacturing an insulating substrate with metal wiring having silver wiring.
(配線基板の製造)
 得られた金属配線付き絶縁基板上に、透明両面粘着シートS-1の一方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す一方の表面を積層面として貼り合せて、さらに透明両面粘着シートの他方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す他方の表面上にPETフィルム(膜厚:50μm)を貼り合せて配線基板を得た。その後、得られた配線基板を45℃、0.5MPaの条件下で20分オートクレープ処理を行った。これにより配線基板T-1を得た。
 得られた配線基板T-1に関して、以下の寿命測定を行った。
(Manufacture of wiring boards)
On the obtained insulating substrate with metal wiring, the release film on one side of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1 is peeled off, and one surface showing adhesiveness is bonded as a laminated surface, and further a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet The release film on the other side of the film was peeled off, and a PET film (film thickness: 50 μm) was bonded onto the other surface exhibiting adhesiveness to obtain a wiring board. Thereafter, the obtained wiring board was subjected to autoclave treatment at 45 ° C. and 0.5 MPa for 20 minutes. As a result, a wiring board T-1 was obtained.
The following lifetime measurement was performed on the obtained wiring board T-1.
(評価方法(寿命延長効果評価))
 得られた配線基板T-1を用いて、湿度85%、温度85度、圧力1.0atm、電圧15Vの条件で寿命測定(使用装置:エスペック(株)社製、EHS-221MD)を行った。銀配線間の抵抗値が1×105Ωを下回るまでの時間Xを測定し、以下の基準に従って評価した。実用上、AまたはBであることが必要である。
「A」:時間Xが40時間以上
「B」:時間Xが30時間以上40時間未満
「C」:時間Xが30時間未満
 実施例1Aで得られた配線基板の結果を、表2に示す。
(Evaluation method (life extension effect evaluation))
Using the obtained wiring board T-1, life measurement was performed under the conditions of a humidity of 85%, a temperature of 85 degrees, a pressure of 1.0 atm, and a voltage of 15 V (device used: EHS-221MD, manufactured by Espec Corp.). . The time X until the resistance value between the silver wires fell below 1 × 10 5 Ω was measured and evaluated according to the following criteria. Practically, it must be A or B.
“A”: Time X is 40 hours or more “B”: Time X is 30 hours or more and less than 40 hours “C”: Time X is less than 30 hours Table 2 shows the results of the wiring board obtained in Example 1A. .
(環境試験(白化評価))
 透明両面粘着シートS-1~S-38を所定の大きさ(長さ5cm×幅4cm×厚み50μm)に切断し、一方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がして、粘着性を示す一方の表面を積層面としてガラス基板に貼り合せて、さらに透明両面粘着シートの他方の片面上の剥離フィルムを剥がし、PET基板(厚み:50μm)を貼り付けて、評価用サンプルを作製した。
 評価用サンプルを65℃、95%RHの条件で72時間放置した。その後、評価用サンプルを23℃、50%RHの条件に放置した際に、評価用サンプル中の透明粘着層のヘイズが3%以下に達するまでの時間を測定し、以下の基準に従って評価した。実用上、AまたはBであれば、耐白化性に優れる。
「A」:時間Xが6時間未満
「B」:時間Xが6時間以上12時間以下
「C」:時間Xが12時間超
 なお、ヘイズは、村上色彩技術研究所製「HR-100型」を用いて測定した。
(Environmental test (whitening evaluation))
The transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets S-1 to S-38 are cut into a predetermined size (length 5 cm × width 4 cm × thickness 50 μm), the release film on one side is peeled off, and one surface showing adhesiveness is removed. A laminated surface was attached to a glass substrate, the release film on the other side of the transparent double-sided PSA sheet was peeled off, and a PET substrate (thickness: 50 μm) was attached to prepare a sample for evaluation.
The sample for evaluation was left for 72 hours at 65 ° C. and 95% RH. Then, when the sample for evaluation was allowed to stand at 23 ° C. and 50% RH, the time until the haze of the transparent adhesive layer in the sample for evaluation reached 3% or less was measured and evaluated according to the following criteria. Practically, if it is A or B, it is excellent in whitening resistance.
“A”: Time X is less than 6 hours “B”: Time X is 6 hours or more and 12 hours or less “C”: Time X is more than 12 hours Haze is “HR-100 type” manufactured by Murakami Color Research Laboratory It measured using.
<実施例2A~25A、および、比較例1A~15A>
 表2に示すように、透明両面粘着シートS-1の代わりに上述した透明両面粘着シートS-2~S-38を用いて、実施例1Aと同様の手順で配線基板を製造し、寿命延長効果測定および環境試験を行った。結果を表2にまとめて示す。
<Examples 2A to 25A and Comparative Examples 1A to 15A>
As shown in Table 2, using the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheets S-2 to S-38 described above in place of the transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet S-1, a wiring board was manufactured in the same procedure as in Example 1A, and the life was extended. Effectiveness measurements and environmental tests were performed. The results are summarized in Table 2.
<実施例26A>
 L/Sを30μm/30μmにした以外は、実施例6Aと同じように配線基板を作製し、実施例1Aと同一の寿命測定を行った。
<Example 26A>
A wiring board was produced in the same manner as in Example 6A, except that L / S was changed to 30 μm / 30 μm, and the same life measurement as in Example 1A was performed.
 表2中、「アクリル共重合体のモノマー成分」欄の各成分欄中の数値は、質量部を表す。
 表2中、「化合物」欄の含有量欄中の数値は、質量部を表す。
In Table 2, the numerical value in each component column in the “monomer component of acrylic copolymer” column represents parts by mass.
In Table 2, the numerical value in the content column of the “compound” column represents parts by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
 表2の結果より、本発明の第2態様に該当する実施例1A~26Aにおいては、白化評価および寿命延長効果評価において優れた結果が得られた。
 一方、所定の酸化還元電子を示さない化合物を使用していない、または、透明粘着層が所定の特性を示さない比較例1A~15Aにおいては、白化評価および寿命延長効果評価の少なくとも一方の評価が劣っていた。
From the results of Table 2, in Examples 1A to 26A corresponding to the second aspect of the present invention, excellent results were obtained in the whitening evaluation and the life extension effect evaluation.
On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 1A to 15A in which a compound that does not exhibit a predetermined redox electron is not used or the transparent adhesive layer does not exhibit a predetermined characteristic, at least one of whitening evaluation and life extension effect evaluation is performed. It was inferior.
 10,100 配線基板
 12,12a,12b 絶縁基板
 14,14a,14b 金属配線
 16,16b 金属配線付き絶縁基板
 18 銀イオン拡散抑制層
 19 透明粘着層
 20 絶縁層
 30 フレキシブル回路
 34 透明電極層
 36 リード配線
 38 アクティブエリア
 40 非アクティブエリア
 200 絶縁層付き配線基板
 300,400,600 導電膜積層体
 32,302 透明基板
 304,304a,304b 導電膜
 42,306,306a,306b 透明両面粘着シート
 500 タッチパネル部材
 
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10,100 Wiring board 12,12a, 12b Insulating board 14,14a, 14b Metal wiring 16,16b Insulating board with metal wiring 18 Silver ion diffusion suppression layer 19 Transparent adhesion layer 20 Insulating layer 30 Flexible circuit 34 Transparent electrode layer 36 Lead wiring 38 Active area 40 Inactive area 200 Wiring substrate with insulating layer 300, 400, 600 Conductive film laminate 32, 302 Transparent substrate 304, 304a, 304b Conductive film 42, 306, 306a, 306b Transparent double-sided adhesive sheet 500 Touch panel member

Claims (25)

  1.  透明基板と、前記透明基板上に配置された銀を含む導電膜と、前記導電膜上に貼り合わされた透明両面粘着シートとを備える導電膜積層体であって、
     前記導電膜の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量が50μg/mm2以下であり、
     前記透明両面粘着シートが、透明樹脂、並びに、式(1)~式(3)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物を含有する、導電膜積層体。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    (式(1)中、R1~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。Zは、水素原子、アシル基、またはRzOC(=O)基を表す。Rzは、脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基を表す。ただし、R1~R5の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上である。なお、R1~R5は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     式(2)中、R6~R8は、それぞれ独立に、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。ただし、R6~R8の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。
     式(3)中、R9~R12は、それぞれ独立に、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアリール基、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。ただし、R9~R12の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。)
    A conductive film laminate comprising a transparent substrate, a conductive film containing silver disposed on the transparent substrate, and a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet bonded to the conductive film,
    The amount of silver contained per unit area of the conductive film is 50 μg / mm 2 or less,
    A conductive film laminate, wherein the transparent double-sided PSA sheet contains a transparent resin and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    (In the formula (1), R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group optionally having a hetero atom. Z represents a hydrogen atom, an acyl group, or RzOC (═O) group, wherein Rz represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, provided that the total number of carbon atoms contained in each of R 1 to R 5 is 4 or more. R 1 to R 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    In the formula (2), R 6 to R 8 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group obtained by combining these. However, the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 6 to R 8 is 6 or more.
    In formula (3), R 9 to R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group that may contain a heteroatom, an aryl group that may contain a heteroatom, or a combination thereof. However, the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 9 to R 12 is 6 or more. )
  2.  前記化合物が、式(4)~式(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、請求項1に記載の導電膜積層体。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    (式(4)中、R1~R3およびR14~R15は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。Zは、水素原子、アシル基、またはRzOC(=O)基を表す。Rzは、脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基を表す。ただし、R1、R2、R14およびR15のうち少なくとも一つに含まれる炭素原子の数が1~40であり、R1、R2、R14およびR15の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上である。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    (式(5)中、R31~R38は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R31~R38の各基の分子量の合計は24以上である。R39は、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の2価の脂肪族炭化水素基を表す。R31~R38はそれぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     式(6)中、R41~R44は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R41~R44の各基の分子量の合計は40以上である。また、R41~R44は、それぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     Lは、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい2価~3価の炭化水素基、-S-、またはこれらを組みあわせた基を表す。
     nは、2または3の整数を表す。)
    The conductive film laminate according to claim 1, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (4) to (6).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    (In the formula (4), R 1 to R 3 and R 14 to R 15 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group that may have a hetero atom. Z represents hydrogen. Represents an atom, an acyl group, or an RzOC (═O) group, wherein Rz represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, provided that at least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 And the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 is 4 or more.)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    (In the formula (5), R 31 to R 38 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. R 31 to R 38 The total molecular weight of each group is at least 24. R 39 represents a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom, and R 31 to R 38 are bonded to each other. To form a ring.
    In the formula (6), R 41 to R 44 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. The total molecular weight of each group of R 41 to R 44 is 40 or more. R 41 to R 44 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    L represents a divalent to trivalent hydrocarbon group which may contain a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these.
    n represents an integer of 2 or 3. )
  3.  前記化合物が、前記式(5)で表される化合物および前記式(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、請求項1または2に記載の導電膜積層体。 The conductive film laminate according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by the formula (5) and a compound represented by the formula (6).
  4.  前記化合物の総質量Aと前記透明樹脂の総質量Cとの質量比(A/C)が、0.0001~0.1である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の導電膜積層体。 The conductive film according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a mass ratio (A / C) of a total mass A of the compound and a total mass C of the transparent resin is 0.0001 to 0.1. Laminated body.
  5.  前記導電膜が、銀または銀合金からなる金属ナノワイヤを含有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の導電膜積層体。 The conductive film laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the conductive film contains metal nanowires made of silver or a silver alloy.
  6.  前記透明樹脂が、アクリル系粘着剤を含む、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の導電膜積層体。 The conductive film laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the transparent resin contains an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.
  7.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の導電膜積層体を含むタッチパネル。 A touch panel comprising the conductive film laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
  8.  絶縁基板と、前記絶縁基板上に配置された銀を含む金属配線と、前記金属配線上に配置された銀イオン拡散抑制層とを備える配線基板であって、
     前記金属配線の単位面積当たりに含まれる銀量が50μg/mm2以下であり、
     前記銀イオン拡散抑制層が、絶縁樹脂、並びに、式(1)~式(3)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物を含有する、配線基板。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

    (式(1)中、R1~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。Zは、水素原子、アシル基、またはRzOC(=O)基を表す。Rzは、脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基を表す。ただし、R1~R5の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上である。なお、R1~R5は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     式(2)中、R6~R8は、それぞれ独立に、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。ただし、R6~R8の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。
     式(3)中、R9~R12は、それぞれ独立に、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアリール基、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。ただし、R9~R12の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。)
    A wiring board comprising: an insulating substrate; a metal wiring including silver disposed on the insulating substrate; and a silver ion diffusion suppressing layer disposed on the metal wiring,
    The amount of silver contained per unit area of the metal wiring is 50 μg / mm 2 or less,
    The wiring board, wherein the silver ion diffusion suppressing layer contains an insulating resin and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1) to (3).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

    (In the formula (1), R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group optionally having a hetero atom. Z represents a hydrogen atom, an acyl group, or RzOC (═O) group, wherein Rz represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, provided that the total number of carbon atoms contained in each of R 1 to R 5 is 4 or more. R 1 to R 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    In the formula (2), R 6 to R 8 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group obtained by combining these. However, the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 6 to R 8 is 6 or more.
    In formula (3), R 9 to R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group that may contain a heteroatom, an aryl group that may contain a heteroatom, or a combination thereof. However, the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 9 to R 12 is 6 or more. )
  9.  前記化合物が、式(4)~式(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、請求項8に記載の配線基板。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

    (式(4)中、R1~R3およびR1415は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。Zは、水素原子、アシル基、またはRzOC(=O)基を表す。Rzは、脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基を表す。ただし、R1、R2、R14およびR15のうち少なくとも一つに含まれる炭素原子の数が1~40であり、R1、R2、R14およびR15の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上である。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

    (式(5)中、R31~R38は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、または、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R31~R38の各基の分子量の合計は24以上である。R39は、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の2価の脂肪族炭化水素基を表す。R31~R38はそれぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     式(6)中、R41~R44は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R41~R44の各基の分子量の合計は40以上である。また、R41~R44は、それぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     Lは、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい2価~3価の炭化水素基、-S-、またはこれらを組みあわせた基を表す。
     nは、2または3の整数を表す。)
    The wiring board according to claim 8, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (4) to (6).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

    (In the formula (4), R 1 to R 3 and R 14 to 15 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group that may have a hetero atom. Z represents a hydrogen atom. , An acyl group, or an RzOC (═O) group, wherein Rz represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, provided that at least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 The number of carbon atoms contained is 1 to 40, and the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 1 , R 2 , R 14 and R 15 is 4 or more.)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

    (In the formula (5), R 31 to R 38 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. R 31 to R 38 The total molecular weight of each group is at least 24. R 39 represents a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom, and R 31 to R 38 are bonded to each other. To form a ring.
    In the formula (6), R 41 to R 44 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. The total molecular weight of each group of R 41 to R 44 is 40 or more. R 41 to R 44 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    L represents a divalent to trivalent hydrocarbon group which may contain a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these.
    n represents an integer of 2 or 3. )
  10.  前記化合物が、前記式(5)で表される化合物および前記式(6)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される、請求項8または9に記載の配線基板。 The wiring board according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by the formula (5) and a compound represented by the formula (6).
  11.  前記化合物の総質量Aと前記絶縁樹脂の総質量Bとの質量比(A/B)が、0.0001~0.1である、請求項8~10のいずれか1項に記載の配線基板。 The wiring board according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein a mass ratio (A / B) of a total mass A of the compound and a total mass B of the insulating resin is 0.0001 to 0.1. .
  12.  請求項8~11のいずれか1項に記載の配線基板を備える電子機器。 An electronic device comprising the wiring board according to any one of claims 8 to 11.
  13.  透明樹脂、並びに、式(1)、式(2)および式(3)で表される化合物群から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物を含有する、透明両面粘着シート。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

    (式(1)中、R1~R5は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。Zは、水素原子、アシル基、またはRzOC(=O)基を表す。Rzは、脂肪族炭化水素基または芳香族炭化水素基を表す。ただし、R1~R5の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は4以上である。なお、R1~R5は互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     式(2)中、R6~R8は、それぞれ独立に、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、またはこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。ただし、R6~R8の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。
     式(3)中、R9~R12は、それぞれ独立に、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよいアリール基、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。ただし、R9~R12の各基中に含まれる炭素原子の数の合計は6以上である。)
    A transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet containing a transparent resin and at least one compound selected from the group of compounds represented by formula (1), formula (2) and formula (3).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

    (In Formula (1), R 1 to R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group optionally having a hetero atom. Z represents a hydrogen atom, an acyl group, or RzOC ( Rz represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, provided that the total number of carbon atoms contained in each of R 1 to R 5 is 4 or more. R 1 to R 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    In the formula (2), R 6 to R 8 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, or a group obtained by combining these. However, the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 6 to R 8 is 6 or more.
    In formula (3), R 9 to R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group that may contain a heteroatom, an aryl group that may contain a heteroatom, or a combination thereof. However, the total number of carbon atoms contained in each group of R 9 to R 12 is 6 or more. )
  14.  絶縁基板と、
     前記絶縁基板上に配置された、銀を含む複数の金属配線と、
     前記金属配線と直接接触して前記金属配線上に配置された透明粘着層とを備える配線基板であって、
     隣り合う前記金属配線間の距離の最小値が50μm未満であり、
     前記透明粘着層には、酸化還元電位が0.40~1.30Vの化合物、および、粘着剤が含有され、
     前記透明粘着層が、以下環境試験において時間Xが12時間以下を示す透明粘着層である、配線基板。
    (環境試験は、前記透明粘着層(長さ5cm×幅4cm×厚み50μm)を基板上に配置し、前記透明粘着層上にPET基板(厚み50μm)をさらに配置して評価用サンプルを作製し、前記評価用サンプルを65℃、95%RHの条件で72時間放置し、その後、評価用サンプルを23℃、50%RHの環境下で放置して、前記透明粘着層のヘイズが3%に達するまでの時間Xを測定する。)
    An insulating substrate;
    A plurality of metal wirings including silver, disposed on the insulating substrate;
    A wiring board comprising a transparent adhesive layer disposed on the metal wiring in direct contact with the metal wiring,
    The minimum value of the distance between the adjacent metal wirings is less than 50 μm,
    The transparent adhesive layer contains a compound having a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V, and an adhesive.
    The wiring substrate, wherein the transparent adhesive layer is a transparent adhesive layer whose time X is 12 hours or less in an environmental test.
    (In the environmental test, the transparent adhesive layer (length 5 cm × width 4 cm × thickness 50 μm) is arranged on a substrate, and a PET substrate (thickness 50 μm) is further arranged on the transparent adhesive layer to prepare an evaluation sample. The evaluation sample is allowed to stand for 72 hours under conditions of 65 ° C. and 95% RH, and then the evaluation sample is allowed to stand in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH so that the haze of the transparent adhesive layer is 3%. Measure time X to reach.)
  15.  前記化合物が、フェノール化合物を含む、請求項14に記載の配線基板。 The wiring board according to claim 14, wherein the compound contains a phenol compound.
  16.  前記化合物が、酸化還元電位が0.50~1.20Vのフェノール化合物を含む、請求項14または15に記載の配線基板。 The wiring board according to claim 14 or 15, wherein the compound contains a phenol compound having an oxidation-reduction potential of 0.50 to 1.20V.
  17.  前記化合物が、式(1A)~式(3A)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを含む、請求項14~16のいずれか1項に記載の配線基板。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

    (式(1A)中、R11a~R15aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R11a~R15aの各基の分子量の合計は21以上である。また、R11a~R15aは、各々互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     式(2A)中、R16a~R23aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R16a~R23aの各基の分子量の合計は24以上である。また、R16a~R23aは、各々互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。R24aは、水素原子、または、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
     式(3A)中、R25a~R28aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R25a~R28aの各基の分子量の合計は40以上である。また、R25a~R28aは、各々互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。Lは、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい2価若しくは3価の炭化水素基、-S-、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。mは、2または3の整数を表す。)
    The wiring board according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein the compound includes at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1A) to (3A).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

    (In the formula (1A), R 11a ~ R 15a each independently represents a hydrocarbon group of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group or contain a heteroatom 1 carbon atoms, which may to 20. Note that the R 11a - R 15a The total molecular weight of each group is 21 or more, and R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    In the formula (2A), R 16a to R 23a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. The total molecular weight of each group of R 16a to R 23a is 24 or more. R 16a to R 23a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. R 24a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
    In formula (3A), R 25a to R 28a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may contain a hetero atom. The total molecular weight of each group of R 25a to R 28a is 40 or more. R 25a to R 28a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. L represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these. m represents an integer of 2 or 3. )
  18.  前記時間Xが6時間未満である、請求項14~17のいずれか1項に記載の配線基板。 The wiring board according to any one of claims 14 to 17, wherein the time X is less than 6 hours.
  19.  隣り合う前記金属配線間の距離の最小値が40μm未満である、請求項14~18のいずれか1項に記載の配線基板。 The wiring board according to any one of claims 14 to 18, wherein a minimum value of a distance between the adjacent metal wirings is less than 40 μm.
  20.  酸化還元電位が0.40~1.30Vの化合物と粘着剤とを含む透明粘着層を少なくとも有する透明粘着シートであって、
     前記透明粘着層が、以下環境試験において時間Xが12時間以下を示す透明粘着層である、透明粘着シート。
    (環境試験は、前記透明粘着層(長さ5cm×幅4cm×厚み50μm)を基板上に配置し、前記透明粘着層上にPET基板(厚み50μm)をさらに配置して評価用サンプルを作製し、前記評価用サンプルを65℃、95%RHの条件で72時間放置し、その後、評価用サンプルを23℃、50%RHの環境下で放置して、前記透明粘着層のヘイズが3%に達するまでの時間Xを測定する。)
    A transparent adhesive sheet having at least a transparent adhesive layer containing a compound having a redox potential of 0.40 to 1.30 V and an adhesive,
    The transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, wherein the transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is a transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a time X of 12 hours or less in an environmental test.
    (In the environmental test, the transparent adhesive layer (length 5 cm × width 4 cm × thickness 50 μm) is arranged on a substrate, and a PET substrate (thickness 50 μm) is further arranged on the transparent adhesive layer to prepare an evaluation sample. The evaluation sample is allowed to stand for 72 hours under conditions of 65 ° C. and 95% RH, and then the evaluation sample is allowed to stand in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH so that the haze of the transparent adhesive layer is 3%. Measure time X to reach.)
  21.  前記化合物が、フェノール化合物を含む、請求項20に記載の透明粘着シート。 The transparent adhesive sheet according to claim 20, wherein the compound contains a phenol compound.
  22.  前記化合物が、酸化還元電位が0.50~1.20Vのフェノール化合物を含む、請求項20または21に記載の透明粘着シート。 The transparent adhesive sheet according to claim 20 or 21, wherein the compound contains a phenol compound having an oxidation-reduction potential of 0.50 to 1.20V.
  23.  前記化合物が、式(1A)~式(3A)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つを含む、請求項20~22のいずれか1項に記載の透明粘着シート。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

    (式(1A)中、R11a~R15aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R11a~R15aの各基の分子量の合計は21以上である。また、R11a~R15aは、各々互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     式(2A)中、R16a~R23aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R16a~R23aの各基の分子量の合計は24以上である。また、R16a~R23aは、各々互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。R24aは、水素原子、または、ヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。
     式(3A)中、R25a~R28aは、各々独立に、水素原子、水酸基、またはヘテロ原子を含んでもよい炭素数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。なお、R25a~R28aの各基の分子量の合計は40以上である。また、R25a~R28aは、各々互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。Lは、ヘテロ原子を有していてもよい2価若しくは3価の炭化水素基、-S-、または、これらを組み合わせた基を表す。mは、2または3の整数を表す。)
    The transparent adhesive sheet according to any one of claims 20 to 22, wherein the compound comprises at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by formulas (1A) to (3A).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

    (In the formula (1A), R 11a ~ R 15a each independently represents a hydrocarbon group of a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group or contain a heteroatom 1 carbon atoms, which may to 20. Note that the R 11a - R 15a The total molecular weight of each group is 21 or more, and R 11a to R 15a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    In the formula (2A), R 16a to R 23a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom. The total molecular weight of each group of R 16a to R 23a is 24 or more. R 16a to R 23a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. R 24a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may contain a hetero atom.
    In formula (3A), R 25a to R 28a each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that may contain a hetero atom. The total molecular weight of each group of R 25a to R 28a is 40 or more. R 25a to R 28a may be bonded to each other to form a ring. L represents a divalent or trivalent hydrocarbon group which may have a hetero atom, —S—, or a group obtained by combining these. m represents an integer of 2 or 3. )
  24.  時間Xが6時間未満である、請求項20~23のいずれか1項に記載の透明粘着シート。 The transparent adhesive sheet according to any one of claims 20 to 23, wherein the time X is less than 6 hours.
  25.  請求項14~19のいずれか1項に記載の配線基板を含む、タッチパネル。
     
    A touch panel comprising the wiring board according to any one of claims 14 to 19.
PCT/JP2013/063064 2012-05-10 2013-05-09 Laminate of conductive film, touch panel, wiring board, electronic appliance, transparent double-faced pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet WO2013168773A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012108938 2012-05-10
JP2012-108938 2012-05-10
JP2012199889 2012-09-11
JP2012-199889 2012-09-11
JP2012-217905 2012-09-28
JP2012217905 2012-09-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013168773A1 true WO2013168773A1 (en) 2013-11-14

Family

ID=49550805

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2013/063064 WO2013168773A1 (en) 2012-05-10 2013-05-09 Laminate of conductive film, touch panel, wiring board, electronic appliance, transparent double-faced pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW201347973A (en)
WO (1) WO2013168773A1 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103714882A (en) * 2013-12-07 2014-04-09 深圳市金凯新瑞光电有限公司 Production method of Ag-plated conducting film applied to touch panel sensor
WO2015145634A1 (en) * 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 リンテック株式会社 Double-sided adhesive sheet
WO2016148208A1 (en) * 2015-03-17 2016-09-22 日立化成株式会社 Adhesive sheet for image display device, adhesive layered body for image display device, and image display device
JP2017501867A (en) * 2013-12-20 2017-01-19 レール・リキード−ソシエテ・アノニム・プール・レテュード・エ・レクスプロワタシオン・デ・プロセデ・ジョルジュ・クロード Protective housing for moving tools to distribute cryogenic fluids
CN107636105A (en) * 2015-07-23 2018-01-26 三菱化学株式会社 Conductive member adhesive composition
CN113604171A (en) * 2021-08-18 2021-11-05 深圳市高仁电子新材料有限公司 Black optical cement and preparation method thereof

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104754884B (en) * 2013-12-26 2017-11-28 鹏鼎控股(深圳)股份有限公司 Flexible circuit board and preparation method thereof
KR102183097B1 (en) * 2014-03-10 2020-11-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Conductive film and touch panel including the same
US10091887B2 (en) * 2015-04-02 2018-10-02 Tactotek Oy Multi-material structure with embedded electronics
CN108932073A (en) * 2017-05-22 2018-12-04 祥达光学(厦门)有限公司 Touch panel and its pin configuration
CN111025692B (en) * 2019-10-10 2022-06-03 信利半导体有限公司 High-efficiency LCD manufacturing method

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005322792A (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Mitsui Mining & Smelting Co Ltd Printed wiring board, its production method, and semiconductor device
JP2007176961A (en) * 2005-12-26 2007-07-12 Nitto Denko Corp Removable water-dispersed type acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP2008169259A (en) * 2007-01-10 2008-07-24 Mitsubishi Plastics Ind Ltd Near-infrared absorbing transparent adhesive sheet
JP2008227008A (en) * 2007-03-09 2008-09-25 Mitsubishi Plastics Ind Ltd Conductive paste composition
JP2010003875A (en) * 2008-06-20 2010-01-07 Nitto Denko Corp Method of grinding back side of semiconductor wafer and adhesive sheet for use in the method of grinding back side of semiconductor wafer
JP2010017862A (en) * 2008-07-08 2010-01-28 Lintec Corp Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet for decoration
JP2010159365A (en) * 2009-01-09 2010-07-22 Shin Etsu Polymer Co Ltd Conductive polymer solution, conductive laminate, and input device
JP2010195971A (en) * 2009-02-26 2010-09-09 Daio Paper Corp Self-adhesive sheet
JP2010229246A (en) * 2009-03-26 2010-10-14 Daio Paper Corp Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP2011006658A (en) * 2009-05-29 2011-01-13 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet for connection of circuit member, and process for manufacture of semiconductor device
JP2012102219A (en) * 2010-11-09 2012-05-31 Shinshu Univ Method for producing self-adhesive sheet having conductivity

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005322792A (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Mitsui Mining & Smelting Co Ltd Printed wiring board, its production method, and semiconductor device
JP2007176961A (en) * 2005-12-26 2007-07-12 Nitto Denko Corp Removable water-dispersed type acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP2008169259A (en) * 2007-01-10 2008-07-24 Mitsubishi Plastics Ind Ltd Near-infrared absorbing transparent adhesive sheet
JP2008227008A (en) * 2007-03-09 2008-09-25 Mitsubishi Plastics Ind Ltd Conductive paste composition
JP2010003875A (en) * 2008-06-20 2010-01-07 Nitto Denko Corp Method of grinding back side of semiconductor wafer and adhesive sheet for use in the method of grinding back side of semiconductor wafer
JP2010017862A (en) * 2008-07-08 2010-01-28 Lintec Corp Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet for decoration
JP2010159365A (en) * 2009-01-09 2010-07-22 Shin Etsu Polymer Co Ltd Conductive polymer solution, conductive laminate, and input device
JP2010195971A (en) * 2009-02-26 2010-09-09 Daio Paper Corp Self-adhesive sheet
JP2010229246A (en) * 2009-03-26 2010-10-14 Daio Paper Corp Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP2011006658A (en) * 2009-05-29 2011-01-13 Hitachi Chem Co Ltd Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet for connection of circuit member, and process for manufacture of semiconductor device
JP2012102219A (en) * 2010-11-09 2012-05-31 Shinshu Univ Method for producing self-adhesive sheet having conductivity

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103714882A (en) * 2013-12-07 2014-04-09 深圳市金凯新瑞光电有限公司 Production method of Ag-plated conducting film applied to touch panel sensor
CN103714882B (en) * 2013-12-07 2016-08-31 深圳市金凯新瑞光电有限公司 A kind of production method of the plating Ag conducting film being applied to touch screen induction device
JP2017501867A (en) * 2013-12-20 2017-01-19 レール・リキード−ソシエテ・アノニム・プール・レテュード・エ・レクスプロワタシオン・デ・プロセデ・ジョルジュ・クロード Protective housing for moving tools to distribute cryogenic fluids
WO2015145634A1 (en) * 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 リンテック株式会社 Double-sided adhesive sheet
JPWO2015145634A1 (en) * 2014-03-26 2017-04-13 リンテック株式会社 Double-sided adhesive sheet
WO2016148208A1 (en) * 2015-03-17 2016-09-22 日立化成株式会社 Adhesive sheet for image display device, adhesive layered body for image display device, and image display device
CN107636105A (en) * 2015-07-23 2018-01-26 三菱化学株式会社 Conductive member adhesive composition
CN107636105B (en) * 2015-07-23 2020-04-03 三菱化学株式会社 Adhesive composition for conductive member
CN113604171A (en) * 2021-08-18 2021-11-05 深圳市高仁电子新材料有限公司 Black optical cement and preparation method thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201347973A (en) 2013-12-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5775494B2 (en) Silver ion diffusion suppression layer forming composition, silver ion diffusion suppression layer film, wiring board, electronic device, conductive film laminate, and touch panel
WO2013168773A1 (en) Laminate of conductive film, touch panel, wiring board, electronic appliance, transparent double-faced pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and transparent pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet
JP6008790B2 (en) Conductive film laminate, touch panel, wiring board, electronic device, transparent double-sided adhesive sheet
JP6645185B2 (en) Method for manufacturing transparent substrate with cured film
WO2013141275A1 (en) Transparent conductive laminate and touch panel
JP5940648B2 (en) Method for forming conductive pattern and conductive pattern substrate
US20140335350A1 (en) Method for forming protective film on electrode for touch panel, photosensitive resin composition and photosensitive element, and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2013141274A1 (en) Electroconductive member, touch panel using same, display device, and input device
JP2015121929A (en) Method for manufacturing touch panel substrate with cured film, photosensitive resin composition and photosensitive element used for the method, and touch panel
JP6551277B2 (en) Method for producing cured substrate with touch panel, photosensitive resin composition used therefor, photosensitive element and touch panel
WO2017010521A1 (en) Transparent electrode film, dimming element, and method for manufacturing transparent electrode film
JP5986934B2 (en) Protective film forming composition, transfer material, conductive film laminate, touch panel and image display device
JP6192556B2 (en) Curable resin composition, cured film thereof, and decorated glass plate provided with the same
JP2017107426A (en) Substrate with conductive pattern, method for manufacturing substrate with conductive pattern, and touch panel
JP6558419B2 (en) Photosensitive transparent material for protective film of touch panel electrode
JP2019095465A (en) Photosensitive refractive index control film, method for forming cured film pattern, cured film and electronic component
JP6430098B2 (en) Photosensitive transparent material for protective film of touch panel electrode
WO2021132389A1 (en) Conductive substrate manufacturing method, conductive substrate, touch sensor, antenna, electromagnetic wave shield material
JP2015018834A (en) Lamination method of resin layer and resin laminate for use therein
JP2019035801A (en) Transfer photosensitive film, method of forming cured film pattern, cured film and electronic component
JP2016070973A (en) Photosensitive conductive film, method for forming conductive pattern, and conductive film substrate
WO2018179095A1 (en) Transfer-type photosensitive film, method for forming cured film pattern, cured film and touch panel
KR20160044862A (en) Laminate structure for Flexible conductive plate and Method of manufacturing thereof
JP2018040934A (en) Photosensitive conductive film, conductive pattern substrate and method for manufacturing the same using the photosensitive conductive film, and touch panel sensor
KR20160044871A (en) Laminate structure for Flexible conductive plate and Method of manufacturing thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13788411

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 13788411

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1